THE Arte of Nauigation wherein is contained all the rules, declarations, secretes, & aduises, which for good Nauigation are necessarie & ought to be knowen and practised: and are very profitable for all kind of Mariners, made by (master Peter de Medina) directed to the right excellent and renowned Lord, don Philippe, prince of Spaine, and of both Siciles.
And nowe newely translated out of Spanish into English by John Frampton.
1581.
❧ Imprinted at London, by Tho mas Dawson, dwelling at the three Cranes in the Vinetree, and are there to be solde.
COnsidering with my selfe (right worshippefull,) that friendshippe and bounden duetie, doth force many times men to doe thinges, which if they were in the free choyse of him that doth thē, to leaue thē vndone without any conceaued discurtesie, not only hee woulde not doe them, but also, not asmuch as thinke of them. This I say that forced by friendshippe, and also mooued by persuasion of certaine pylottes, and Masters of shippes, I determined to translate this booke of the arte of Nauigation, compiled by Master Peter de Medina a spaniarde, in the yeere of our Lorde Iesus Christ. 1545. And because the worke is so principalle that in our time, the like in all respectes hath not beene sette forth in our tongue, considering it instructeth, and teacheth all the whole arte of Nauigation in all pointes, and is in as like sorte necessary for the Mariner, as the accidens is for the Gramarian, the weapon for the soldier, the Toole for the workeman, the Guide for the blinde, the instructor for the learner: and finally, comparable to a glasse, wherein all the course of the worlde, the Seas, the Windes, the Altitudes of the sunne, Moone, and Starres, are to bee seene, and knowne, as farre as naturalle reason may extende to. And beesides, the pleasure that I minded to doe, to the aforesaide persons, who mooued mee thereunto, as also to satisfie my good and continual desire, which I haue, to helpe, and bringe to light this good and profitable arte of Nauigation, whereby all men that are desirous to knowe, the secreete of this noble arte, may profite themselues threewith by reading it in our Englishe tongue, especially the Pylottes, Masters, and Mariners, considering their liues and lyuinges doe stand there vpon. And seeing as I belieue and trust, they shall gather much fruite theer by, and that by little and little, these sciences shall remaine aswell in our countries as in any other whatsoeuer. And seing this worke so necessary for the cōmon wealth, setting all other priuate busines aside I tooke in hande to translate this booke, being perused and alowed by the chiefe Pilot, & learned Cosmographers of the famous contractacion house of Seuil for the increase & knowledge of matters of Nauigation, for the subiects of Spaine, which worke so excellent tried & approued by the learned: And for this our Englād so fit, & by me now thus translated out of Spanish into English, I dedicate to your worship before al others, for that I know you to haue the arte of Nauigation inhigh account, & as highly to esteeme al men that indeuour the knowledge of the same, beseeching you to accept of my good wil and to be a protector of the same worke. And so beseeching the almightie, to giue your worshippe long life, and the aduancement in this common weale, that the good people wish vnto you, that aucthoritie may enable you to doe, that good, that your good inclination doth naturally moue you vnto.
❧A preamble of the authour vpon the Arte of Nauigation, wherein is declared the great excellencie of the said arte.
AMonge all other vertues some are so much the greater, by howe much it is comunicated of amongst others, wherby the vertue of Iustice is most perfit among other vertues, for it doth most communicate and participat withall, so that amonge all artes the arte of Nauigation is more excellent then others, for it doth not oenly communicate with them, but doth shut vp into it, the most principall of them, that is to say, Arithmeticke, Geometrie, and Astrologie. These haue excellencie among the Mathematicals, by the most true shewe that is made of their conclusions. And that this arte hath his beginning and greatnes among other artes, it appeareth by three reasons following.
The first, by reason of his subtillitie.
The second, by reason of his certaintie▪
The third, by reason of his profit.
For the first, who is sufficient to speake of so great a misterie that a man with a compasse, and certaine strekes marked in a carde, doth knowe howe to goe rounde about the world, and knoweth both by day and night whether he shall come, and from whence he shall depart, and howe much he shall go from one place to another, and that he goe certainly in his right way, by so long and so large a thing as the sea is, where is no way no signe therof, it is a misterie very difficult. And so it was considered by Salomon: who saith, that one of the hardest things to be found, is the way of a ship in the sea, for she followeth not any way, nor leaueth any signe where she went, And who is able to speake of so great a secret, that with a rounde instrument no greater then the palme of a mans hande called Astrolabio, the roundnesse of the heauen is measured, being so great th [...]t the vnderstanding of man cannot atteine thereunto. And therewith is taken the heigth of the sunne, passing it by a very litle and subtill place, being much greater then all the earth and the sea. And it is knowen howe nere and howe farre off it is from vs: And in like manner the heigth of the starres are taken, and by this we are so certainely guided, that so much as one point fayleth not. Likwise who can speak of the secrete & [...]inenes of the compasse, that being made with as much paper as a mans hande, and with certaine streekes marked thereon, doth note the windes. And with a litle iron put into it, is made an instrument that doth moue of it selfe, with onely the naturall vertue that a stone hath giuen vnto it, and mouing without the helpe of any thing, sheweth where is the East, the West, the North, and the South. And likwise the thirtie two windes which the Nauigation hath, and this is sheweth not onely in one place but in all places, and it sheweth it so certainly that thereby they do it, and are certaine of their purpose and pretence as many as are saylers in the sea. For the second, the certainetie of this art is so great, that it seemeth the knowledge of one man not to bee sufficient to ordaine it, nor yet of many men, more then God prouided a speciall grace and vnderstanding for that purpose, it is proued wherein it happeneth that a pilot commeth sayling, and a storme taketh him three hundreth leages in the sea, and the day very cloudie, and the night so darke that standing in the poope of the shippe, which is the hinder part, he seeth not the fore part of her, and scantly the maste, and making many turnes in the seas, running from one part to another, rising and descending, with a vehemencie of the windes and strength of the sea, and yet for all this, by the certainetie of the arte, he knoweth the way that she hath gone, and the place where she is, and being come to the lande, shee goeth to the port although it be in the night, not seeing the lande, likewise it happeneth many times, as the pilor goeth sayling, he findeth a rocke or shoolde CC. leagues in the sea from any lande, and marketh the place where he is, although he seeth not wherewith to marke it, for he seeth but the heauen and the water, and in it is not any thing wherewithal to marke or make any signe, because al doth moue, but marketh it in his carde by the land, he seeth in it and according to the art, which the carde hath, it is so certaine, that he and others both by day & night do knowe howe to preserue and keep them selues from that place going aside from it, because they would receiue no hurt, although it be vnder the water, that nothing of it is seene, whereby is concluded that although the other artes haue trueth, this hath more by reason of the demonstration so certaine, which sheweth to keepe a man from hurt and danger that he seeth not. For the third, I say there is no art of any that man vseth, so profitable nor so good as this art of Nauigation is, and this to be true it seemeth well, because by it we haue knowledge of diuerse and sundrie thinges in the worlde, and also of the trade with all partes of the worlde. And if nauigation shoulde cease, men shoulde be driuen to liue straightly, for that they should lacke many things which are necessarie for the life of man.
Also here is to be noted, that amonge al artes which men doe vse and practise, none is of so great peril and labour as the art of Nauigation, and chiefely in these dayes, seeing it is so greatly encreased and well neere the hol [...] [Page] roundnes of the worlde is sayled about: it is strange to consider that the auncient writers, neyther sawe it, no [...] thought of it, but rather helde it for vnpossible: it is worthie to be noted, that I haue seene many times a Pilote come from the East India, who hath bene one yeere vpon the way, and from our Indias foure or fiue monethes, passing such great daungers and troubles that many times they haue beene at the point of death, and being come home to their naturall countrey, all hath beene so forgotten of them, as if it had past in adream, and so they procure to returne with so geart good will, as though they went to a thing of pleasure. I thinke that couetousnesse of goods is not the cause thereof, nor any other worldly gaine, but I take it to come of the will of God, that although it be a thing so naturall to feare death, and great labour, yet all these labours and feares which they passe in the same Nauigation, are by them forgotten, for if they shoulde remember and feare them, there is none that woulde sayle on the sea: And seeing the wise pilot that so often times putteth his life in hassarde; and not onely his owne, but in his knowledge is put in trust the liues and goodes of many: wherefore if any person will vnderstand the arte of Nauigation, let him peruse this booke and arte, and studie therein, and he shall finde plainly all things set forth necessarie for the same, whereby pleasing God he will graunt, to his way the ende which hee desireth.
Errours escaped.
- Fol. 1. page 2, line 14. he in. for he is in.
- Fol. 2. page 2, line 36. and in planetes. for and in plantes.
- Fol. 3. page 1. line 31. prospectiue. for perspectiue.
- Fol. 3. page 2. line 2. the tenne heauens. for the tenth heauen.
- Fol. 11. page 1. line. 23. the king Iuba. the king I [...]b [...].
- Fol. 14. page. 1. line 47. one high. for no high.
- Fol. 15. page 1. line 20. the 1. for the first.
- Fol. 30. pag 1. line 22. is taken for one sphera Esphera, for is taken one spera, Esphera.
- Fol. 30. page. 2. line 1. is in auxe for is in his auxe.
- Fol. 34. page 2. line 23. your are distant. for you are so much distant.
- Fol. 45. page 1. line 3. howe soeuer it be. for howe great soeuer it be.
- Fol. 58. page 2 line 9. and of the guardes of his mouing, for of the guardes and of his mouing.
- Fol. 58. page 2. line 22. the month of bozina. for the mouth of bozina.
- Fol. 64. page 2. line 3. he be in the head at three. for he be in the head, at three.
- Fol. 69. page 2. line 27. goe one any viage. for goe on any viage.
¶The table of the bookes and Chapters that are conteyned in the Arte of Nauigation.
- The first booke treating of the worlde, of his order and composition.
- CAp. 1. What thing the world is, and how it is compounded of the heauens and elements, it declareth the number of the heauens and their monings.
- Cap. 2. Wherein is declared the three mouings which the eyght heauen hath, & how they are knowne.
- Cap 3. Howe the heauen hath a rounde figure or shape, and by 5. reasons how it was conuenient it should be so.
- Cap. 4. Of the noblenes of the heauen and of his col [...]or.
- Cap. 5. Of the tenth heauen called the first moueable and of his mouing.
- Cap 6. Of the nienth heauen called Christa [...]ino or heauen of water, it declareth how there is a heauen of water and of his qualitie.
- Cap. 7. Of the eight heauen which is the firmament or the starrie heauen, and of the light of the starres and their greatnesse.
- Chap. 8. How it is vnderstood that the sun doth enter into the signes, and the cause wherefore they haue the name of beastes.
- Cap. 9. What thing a signe is, and what likenesse it hath with that which it is compared vnto, and what day of the yeere the sunne entreth into euery signe.
- Cap. 10. Of the seuens heauens, of planets, and of their mouings, and howe they make impression, and cause generation and corruption in the lower bodies.
- Cap. 11. Of the elementall region, and how it is deuided into 4. elements.
- Cap. 12. Howe those elementes do shut vp one another, and why the water doth not couer all the earth.
- Cap. 13. How the earth & the water, both elementes do make one round body.
- Cap. 14. Howe the earth is scituated in the middest of the worlde.
- Cap. 15. How the earth is quiet & moueth not.
- Cap. 16. Of the foundation of the earth, and howe it may be saide that the earth is the foundation of the worlde.
- The second booke of the sea and his mouings, and how the Nauigation was inuented.
- CAp. 1. What thing the sea is, and wherefore it was called Occean.
- Cap. 2. Howe the sea doth apperteine to the perfection of the world, and without it the world woulde perish, and howe the water is ingendered in it.
- Cap. 3. By what meanes the water of the sea is salt, and howe it is more conuenient it shoulde be so, and better for the Nauigation.
- Cap. 4. Of the difference of mouings which the Occean sea hath.
- Cap. 5. What the cause is that the sea neuer ouerfloweth aboue her bounds, nor is augmēted.
- Cap. 6. Of the excellencie of the nauigation, and the antiquitie thereof.
- Cap. 7. Howe that by some tokens of the sun and mone shalbe knowen when will come anye tempest.
- Cap. 8. Of the fires and lightes that appeareth in ships which do saile when there is any storme.
- Cap. 9. Of other certaine signes, whereby may be knowne when stormes will happen in the sea.
- The third booke of the winds, their qualities & names, and howe we ought to saile with them.
- CAp. 1. What thing the winde is, and of what quallitie, and how it is ingendered.
- Cap. 2. How the winde doth not mooue right vp nor downe, nor contrariwise, but his mouing is in circle manner of water and earth.
- Cap. 3. wherefore the winde is not alwayes equall alike, but at sometimes more vehemente, and at other times calme, and wherefore it moueth to contrary place.
- Cap. 4. Of the wherling of the winde and what is the cause thereof.
- Cap. 5. Of the windes which are named in the cardes of Nauigation, and of the number of them and their names.
- Cap. 6. How the windes, conteined in the cardes of Nauigation doe compasse aboute the roundnesse of the worlde for to sayle by them.
- A carde to sayle by, wherein is conteined the Nauigation of the moste parte of Europe, Affrica, and Indias or new world, with the distance of leagues & height of degrees that euerything hath.
- Cap. 7. Of the order that the cardes of nauigation hath.
- Cap. 8. Of the accounte which the Pilote ought to haue of his way when he sayleth with a winde that differeth from his course.
- [Page] Cap. 9. Howe the Pilot shoulde knowe sayling by any maner of course, where the Meridian is.
- Cap. 10. Wherein is largely discoursed this rule aboue written.
- Cap. 11. Howe the Pilotte ought to choose his course for the place whether hee mindeth to saile.
- Cap. 12. Howe he ought to pricke his carde to knowe the place that the shippe is in.
- Cap. 13. Howe the Pilotte ought to knowe that his carde is iust and certaine, that there bee no errour in his Nauigation.
- Cap. 14. Of the number of leagues that is counted for a degree in euerie course of the Nauigation.
- Cap. 15. Of the number and measure, and of howe many partes euerie degree is compounded.
- The fourth booke of the heigth of the Sunne, & howe the Nauigation ought to bee ruled thereby.
- CHapter. 1. Wherein is declared. 17. chiefe principles which ought to be knowne in the height of the Sunne.
- Cap. 2. Of the excellencie of the Sunne, and of his mouinges.
- Cap. 3. Of the yeare when the Sunne goeth in his circle, and of other maner of yeares, and howe the leape yeare is counted.
- Cap. 4. What thing a shadowe is, and howe the shadowes ought to be looked on whiche the Sunne maketh for to take his heigth.
- Cap. 5. Wherein is declared what thing is the height of the Sunne, and howe it ought to be taken to knowe the place wherein a man is.
Here followeth the rules of the height of the Sunne.
- THe first rule when the Sunne and the shadow goeth towarde the North.
- The 2. When the Sunne is at the North, and the shadow at South, and the declination and height is more then 90. degrees.
- The 3. When the Sunne is at North, & the shadowes at the South, and the declination and height is iust. 90. degrees.
- The 4. The Sunne at the North, and the shadowes at South, and the height and declination come not to 90. degrees.
- The. 5. The Sunne in the Equinoctiall, and the height to be lesse then 90. degrees.
- The 6. When the height is taken in 90. degrees, and whether there bee any declination in the Sunne or no.
- The 7. When the Sunne and the shadowes goeth to the South.
- The 8. The Sunne at South, and the shadowes at North, and the declination and height are more then 90. degrees.
- The 9. The Sunne at South, & the shadowes at North, and the height and declination are 90. degrees iust.
- The 10. The Sunne at South, and the shadowes at North, and the height and declination come not to 90. degrees.
- Cap. 6. By the rules of the height of the Sun the degrees are to be learned, a man is of one side or parte of the Equinoctiall line, more then of any of the other partes.
- Cap. 7. Wherfore all the rules of the height of the Sunne are reduced into 90. degrees, more then any other number.
- Cap. 8. Wherefore doe we say that a man is from the Sunne the degrees that are taken in the Astrolabio, lesse then 90.
- Cap. 9. Howe it is vnderstoode that a man hath the Sunne vpon his head.
- Cap. 10. Howe to knowe the height of the sunne it must be seene whether it be a leape yeare, or what yeare it is.
- A rule to knowe the leape yeare.
- Tables of the declination or a departing that the Sunne maketh from the Equinoctiall line, in euerie day of the 4. yeares, as well to the North part as to the South.
- A Kalender of the Saintes dayes through the whole yeare, with a declaration of the principall feastes.
- A rule to knowe the Dominicall letter euerie yeare.
- Cap. 11. Howe that by the Kalender aboue written, a man shall knowe the moneth and the day wherein he is.
- The fift booke of the height of the Pooles.
- CHapter 1. What thing a pole is, and how among the Poles, the roundnes of the world is deuided.
- Cap. 2. Howe the height of the Pole Articke is to be taken, and the cause wherefore hee is taken.
- Cap. 3. Howe the account is to bee vnderstood which is taken of the pole Artick, or North.
- Cap. 4. Of the North starre, & of the gwards, and of his mouing.
- Cap. 5. That according vnto the course the gwardes are in, shalbee knowne howe many degrees the North starre is vnder or aboue the Pole.
- Cap. 6. How the rules of the height of the North starre ought to bee applied, and how they ought to bee added vnto, or taken away, according to the place where the gwardes are.
- Cap. 7. Wherin is declared certaine doubtes that in this mouing of the North starre may bee had.
- [Page] Cap. 8. Howe the height of the North starre may be taken, although the gwards be not seene.
- Cap. 9. How the altitude of the North starre may bee taken, although the Horizon bee not seene.
- Cap. 10. A Clock by the North starre, wherby is knowne what houre of the night it is in any time, or place a man is in.
- Cap. 11. Howe the height of the Pole Antarticke should be taken.
- The sixt booke of the compasses to saile by.
- CHapter 1. Of the compasses of Nauigation, and of the de [...]ects they may haue, and howe they may bee amended.
- Cap. 2. Howe the windes of the compasse may be vnderstood, and howe the Sunne passeth by them euerie day.
- Cap. 3. Wherin is declared the opinion had of the Northesting, & Northwesting of the compasses.
- Cap. 4. Of the inconueniences that may followe by the Northeasting and Northwesting of the compasses.
- Cap. 5. Of the regard or allowance which the compasses of Nauigation haue, & howe it ought not to be giuen them.
- Cap. 6. Of an instrument wherby the compasses may bee marked and knowne if they bee true.
- The seuenth booke of the Moone, and
[...] her increasing and diminishing doth serue in the Nauigation.
- CHapter 1. What thing the Moone is, and wherefore her light is not alwayes equall but continually it increaseth, or diminisheth.
- Cap. 2. Of the golden number, and howe it amounteth from one to nineteene, and wherefore no more not lesse.
- A rule to knowe the golden number of euerie yeare.
- Cap. 3. Wherein is declared the day & houre that the Moone maketh coniunction in euerie moneth of the yeare for euer.
- Cap. 4. Of the short account or reckoning without any booke to knowe in short time howe many dayes olde the Moone is in any moneth of the yeare.
- Cap. 5. How by the dayes of the Moone and the course where the Sunne ought to stand, may be knowne in what houre the tide will come.
- Cap. 6. Wherein is declared more at large the Chapiter aboue, with a shewe thereof.
- Cap. 7. How that by the houre wherein the coniunction was, shalbe taken out the [...]ide, & the regard or allowance that shalbe giuen to the Riuers.
- The eight booke of the dayes of the yeare.
- CHapter 1. What thing a day is, and howe it is reckoned, and in howe many partes it is deuided.
- Cap. 2. Howe that in all the artificiall daye the Sunne riseth and setteth different vnto suche as dwell in the world.
- Cap. 3. How that vnder the Equinoctiall the dayes and nightes are alwayes equall.
- Cap. 4. Howe the dayes and nightes goe alwayes increasing or diminishing vnto suche as dwell out of the Equinoctiall line.
- Cap. 5. Howe that the increasing and diminishing of the day is not equall in all places.
- A Table of the houres and minutes that such as dwell in anye distance from the Equinoctiall line, haue in the greatest day of the yeare.
- Cap. 6. Of the houres and minutes whiche they haue euerie day of the yeare in the height of 40. degrees.
- Cap. 7. Of the houres and minutes that the Sunne doth rise and set euerie day in the yeare.
- The last Chapter, how the Sunne doth giue his light in equall time of the yeare, to all suche as dwell in the worlde.
¶The first booke of the world, his order and Composition.
THe first chapter, what thing the world is, how it is compounded of heauens and elements, the number of the heauens are declared and there moouings.
THe world according to the Philosophers, is vniuersall, for all things, it confesneth therin, the heuens, y e stars, the earth, and the sea, with all the other elementes, and alltogether is called the worlde. For as Ptholomie sayth it is alwayes moouing and hath no time of rest: Seeing this vniuersallitie whiche wee call worlde, is compounded and ordeined into twoo distinct regions (that is to say) the region Celestiall, and the Region elementall
The first which is the region celestial, is altogether shining, void, and free from al variation, alteration and corruption. This according to the opinion of some auncient authors is diuided into niene heauens (that is to say) seauen of the planets, the eight is the firmament where the fixed starres are, the nienth the first moueable: of that opinion was Ptholomie the great, and after him Thebit, Alfragano, Albategni, and others which in astronomy did floorishe, more the late Astronomers (that is to say) the wise king Don Alonso, Iohn de Liueris, George Purbachio, Iohn de Monte Rey, and others do bring it very probable.
[Page] That vppon the nienth sphere there is another tenth, whiche is the first moueable, it is alone, and they prooue that there are tenne heauens moueable by the moouinges of the eyght heauen. Hereof is written vppon the first chapter of the sphere, that y e late Astronomers saw fixed stars in y e heauen to haue three moouings, whiche were found in the eyght sphere, whiche are these folowing one is the first moueable, that is to say of the tenth sphere which is the moouing of euery day, the which in foure and twentie houres maketh a reuolutiō from y e east to the west and this is made vpon the two poles of the worlde Articke and Antarticke.
It hath another moouing of the nienth sphere, and is called the second moueable, for it is alwayes according too the succession of the signes from the Weste into the Easte, agaynst the moouing of the first moueable, which moouing is made vppon the poles of the Zodiacke, and this according as King Don Alonso sayeth, is called Auge of the fixed starres, the third moouing is of him selfe, and is called the moouing of tripidacion, or according to the saying of the sayde King the moouing of accesse and recesse of the eyghte Sphere, and is made vpon twoo little circles in the concauety of the nienth sphere, in the beginning of Aries and Libra equally discribed in such sorte that as to euery one of the heauens shoulde not bee geuen more then one moouing of it selfe, and the eyght heauen should haue three moouings.
Heereof it commeth that twoo of them are vnproper to him but are caused of other twoo superiour heauens, that is to say of the nienth and tenth, vpon these tenne heauens or mouable spheres wee put the eleuenth, which according to the learned is called the imperiall heauen, that is by reason of his great brightnes, which alwayes continueth firme in one manner of order, without any moouing, and of this there are some reasons, whereby wee are perswaded, whereof there are two thinges noted.
The first is, that any manner of thing that mooueth from a place modueth his place eyther in all, or in parte, so that whiche doeth mooue mooueth into some place, forotherwise it were immoueable, therefore any of the moueable heauens mooueth place eyther altogether in him selfe or his partes, therefore he is in some place but not in any inferiour sphere, for the place must compasse about that which is put into the place, therefore hee in a superiour sphere. And it is conuenient that there bee some heauen stedfast and greater, wherein it maye mooue.
The second reason, is that there is put a difference in the heauen, that is to saye, before and after, on the ryght side and on the lefe, not in respect of as muche as toucheth vs, but for the nature of the thinges, So the Philosopher sayeth in the seconde of the heauen and the worlde, this cannot bee preserued by the moueable spheres, the cause is that in the moueable Spheres, the parte that nowe is at the ryght side, shall bee at the left. And the parte that is nowe aboue shall bee vnderneath, as experience sheweth, wherevppon it followeth, that it is conuenient there bee a fixed heauen, whiche in the behalfe of the thing, is founde the difference that is alleadged. This is the imperiall heauen, as it is sayde, whiche is higher then all other heauens. It hath greate dignitie, by reason of his brightnesse, cleannesse, establitie, and purenesse, heere is the Celestiall Courte, where they dwell that are of good fortune, enioying of GOD, whereas the Apostle sayeth, nor eye hath seene, nor eare hath hearde, nor canne enter into the hearte of man, that whiche GOD hath made ready for such as loue him.
The second chapter wherein is declared, the three moouings which the eyght heauen hath and howe they are knowne.
I Haue sayd in the chapter before that in the eyght heauen are found three moouinges different, and that some Astronomers were of opinion, that there were onely niene sphers moueable and others had opinion of tenne, and because that in this the auncient authors, and the writers doe not agree, I will shewe you the reasons, that were of these opinions of y e which is to be vnderstood, the first, Astronomers mainteined that there were only eyght heauens. This they obteyned by the moouing of the stars. For the stars mooue not of themselues, but in theyr circles, so sayth the Philosopher in the second of the heauen and the worlde, that the starres are fixed in the circle, as the knot in y e table: so y t by their moouings the difference that is betweene the planets which mooue, and the fixed starres are knowne, these in their moouinges are knowne to be different [...] one from the other, in swiftnes and in [...]lownesse and by their place, but the fixed [...]ar [...]es are so many in number that they cannot be toth prehended.
The long experience and obseruation of the Astronomers, attemed to the knowledge that [...]n doe mooue together in equall distance and neerenesse and continually the one doth keep with the other, so that their moouing is one so the Philosopher vnderstandeth in the first of the heauen and the worlde, therefore I say that these Astronomers vnderstood that in the eyght heauen was onely the continual moouing, that is from the East to the Wea [...], and that th [...] was the [...] moueable, it seemeth that the sayd Phylosopher did so vnderstand it in the place before aleadged, where he sayth that all the fixed stares are [...] the first indueable, & for this reason, there are so man [...]e there, and in [...] one of the inferiours [...]d more but one.
There was other Astronomers, that were not content to put only eight sphers but they atteined to the nienth. And the reason was because they sawe the eyght heauen to haue two moouinges different, the one is as aforesayd from the East to the Weast, and the other contrary to it: (that is to say) from the West into the East, and this motion is so slowe, that in A hundred yeeres it is scarsely to be perceiued.
This moouing Ptholomie declareth in the seauenth of the Almagesto, with most strong and certaine reasons, so that these twoo different moouinges beeing considered, they came to the knoweledge, that the eyght heauen was not the first moueable, for the first mouable hath one only moouing of himself most simple, the late Astronomers by their large speculatiō, founde fyxed Starres whiche mooued sometimes from the Weast too the North, And to the South, and more swiftely to the Easte then too the Weast, and at other times more swiftely towardes the North then too the South, The whiche Demonstration, because with onely twoo [...] aforesayde it could not bee determined, they put another thirde: moouing, and this is one of him selfe whiche is made in twoo small cyrcles in the heade of Aries and Libra, So that as the tyght Sphere hath three moouings, it is not onely necessary to put the nienth, but also the tenth: the reason is because one simple body, ought to haue but one only simple moouing, and that is vntoo him proper and naturall, so sayeth the Philosopher in the first of the heauen and the worlde, if they haue any more moouinges, they are improper to him.
And seeing that the eyght heauen is a simple bodie, as the Phylosopher vnderstandeth it in the same place, it is conuenient that of these three moouinges, one of them be proper and naturall to him and the other two improper. Likewise the moouing [Page] that is not proper to him, vnto another is proper and naturall. And seeing that it is not an inferiour sphere, it is conuenient to graunt, that vppon the eyght heauen are other twoo moouinges of whome is caused these twoo moouinges aforesayde, so that as the Philosopher saith, the eight heauē was the fyrst moueable. It is to bee vnderstoode, that hee and the Astronomers of his time, beleeued that the eyght heauen had onely the moouing of euery day. And they came not too the knowledge of the others, because they were not determined vppon, but in a very long continuance of time.
The thyrde Chapter howe the heauen hath a rounde figure and of fiue reasons whereby it was conuenient [...] should be so.
THE wisdome of the euerlasting father which treated and di [...]sed all thinges, ordeined that the heauen shoulde bee rounde vp these reason [...] following.
The first by reason of the similietude.
The seconde, vp reason of the commoditie.
The thirde for necessitie, Unto the firste, touching similitude or likenesse, because the sensible worlde, is made vntoo the [...]nesse of the worlde imaginat [...], wherein is no beginning nor ending, and for this cause the sensible worlde hath a fourme or figure, after the manne [...] of a sphere▪ in the whiche cannot bee. assigned or marked, beginning nor ending, For the second, of the commoditie or profit this is because in all bodies and Super, fimetros, the whiche are foure principally Oual Piramidal, Colu [...]al, [...] the Sphere is of gra [...]ter body and of all figures the rounde fygure or fourme doeth co [...]teiue most, and seeing that the rounde bodye is the greater, it followeth that all thinges which haue that fourme or shape are profitable in the world.
The thirde whiche is of necessitie, for if the world were of another fourme or shape then rounde, as like vnto a Tryangle or Quadrangle or of another fourme it woulde followe that some place shoulde be [...]ptie, or some body without a place, therefore an empty place cannot be put according to nature, for nature it selfe doeth abhorre it so muche, that more easily it consenteth that whiche is heauie too rise vp, or that which is light too descende, then too permitte an emptye place. So saith the maker of y e commē taries▪ rather the heauen will descende find the earth ascende, then nature to permitte any thing emptie,
A ristotle bringeth in other twoo reasons, to prooue that the heauen is round.
The first reason is, that vnto the firste and noble body is [...] the firste and moste noble Fygure or shape. The heauen is the moste noble and fyrstbodye and the rounde fygure is [...] perfect, therefore vnto the heauen is due the rounde houre [...] [...]ording too reason, for vnto euery one bodie nature gaue a fourme propercionably vntoo his woorke, euen as it appeareth in Beastes and in planets.
Therefore the proper woorke of heauen is to [...] mooue it selfe continually like to a circle. It was conuenient that it shoulde haue a fygure or fourme [...] and [...] for suche a moouing, and that is rounde, wherefore this lacketh the [...] which doeth let the moouing.
[...] sayeth, if the worlde were plaine some parte of it woulde be more neere to be the [...] other [...] euen as that parte whiche is ouer our [...]ades, wherevppon the [...] that is there, shoulde bee more [...] too be then that whiche is in the Easte or in the Weste, then those thinges whiche are neerer too vs doe seeme greater [Page 3] to vs, so the Starre whiche is in the middest of heauen shall seeme greater to vs then that whiche is in the Easte or in the West, which we see contrary, For the Sunne or another Starre seemeth greater in the easte or in the Weste, then in the middest of heauen, the cause of this is, not because the Sunne or the Starre is greater or lesser, nor that hee is father or neerer, But for some vapoures that riseth vppe and putteth them selues betweene our sight and the Sunne or the Starre, and as these Uapoures are thicke bodies they take awaye the Beames of the Sunne▪ or Starre from our sighte, in suche sorte, that the thing in his owne quantity [...] cannot bee comprehended.
As it may bee likened to a peece of money cast into [...] water, that because of the glystering of the Beames or strickes it seemeth to bee of greater quantitie then it is.
Euen so doeth the Sunne or starre, when the Uapoures are put betweene them and our sight.
The fourth Chapter, of the noblenesse of the Heauen, and of his coulour.
ARISTOTLE sayeth that the noblenesse of the heauen, is vnderstoode and considered in the clearenesse of his shyning, in the roundnesse of his fourme, in the vnitie of his equallitie, in the vertue of his moouing, in the heyght of his scituation, whiche is verye farre from the center of the earth, in the deminishing of his quantitye, whiche doeth ouerreach the imagination and measure of reason.
In nature nothing is like too it, neither comparable to it in vertue, The heauen is none of the elementes nor hath their qualities, nor is compounded of them, if it were it shoulde be corruptible, for all thing compounded of the elementes, shall bee desolued and corrupted.
The heauen is ingenerable inaugmentable, it cannot receiue straunge impressions, it is neyther light nor heauie, hote nor colde, drye nor moyst, formall or royall, but vertuous, for his vertue and influence doeth heate, so sayeth the Phylosopher in the fyrste of the Heauen and the Worlde, and so improperly it may bee sayde, it is not to bee broken nor penetrable, and likewise improper, thicke, or congealed, improperly it hath his coulor bright.
And for as muche as the coulour: which seemeth to vs it hath, is to bee vnderstoode, that our sen [...]es many times deceiueth vs, and the sight maye sooner deceiue vs their any other of our sences, for our eyes bee of so tender a composition, that any manner of fourme, sente of any visible thing, we feele griefe therof.
So sayeth Alacen in the prospectine; the thirtie niene rule.
And Aristotle in the booke of Qualitate Visus, whereby I say that nothing aboue the Moone can bee seene, But the Sunne, or the Starres, whiche Starres wee see by meanes of the light that they receiue of the Sunne.
But as touching the coulour of Heauen, It is to be noted, that it taketh coulour in one of twoo sortes, one is of it selfe. And so is the seconde qualitie, caused of the fyrste, Euen as the whyte, the blacke, and other coulours, In this sorte the Celestiall bodies haue no coulours, But in another sorte it is taken, that is to saye, commonly by all that which y e sight doth shew, & extendeth it selfe to that which is bright and percing, and in that manner the heauen hath [Page] his colour, that is to say, shining.
The fifth chapter of the tenne [...] called the first moueable and of his moouing.
SEeing there hath beene declared the number of the heauēs there shapes and qualities, I will speak perticularly of thē, and especially of that which serueth for our purpose, of the which I say it is manifest to our sight that the heauens mooue, and it is to be vnderstood, that a moouing is a passing from one place to another, so that all thinges which mooue passeth from one place to another, or from one limet to another, this moouing may be in one of these three sortes, by meanes of a circle or straight waye or from aboue downward, and so contrary. The first of those three, which is the moouing in circle manner, mooueth not place according to all his quantitie, but according to his parts, as it appeareth in a whele vnles it be al mooued from one place to another y t they make it go roūd, so they mooue all his partes, such is the moouing of the heauen, so that, whiche is now in the east afterward shalbe in the west, and although the heauen moueth not place according to all the proportion which it hath, yet it is well mooued which in it is mooued. And this hath commonly been doubted, if the first moueable of the heauens, were mooued by one only moouer or by many: And if by many howe manye there are, and in what sort they mooue it. Of the which it is to be noted that the heauens in the first moueable are moued of one mouer, and that they are not mooued of many, for one only is sufficient, & many would be superfluous, so saith the Philosopher or the first of his naturall phylosophie, that it is better to put one beginning then many, and a fewe rather then an infinite number, therfore it is better to put one onely moouer then manye who maketh this first moueable: there are diuerse opinions, one saieth God alone, bringing therefore that which Aristotle saith that the first moouer ought to be of an infinite strengthand seeing that God is of an infinite strength and hath created al thinges of a reasonable strength, it seemeth that God onely is he that mooueth the first moueable. Others there are that proueth that the firste moouer is a certaine intellectiue whiche mooueth, the whiche they prooue in this manner. If the first moouer were God it would folow either that y e mouing of heauen were done at one instance, or the doings of God be measured with time.
Therefore it cannot be sayde that the heauen is mooued at one instant, seeing that all Astronomers holdeth and the sight sheweth it, that in foure and twentie houers there is one reuolution a [...]complished. N [...] the seconde can be. For the saide Philosopher in the fourth of the naturall philosophie sayth, the euerlasting is not in time nor his dooings are measured with time, but this is it which most commonly is vnder stoode, that an angell maketh the first moouing, and likewise al the other heauens haue intellectiue motion whiche mooueth them in their owne moouings and here by it appeareth howe orderly they mooue since the time that GOD made them, vntil the like moouing doe cease when his will shalbee.
Therefore I say that the first moueable, of the first moouing which is of the tenth heauen according to that as hath been spoken of, geueth a turne once in foure and twenty houres round about the world, from the east into the west, & with this his mouing he catcheth & carrieth with him al the other inferiour heauens and maketh them giue a turne to the world in the time that hee geueth it. Although that their owne moouinges be contrary to this, this is shewed because we see that the starrs, the sunne, the moone▪ and the other planets haue their first originall, and are created in the east. And by little & little they rise vp and assend vntill they come to the meridian and so with one accord they descende and come to the west, and [Page 4] alwayes they make this moouing in the same foure and twentie houres as the tenth heauen doeth, so that continuallye they obeye the moouinges of the first moueable.
And it is to be noted, that for as muche as it is saide of this forceable moouing or catching which the firste moueable doeth, vntoo the other inferiour heauens, it is to bee vnderstoode that in the Celestiall bodies is no forceable moouing or violence, nor any resistance or contradiction, but all with one conformitie or accorde doe follows the fyrste moouing.
And so when it is sayde that the first moueable doeth catch the other inferiour heauens it ought to be vnderstoode soundly as if he should say the inferiour or lower heauens are mooued of the higher by an accedent, euen so as the marriner mooueth the shippe moouing her selfe, wherin he saileth or as the water in a vessell, the vessel being mooued the water also mooueth so it is to be vnderstoode, that the inferiour heauens doe mooue themselues by the moouing of the firste moueable, so by that aforesayde it seemeth that alwaies there may be a dout saying.
( A doubt:) how can it be that the tenth heauen moouing it selfe continually without ceasing from the easte to the west, that the other inferiour heauens moouing them selues with him doe make their owne moouinges contrary, so that in one selfe time there is made by one selfe body different moouinges.
A Declaration for the declaration of this, the present exāple is to be noted, if in y e wheele of a mil there were set a flee or an Aunt, although that the wheele doeth make his moouing very quicke and hastie yet the Aunt or Flee may be going at their leisure, and make their moouing contrary to that whiche the wheele doeth. As also if the wheele carrieth them rounde about and in a short space geueth a turne yet they may make an ende of their moouing at their leysure, so that in this sorte the moouing which the tenth heauen doth make which is in euery foure & twenty houres, the inferiour heauens although they are mooued of him they make their owne moouinges contrary, the whiche euerye one of them by himselfe doeth make an ende in different times.
The sixthe chapter of the nienth heauen, called Christaline or heauen of water, it is declared howe there is a heauen of water, and of what qualitie it is of.
THe nienth heauen called the seconde moueable, which first of all challengeth the mouing from y e Weste into the Easte for his owne, because of the tenne moueable heauens. This is the first, and that most by leysure maketh his moouing from the West into Easte, this is called the Christaline Heauen or Heauen of water, of the whiche is written in Genesis the first Chapter. Where GOD sayde, let the Firmament bee made in the middest of the waters, So that the waters remayne diuided, some aboue the Firmament and others beneath, the whiche Firmamente is the eyght heauen. In suche sorte that of waters which remayne aboue the Firmament is this nienth Heauen, Of this it seemeth there may bee a doubt, saying.
A Doubt, Howe canne there bee waters aboue the Heauen, seeing that naturally water is heauie, and all bodies whiche are heauie doe naturallye descende, neither canne it bee saide that GOD hath them there, for any myracle, but by a naturall meanes.
A Declaration, to this Nicholas [Page] De Lyra, answereth in the glosse vppon y e sayd article the first of Genesis, where hee sayeth that these waters are taken here in a double sence, for those waters which are aboue the firmament be of a celestiall nature, that is to say, of the like qualitie that the heauens are of, and of their owne nature: And those which are vnder the firmament are of ellymentall nature. This heauen is called the heauen of waters or christaline heauen, because it hath a pearcing light like to water, and cleere shining like to christal, of this nienth heauen, or of the tenth we haue no signe, nor there is any in them: nor our sight doeth passe the eyght heauen where the fixed stars are.
The seauenth Chapter of the eyght heauen, which is the firmament or starry heauen, and of the light of the starres, and of their greatnes.
THe eyght heauen, which is the starrie heauen, is called the firmament by reason that in it are the fixed starres, in such sort as none by him selfe moueth but altogether, of these it is to bee vnderstode, that although we see them bright, yet there is none of them that haue any light of them selues, but the Sunne giueth light vnto them all, for he onely hath light and no other bodie. This light God made the first day, as it is written in Genesis the first chapter. And the texte sayth that God saw the light and it was good. Saint Austine speaketh of the light that it is a corporall substance, souereigne and simple, multiplied in vertue, and shyning with brightnes without resistance it is communicable and delightfull and therefore among all other bodies theris nothing so profitable, so quiet, so vertuous as the light: The light is sprinkled abrod from the heauen to the earth it is the beautie of all visible creatures, and is the cause wherewithal the other bodies or the world be praysed, seeing that I say that the stars haue no light of themselues, more then that which they receiue of the sunne. So Albertus Magnus writeth in the second of the heauen and the worlde, The sixt chapter, where he saith, al the stars of heauē are lightned of the sūne, as also the moone, but there is a difference in receiuing of their light, & so they differ in receiuing their vertu, as they differ in y e noblenes of nature in such sort as, some are most pure and most noble, & these, receiuing their light at one instant it doeth penetrate them, from the superficie which is opposite to the sunne euen to the other superficie, so that all the starres remain cleane and full of light, others also are penetrated with the sunne, although that by their nature they decline to som colour, but howsoeuer it bee, the sunne doeth penetrate them at one instant, & filleth them full of light euen as a candle is lighted with fire, and heere it is to be noted that in this eyght heauen is the Zodiacke where the twelue signes are, or y e houses of the sun. These signes are cōpounded euery one of a certaine number of starres, & besids the signes, there are other 36. images, which are also compounded of starres, so that ther are in all. 48, and these starres, which doe compounde these signes and images are in number. 1021. of these speaketh Alfragano in the third booke of the assembling of the stars, that the least of the fixed Starres to a notable sight is greater then all the earth. And if al the bodie of the earth were put into the place where the fixed Starres are, although it had light by reason of the great distance, it would bee so little that we should not see it, but this authoritie is not to be vnderstoode of the planets, for all of them bee not greater then the earth, nor it is to be vnderstod of all the fixed starres, therefore it is to be sayd of them that are most notable to the sight. For there are some fixed starres so little, that wee see them not, there be others also that although wee see them by reason they are little, they are not accounted of the Astronomers, but onely such as are great and these be not all of one greatnes or quantitie, but [Page 5] of diuerse quantities, and therfore they be diuided into sixe differences. So Ptholomy hath it in his Almagesto, and the king Don Alonso in his tables.
The eyght Chapter, howe it is vnderstoode, that the Sunne doth enter into the signes, and wherefore the signes haue the names of beastes.
IN the Chapter whiche goeth before, was sayde that in the eyght heauen is the Zodiack wher the twelue signes haue their place or houses of the Sunne, and of this it seemeth that two things may be douted. ( The first doubt) To the fyrst, seeing that these signes or starres are in the eight heauen and the Sunne in fourth, how can the sunne enter into the signes, seeing there is so great distance betweene the sunne and them, ( The second doubt) To the second, if euery one of the signes be compounded of starrs wherfore doe we say that one signe is called Aries, whiche is as much to say a Ram, and another Taurus, which is asmuch to say a Bull. And likewise of others: seeing that in the heauen there is not any beastes. ( The first declaration) To the first, although it be true y t the signes be in the 8. heauē, & the Sunn in the fourth, it is to be vnderstoode that the moouing which the Sunne maketh in all the yeere is, that he mooueth himselfe vnder the starres of the signes, and so when we say that the Sunne is in such a signe, it is vnderstood that then he mooueth himself vnder the starres of that signe, as also any of vs may stande vnder any signe or vnder the Sunne, And the distance that is from the one to the other doeth not let it. (2. Declaration) To the second, it is so, that in the heauen are no beastes, but these are so named by reason of the effectes whiche the Sunne worketh, being in euery one of y e signes which doe followe and answere by propertie or likenesse to one of these beasts, and by demonstration of suche an effect, it cōpareth it self to the likenes of such a beaste, or to another thing that it is likened vnto, as in y e chapter folowing is declared, that the Sunn entring into euery one of these signes, doeth cause diuers effectes. Therefore it is to be noted, that of these twelue signes foure of them are moueable, foure fixed, foure common. The moueable are Aries, Cancer, Libra and Capricorne, these signes are called moueable, for the sun entring into euery one of thē, it is said, that the disposition of the ayre doeth vary and not continue in one estate, and likewise the Sunne entring into Aries, it mooueth from winter into sommer, and entring into Cancer, it mooueth from Sommer into Estio, and entring into Libra it mooueth from Estio to Otonno which is haruest time. And entring into Capricorne it mooueth frō Otonno or haruest time into winter. The fixed signes are Gemini, Virgo, Sagitarius and Pisces, they are called fired, for the Sunne entring into any of them, it is sayde, that the time and the disposition of the ayre doeth continue in his owne estate, They which are common, are Taurus, Leo, Scorpio, & Aquarius, they are called common signes, for there appertaineth to them some thing of the moueable and of the fixed, and so the common in parte is moueable, and in parte is fixed.
The nienth Chapter what a signe is, and what likenes it hath with that whervnto it is compared, and what day of the yeere the Sunne entreth into euery signe.
I Haue sayde, that the signes of the Zodiacke haue names of beastes, by reason that y e effects which the Sunne doth woorke by entring into euery one signe, they haue likenesse or property, with that beast or with that thing wherof the signe beareth name; And because I thought good to declare this at large. I will shewe what thing a signe is, and how many manner of wayes it is taken, and the likenesse that euery signe hath with that wherewith [Page] it is compared, and in what daye of the yeere according to the common opinion, the Sunne entreth into-euery signe, For the first is to be noted, that a signe according to the saying of Sacro busto, is a piramide of foure sides, whose seate is that superficie, whiche wee call signe, the sharpenesse therof is towards the center, the signes are those starres, y t the Astronomers were accustomed to contemplate on, loking on their light or brightnes, wherby they knewe what wether would come, and many were accustomed to behold them, and thereby they foresaw the qualities of the summer, winter, and other times of the yeere. For the principal starres in their risinges and in their setting, doe shewe the qualities of the times, A signe is also taken by one parte of the Zodiacke, the which the sunne doeth passe, after he hath gone thirtie degrees from his moouing. And because the sunne in one yeere doeth passe the zodiacke, whiche hath three hundreth and threescore degrees, therefore the signes or houses of the sunne are twelue, so sayth Ptholomy in y e second Quadri Partiti, that the signs are twelue, answering to the twelue partes of the earth, therefore of these signes. The first is Aries, and the reason why this signe is first named before y e others, is because that some holdeth, that in the first degree of this signe, the sunne made his moouing the first day y t he began, & that day he was in the equinoctiall: and also for because the sun entring into this signe making heate, bringeth foorth moisture, by the which it is a liuely moouing of generation, This signe is called Aries, by similitude euen as a sheepe is weake in one parte of the bodie, and is strong in the other, so entring the sunne into this signe y e. 11. of Marche, in the first parte is a little hote, and in the last with greater strength his heate is felt.
The 2. signe is called Taurus, to vnder stande, that as the Bull is a strong beaste, so entring the Sunne into this signe the eleuenth of Aprill, it heateth with more strength then before.
The third signe is Gemini of this is vnderstood▪ that the sunne entring into him y e eleuenth of May, with his vertue of heating ingendreth.
The Iour [...]h signe is Cancer, into the which the sunne is entred the eleuenth of Iune, it is marked like a Crabbe.
The fifth signe is the figure or shape of a Lion, which is a strong beast, collericke and full of anger, so that the Sunne entring into this signe the fourteenth of Iuly, it bringeth a strong heat.
The sixth signe is Virgo, by the whiche is noted, euen as the virgine is barren and doeth not engender, so the Sunne entring into this signe the fourteenth of August, the earth is barren and bringeth not foorth any thing by reason of the great heate.
The seauenth signe is Libra, marked by a payre of Ballance of like equalitie, to vnderstand, that the Sunne beeing entred into this signe the thirteenth of September, the day is equall with the night.
The eyght signe is marked with a Scorpion, which is a Beaste, that with the tongue he flattereth, and with the tayle he poysoneth, so when the Sunne is entred into this signe the fourteenth of October, the first part thereof is temperate, but the last is colde.
The nienth signe is Sagitarius which is a beast offenciue, so that the Sunne entring into this signe the thirteenth of Nouember, offendeth with colde and snowe.
The tenth is Capricorne, wherein is vnderstoode that euen as the Gote from the lower parte goeth vp to that which is high, so the Sunne entring into this signe the fourteenth of December, from the lowest parte of our hemisperio beginneth to goe to that which is high.
The. 11. signe is Aquarius, marked by a man y t sheddeth water for to shewe, that entring the Sunne into this signe y e 11. of Ianuary, he sendeth to the earth water & moisture. The. 12. signe is Pisces, marked by 2. fishes in the water, which is cold & moist, to shew y t entring y e sun into this signe y e. 12. of feburary y e [Page 6] weather is colde and moist. Of the aforesayde it may be knowne, the diuersitie of the effectes, that the sunne maketh in euery signe. But it is to bee noted that this doeth happen to such as doe dwell from the equinoctiall towardes the north or pole articke, for such as inhabite towardes the pole antartike, the sunne beeing gone foorth of the equinoctial, doeth make contrary effectes to them, so that when wee haue summer they haue winter, in such sorte that the order of the signes in the Zodiacke is not conformable or agreeable to all for if vnto vs commeth forth first Aries before Taurus, to them commeth foorth first Taurus before Aries, & in like sort of the other signes as in the materiall sphere is plainely shewed.
The tenth Chapter, of the seauen heauens, of the planets, and their moouings, and how they haue impression, and cause generation and corruption in the inferiour bodies.
SEeing that y e eyght heauen hath bin treated of, and of the stars & signes that are in it. It is conuenient to speake of thē seauen inferiour heauēs which are named by the planets, of the which it is to be vnderstoode that of the seauen heauens. The first is Saturn▪ the second is Iupiter, the third is Mars, the [...]ourth is Sol, the fifth is Venus, the sixth is Mercurie, & the seauenth Luna, more neere vnto vs, then any of the rest, these seauē planets are called stars, which are moueable not because they erre, but because their mouings be not vniform nor agreable, these do moue y e elemēts & do corrupt the things that are corruptible they bring cloudie weather, and raiseth vp the waues of the sea, they mooue tempests, and causeth flowers to grow, and the heauēs & planets haue natural vertue to cause these effectes, the works of these planets are diuers according to y e variatiō of the countries & regions, & therby their impressions are printed in beastes, birds, and plantes, and in men they incline more to one then to other. But although they do to incline & moue, they doe not constraine nor binde by force, But rather as Ptholomie sayth, y e wise man is lord ouer the starres He is wise that followeth not sensualitie, but reason, euery of these planets haue a sphere of his owne, wherin he moueth in circle wise, And the superiour circle mooueth round about so nere to y e inferiour, that betweene the one and the othere is no space nor any thing emptie. so that these heauens do shut one with another, & they are nere together in such sort, that any thing how litle or smal soeuer it be, cannot put it self between the one and theother, as it appeareth in the elementes, that betweene the one and the other their is no place emptie: so y t we see betweene the water & the earth, or between the ayr and the water, or betweene the fire and the ayre, remain no place, y t any thing may be put between: more it is to be noted, that although the heauens are so ioyned together, & neer one to the other, that this ioyning together doe not let them of their moouing, so that they mooue very distinctly in differente times the one from the other, without any let of their moouing or standing still one onely pointe in such sorte, that the tenth heauen maketh his moouing in twentie and four houres, & the nienth heauen that is neere vnto him, in fortie niene thousand yeres, and likewise the eyght heauen doeth make his moouing in thirtie & sixe thousand yeeres, and another in seauen thousand, and the seauenth heauen which is next to him maketh an ende of his moouing in thirty yeres. These are things which doe teach vs the greatnes and power of the maister & maker of such workes, vnto whom the sayde woorkes giueth praise, so did the royal Prophet consider in the eyghteene Psalme where hee sayth, The heauens doe shewe and manifest the glorie of the Lorde, and in another place, Lorde the heauens shall confesse thy great maruelles, frō the beginning thou madest the earth, & the heauens are the workes of thy handes. And it is to be noted that euery one of these heauens haue [Page] twoo moouinges one is the first moueable, which is made from the east into the west, turning againe into the cast as it is declared: The other moouing which is proper to euery one, is made by a circle oblique, contrary to the first, that is to saye, from the west into the east: Of this is to bee noted, that according to the opinion of Frauncis Capuano, it was necessary that in the heauēs were twoo contrary moouinges, one in the first moueable, and another in the lower spheres, and this for twoo reasons, The first is, because the first moueable doeth mooue so swift, and with so great hast, that scarsely his moouing can bee considered, seeing that in twentie and foure houres hee passeth all the space that he doeth occupie, whiche causeth, that he caryeth with him, all the lower heauens, and the fire, and the measured region of the ayre, as it is written, in the first of the Metheoros, so that if the eyght & nienth sphere and the heauens of the planets did not mooue vnto the opposite parte, with a contrarie moouing, the sayd first moouing would not onely mooue vnto the Celestiall Spheres, and to the fire, but woulde mooue all the ayre, water, and earth rounde about, with his daily moouing, and there woulde remaine nothing quiet nor firme. The second reason is because the starres with their moouing doe cause influence in the inferiour, and so they make impressiō as they mooue, but if euery one did mooue, according to their onely moouing, that is to saye, from the Caste into the Weste, so that if they mooued altogether with one vniformitie, they would bring foorth one equall and vniforme effecte, the which shoulde bee an inconuenience. For that onely generation is not sufficient, but it is conuenient, that there bee corruption, and so it was conuenient, that all the Spheres, shoulde modue in their daylye moouing, rounde about the earth once in a naturall daye, because all of them may communicate with vs their impressions: and likewise that they mooue in the seconde moouing in the Zodiack, comming together, and deuiding them selues one from another to make that the effectes shoulde be different. Aristotle sayeth, in the second of generation, that the moouing of the Starres in the circle, oblique, that is to say, in the Zodiacke is cause of the diuersitie of effectes, And so the Sunne in the summer comming nere vnto vs, causeth generatiō, & likewise in Otonno, or Haruest time, and in the winter going [...]rō vs causeth corruption.
The eleuenth Chapter, of the Region elementall, and howe it is diuided into four elementes, and why it is not diuided into any more or lesse.
IN the Chapters before writtē hath bin declared the order of the heauēs, their nūber & mouings, therefore I will nowe speake of the elementes, howe they are ordained and deuided, of the which it is to be vnderstood, that the elementes are foure and no more, by reason, that first of all they haue foure qualities, and it maye bee sayde, that they Ioyne in sixe kinde of waies. Let vs see if all sixe be possible. One ioyning is hote and cold, another moist and drie, the thirde hote and drye, the fourth hote and moyst, the fifth moyste and colde, the sixth colde and dry. The twoo first be not possible, because there cannot bee twoo contraries in one subiect. The foure which remayne are possible, in the whiche the actiue one with the other ioyneth with y e passiue. These foure do constitute the four first essentias which are called elementes, And this is by reason of their fyrste simple bodies, euen as it seemeth in their quallities. That is to saye, in the fire, in the ayre, in the water, and in the earth, because we see that the fire is hot and drie, the ayre hote and moiste, the water colde and moyste, the earth colde and drye, by the which difference of qualities of the first bodies, they are parted in the same maner. All these elements doe moone, by the higher moouing [Page 7] except the earth which is immoueable. So sayth Albertus the great in the first of his Metheoros, the fourth Chapter, it is necessarie that wee saye the moouing, which wee see from the inferiour, that is to say, the moouing of the elementes proceede of the superiour, euen as of his owne cause, but it must be vnderstoode of the superiour elements the which in their continuall moouing, they mooue in circle manner, onely the earth which is most Iowe, remayneth without moouing, not onely circuler neither yet straight.
The twelfth chapter howe the elementes, doe compasse about one another, and wherefore the water doeth not couer all the earth.
THese foure elementes, that before are spokē of ought to be vnderstoode that the one doeth compasse about the other in this manner, the earth is in the middest of al, like to a poynte or Center of the worlde, neere vnto the which is the water, and vppon the water and the earth is the ayre, and vpon the ayre, the fire, and the element of the fire is vpon the ayre Albenruys proueth it in the fourth of the heauen and the worlde in his thirty two commentary: where he sayth, we see that all fire moueth vpwarde and is eleuated vppon the ayre, therfore as his mouing is not infinite it is conue [...]ient that it come to one place where it is na [...]ral, and there it is conserued, whereupon it is concluded that the fire is aboue the ayre, it is prooued by an example in this sort. If there be any that haue not seene the sea but seeth how all riuers goe to demain in one pla [...] as their moouinges the not infinite, it is necessarie to conclude and appoint some place, where the waters may ioyne, And this plate is the sea, so it is conuenient to graunt that vpon the ayre is a place in the hollowe parte of the roūdnes of the moone, where the [...] is gathered together. Therefore I say that these Elementes eyther of them doe compasse in roundnesse equally from euery parte of the earth, sauing the water in that parte of the earth, which is discouered, for the breathing and life of all liuing creatures, of this it is to be noted according to the saying of Albertus the great, that the water did couer all the earth, and also he sayth in the second of the Metheoros the thirde treatie the seconde chapter, wee see the order of the elementes are in suche sorte, that alwayes the ioyning of the one is in the hollownes of the other, & this is by reason his roundnes doeth girde him therevnto, and because this is naturall, and sometimes it was so, y t at somtime the earth was couered with water, and all bodies naturally haue one proper place, whereby it is conuenient, that all be filled, for otherwise there woulde be some thing superfluous in nature, so it is euident, that the proper place of the waters is the superficie of the earth, for alwayes they mooue by that place.
Also when at any time two elements doe not agree in any quallitie, commonly it is called simbol, wherewithall the one doeth ioyne with the other.
Therefore it is necessarie, that there bee some meane that they communicate and ioyn together, and seeing the earth and the ayre haue no simboll, it is conuenient, that they ioyne together by meanes which is the water that hath a simboll with both, and so it is shewed that according to nature all the earth was couered with water: Of this may be asked what is the cause, why the roundnes of the elementes, fayled more in the water then in the others: it is answeared that GOD did make nothing in vayne but alwaies woorketh for the best.
Therefore as God by his only grace and wil made man, and al other things, I leaue this part of the discouery of the earth, that man and Beastes might be conserued in their owne likenes.
Of this haue past many questions, this is certaine that GOD of his omnipotencie made it. And so it is written in Genesis the first chapter, that [Page] God sayd lette the waters come together, that are aboue the heauen, and let the earth be seene drye.
The thirteenth Chapter, how the earth and the Water, both Elementes, make one round bodie.
IT is to bee noted, that these twoo Elementes, Earth and Water, both together doe make one rounde body, Of this speaketh Iohn de Sacro [...]usto in the first chapter of the Sphere, The earth is rounde, which is shewed by the signes and the other Starres, which rise not, nor goe downe equally to all men wheresoeuer they bee. But first of all they rise to them that bee in the east part, rather then to them that are in the west, and why they appeare to one rather then to the other, y e roundnesse of the earth is the cause thereof, & that to bee true, that the stars are seene to some rather then to others, it appeareth by the eclipse, for one selfe eclipse of y e moone, which we see at the first houre of the night, they which are in the easte partes doe see them in the thirde houre of the night, whereby it seemeth, that it was first night, and the sunne was first set to them, before it was set to vs, the [...]ause is, the roundnes of the earth, & that the earth is rounde from the north vnto the south, and so contrarywise it sheweth it selfe, for vnto those which are towardes the north, appeareth alwayes some starres, which are neere to the pole artick, & y e other stars which are neere to the pole antartik are neuer seene. But if any went from the north towardes the south or midday he might goe so farr, that the stars which he saw first might be layde vnder the horizon that he should not see them, and howe much more he came towards the south, so much lesse hee should see the starres of the north, and then he should see the starres of the south, that first he coulde not see, as contrariwise, it would happen to such as went from the south to the north, and the cause of this is the roundnes of the earth, likewise if the earth were plaine from the easte to the west, so sonne or equally, the stars would rise vnto those in the east partes as to those in the west, whereby it seemeth false, by the fyrst reason.
Item if the earth were plaine from the north to the south, or by the contrary, the stars that one should see should neuer be set from him wheresoeuer hee should goe, the which is false, by the second reason, for if in any manner of wise the earth doe seem plain, vnto the sight of men, it is for the great quantitie that it containeth, in respect of our sight. And if any should say that the mountaines and valleis doe let the roundnes of the earth. To this is vnderstoode, that the mountaines haue not any proportion that should let the earth to be round And if there be any thing in that sorte they be as the nayles of a wheele, that very little or nothing doe let his roundnes, but note that in one of twoo manner of wayes a round thing may be spoken of, the one is by rule, that is to saye, when the lines which are straightly caried from y e center to the circumference, be equall, in this sorte the earth is not perfectly round. In another sorte it is sayd to be round irreguler, that is, whē all partes are not of equall distance frō the middest, so is the roundnes of the earth. And seeing it hath beene declared how that the earth is rounde. I saye that the water is likewise round which is prooued by the reasons aforesayde.
Also it is prooued, that suche as sayle by the Sea, for to discouer the Lande, they alwayes goe vppe to the toppe of the Shippe, whiche is the highest parte, and happeneth to see the Lande from thence, and from no other place, And this is by reason of the roundenesse whiche the water hath.
The fourteenth chapter, Howe the earth is scituated in the middest of [...] worlde.
[Page 8] ALFRAGANO saith, in the fourth difference, if the earth were not in the middest of the world it would not be of equal distance from euery part of the heauen. But Euclides bringeth in the firste of the Elementes, that it standeth in the middest, and is equall in distance from all partes, and prooueth so, for if the earth were not in the middest, it woulde reache more to the Easte parte, or too the West. And for a similitude, when the Sunne or other Starre, were in that parte, it woulde reach more neere to the earth, then it it were in y e other part, & so they would seeme greater: Which is false, for wee see that all people whiche are vp [...] on the face of y e earth the stars seemeth to them of one selfe quantitie in what parte of the heauen soeuer they be, be it in the middle heauen, in the easte or in the west. And the cause of this is, by reason the earth is of equall distance from the Sarres, it followeth therefore that it is in the middest of the Firmament.
Item if the earth by any of his partes, were more neare to the heauen in one place then in another, he that were in that part vpon the face of the earth, which were neerer to the heauen, shoulde not see the halfe heauen.
This is against Ptholomie, and all the Philosophers, that doe saye, that wheresoeuer a man standeth there riseth alwayes with him sixe signes, and other sixe setteth with him, and the halfe heauen is seene of him, and the other halfe is hid from him, so that equally they are distant from the heauen.
Sacro busto sayeth, that by the selfe same signe or shewe is prooued, that the earth is but a poynte in respect of the Fyrmament, for if the earth were of any quantitie in respecte of the heauen, it woulde not happen that the half heauen shoulde bee seene.
And for the better vnderstanding thereof, Imagine this, if any plain superficie were put vppon the Center of the earth, the whiche shoulde diuide the earth into twoo equall partes. And also the firmament it selfe.
Then the eye of him that were in the Center of the earth, should see the middest of the Fyrmament, And the selfe same eye standing vpon the face of the earth, shoulde also see the middest of the firmament, of this is gathered, that the quantitie of the earth is insencible in respect of the firmament.
The fiftenth Chapter, how the earth is quiet and mooueth not.
THAT the earth is vnmoueable and quiet, to is prooued by two reasons, the firste is, that beeing a hole naturall body and altogether heauie, it goeth to the place most lowe, whiche is the Center and middest of the Firmamēt, and there it remaineth. So sayth the Philosopher in the fourth of the naturall Philosophie and in the fyrst and fourth of the Heauen and the worlde.
The seconde reason is to consider, howe that the earth standeth in the middest, and if it shoulde mooue and departe from the middest, it woulde rise vppe, the which woulde happen to it naturally or violentlye, not naturallye, because his naturall moouing is to the middest, and so his moouing contrary to the middest is not naturall to it, then it shoulde be with violence. But it cannot bee with violence, because there is no body to be found that shoulde doe violence to so greate a body, in greatnesse and waight, where it is to bee concluded, that it is alwaies queit and mooueth not.
The same prooueth Albertus the great, in the seconde of the heauen and the Worlde, in the thyrde Treatie and the. 8, chapter where he saith, y e order of the starrs doe learn y e earth to be [Page] quiet, and placed in the middest, for as the moone is ordeined to be vnder the Sunne, if the earth were not in the middest and fixed, it would not happen [...] the parte of the circle of the signes, the Sunne and the moone to be opposite to the heade and tayle of the Dragon, and likewise the Astrolabios, and other instrumentes of the Astronomers should be false, and by them woulde neuer bee found the courses and computations of the starres, as by the sayd iustruments our sences doe attaine vnto, for alwaies they woulde happen to bee diuerse and different, for from the earth the circles of the heauen should not be equally seen. All the which we haue prooued be Geomitrie and Astronomie. It is to bee considered that God made heauen and earth, and all that therein is, he put the earth fixed in the middest, because the heauen and the starres should compasse it about with their moouing, where the diuine power doeth sustaine it in the nuddest, euē as a point. Of this is written, The Lorde sayth, I haue hanged, the earth in one knot founded vpon his stabillitie.
The sixteenth Chapter of the center of the earth, and howe it may be sayd that the earth is the center of the world.
THE Center of the earth may bee vnderstoode in three manner of wayes, The first as touching the greatnes of the Center, The secōd of the waight of the center. And the third of the mase or assemblie of the center, the which assembly or mase is in the middest of the firmament, This beeing had, foure thinges are to bee noted. The first is, that in the land is not one selfe center of greatnes and of waight, for the earth is deformedly waighty, for that the one parte is couered with water, & the other part is discouered. The seconde, that the center of the waight of the earth is not in the middest of the firmament, for if you imagine to diuide the earth into 2. equal parts, thē the part that is couered with water woulde surmount the other. The third is that the Center of the greatnesse of the earth, and the Center of the firmament, are not one. For that the earth is not equally couered with water. Of the which there foloweth, that in the earth we may imagine, three centers really distinct, The firste, is the cēter of the greatnes of the earth, The second the center of the waight, The third the midest of the firmament, The fourth reason that the, center or poynt of the mase or assembly of the water and earth is in the middest of the firmament. This is because the like assemblie is a waightie body, and without lette, and so the center touching his wayght is in the middest of the worlde, for that he is weightie by nature, wherby it may be sayde that the earth is in the middest of the firmament, for that it is a parte of the mase, which mase is in the middest of the world.
¶The seconde Booke of the Sea, and of his moouinges, and howe the Nauigation was inuented.
The first Chapter what thing the Sea is, and wherefore it is called Occean.
THe Sea is the proper place of the waters by reason of the similitude of his forme. There the waters doe ingender & are sutained. And according as Albertus the great vnderstandeth it, the riuers come foorth of her and returne to her againe. So hee sayth in the third of his Metheoros the twelfth chapter, we see that all riuers runne into the Sea, and from the Sea they returne and come foorth, that they may runne agayne, wherby it seuieth, that the Sea is the end and beginning of the waters. It is called the Occean Sea, for the swift and continuall moouing where with it mooueth: for that, Oikis in Greeke is as much to say hasty or swift. The Greekes and Latinists doe name it by this name, and therefore this name hath continued common: or else it is called Occean Casi Cianeus, because it girdeth or imbraceth the endes of y e earth, & by reason of y e diuersitie of the countries, it taketh diuers names, as the Indian sea or Percian sea. &c.
The Sea hath no colour, being looked vpon, when one is neere it: for our sight remaineth not vpon the superficies of y e water, but desendeth downe and being looked vpon a farre of it hath the colour of heauen, & being moued of the windes it hath the forme of diuers colours. And it is to be noted, that the Sea for seuen dayes riseth encreasing, and is that which we cal springtides, & other seuen she decreaseth. Of these flowings and ebbinges. Aristotle bringeth the causes to hee naturall, in the seconde of his Metheoro [...]: and besides that, Hipocrates, in his booke of ayre and water sayth that there is a proper cause in Astronomie, that is by the natural vertue of the moone, vpon the waters, so likewise we see that al shel fish with the encreasing of the moone doe encrease, & with y e decreasing do decrease: for as y e moone riseth aboue the Horizon and with his beames toucheth the sea, moueth a stitring vp, whereby it causeth her flowing and ebbing and to cast out into her riuer or coast all dead bodies or vncleane thinges that are in her.
The 2. Chapter how the sea apperteineth to the perfection of the world, and without her the world woulde perish, and howe the water is ingendered in her.
THe sea apperteineth too the making of the world and to her perfection, & the world, should not be perfect without her: for if there were no beginning of the waters there shoulde be no simple waters. And if there were no simple waters there would be no mixt waters, and so there would be nothing of that which is ingendered of the water, and if there were no water there would be no bodies, as there are continually, and thinges which cleeueth together, whereof it followeth, that if the waters had not a beginning the generation would be destroyed, And so consequently all the world. Also if there were no beginning of the waters there would not be a ioyning together of the contraries which are possible, and so nature woulde dye in that which were necessarie, and the woorke would cease in the act. Then it would happen, not hauing a beginning of the waters the woorke of nature would cease, and so the worlde woulde perish, where it concludeth, that the sea is necessary for the sustentation of the worlde. And Aristotle in the seconde of his Metheoros, sayth, that the waters in the sea doe ingender [Page] in the North, which is as much to say, as the greatest parte of the water of the sea doth ingender in y e north. This Albertus the greate declareth in the second of his Metheoros, chapter sixe, saying that the sea runneth from y e North into the South, and the cause is that the north is higher then the south and the reason wherefore it is higher, is, because that with the colde of the north there is more water ingendred, then that which can containe in the distance and height of the riuers, and in the south the water consumeth and is wasted with the heate of the sunne, and for this cause in the north, one water pusheth out another, to the place which is lower then it selfe: And so accidently it mooueth, from the place of his generation. For as it is moist, it runneth vntill it come to be deteined in some drye place. The reason why the water is so consumed in the south parts is, because the sunne alwayes mooueth in his circle, Excentrik so y t his center is not in one place of the earth, in such sort that if the Diameter of the circle of the Sunne were paste by both centers, that is to say, his owne, and that of the earth, the greater parte of the diameter shoulde be towardes the one parte, and the lesser towardes the other, in respect of the center of the earth: And so it is shewed by reason of Geometrie, that the greater length of the diameter is neere vnto the twentie degrees of Gemini in this our time, and the lesser length is in the twē tie degrees of Sagitarius whiche is a signe opposite to Gemini, whereof it appeareth that the sunne commeth much neerer to the earth in the south partes then in the north partes. And so by reason of his neere comming, he heateth in such sorte, that he consumeth the water and burneth the earth, the which he doeth not in the north partes.
The third Chapter, wherfore the water of the Sea is salt, and wherefore it is most conuenient and better for the Nauigation.
EXperience sheweth that the water of the Sea is salte, and so sayth Albertus the great, that it is called sea, by reason it is bitter or salte, And the Sea to be salts it seemeth to be against his naturall kinde, wherefore, seeing that the sea is the begin [...]ing of the waters, and his owne place, and the waters which ingender in her, and those which enter into her foorth of the riuers are fresh, it seemeth that with more reason the sea should be fresh, and not salt. Also as it is certaine that God made all things to y e best, it seemeth to be better, that the sea were freshe then salte. To this answereth Albertus the great in the second of his Metheoros, in the thirde treatie and fifteenth Chapter, where he sayth y t matter that causeth y e sea to bee salt is. According to the truth, there are twoo kindes of vapours, that is to say, hote and moyst, and hote and drie, and in the sea one of these doth rise from the superficies, & the other riseth from the bottome, This is by reason of the heate of the sunne, and of the starres, which are an efficient cause of these vapours, and for the vapour of the water it is very subtile, betweene these two, and therefore being risen into the ayre is consumed of the sunne, and the vapour of the earth remaineth, or more properly his exhalation dispersed, extended, & mingled in the water. As it appeareth by an example in the meate digested, that the thin substance thereof, is raised vppe and extended, into the members and is that which nourisheth, and the grosse substance remaineth, and also that which is vndigested: euen so doth the vapour of the earth remaine grosse, and extendeth into the substance of the water of the sea, and the coldnes of the water compassing it round about, casting into it coldnes, and with the coldnes it burneth, by reason they bee two contraries together, they are made stronger then before, for the heate of the salte exhalation, being come forth of the depth of the sea, by vertue of the Sunne fortifieth it selfe, with his contrary, [Page 10] which is the cold, and so ouercommeth the like heat which is y t as is required in the generation of a salt fast, as the Philosopher hath it in the second of his metheoros the first chapter speaking in this matter, of this there is a similitude, that if a freshwater were passed through ashes it would make it salte, the like is of the water of the sea, in the time it was made salt, and because that some say, there is a pure element insubstance, and the element of the water is in the sea, and that in the middest of the sea, the water is simple and without tast, wherefore hath it not there an obiection of contrarietie. This seemeth to me not to be so, for the heate of the Sunne, and the starres, are sufficient to make exhalations come forth of the bottome of the sea, which being mingled with the coldnes and moisture of the water caused a salt tast in the highest parte of the water: As well & with more reason they will make it in the middest or in the bottome of the sea, and so I hold with Aristotle, and with Constantine a great Astronomer, that there is now no element pure, & for as muche as y e water is salt, it is more conueniēt & better for y e nauigation, thē the fresh, that is because the salte water is more heauie and grosse then the freshe. And that it is so, Albertus the great saith in this manner, that y e salt water is more heauie and thick then the freshe, it is gathered by many experiences, of the which one is. If the freshe water be mingled, with salt and made a strong mixture in such sorte that all the salt be melted in the water, and in to it is cast an egge fresh layde, it will swimme aboue the water, by reason of the thicknes that the water hath which is done with the mixture of the salte, and if the sayd egge be put in freshe water it will sinke, it is sayd that it must bee a newe laid egge, for if it be old or crackt, it will sink. And by the same reason is shewed, that the shippes doe rather sinke in freshe water, then in that which is salt for the fresh rather deuideth it selfe and riseth vp rather then that which is salt.
The fourth Chapter of the different moouinges which the Occean sea hath.
IT hath beene declared, in the. 2. chapter of this 2. booke, y t a great part of the water of the sea doeth ingender in the north, and from thence it runneth to the south, and this is one of the moouinges which the water of the sea hath: wee doe likewise see that the sea when it floweth mooueth towardes one parte and when it ebbeth it moueth to the cōtrary, hauing such order, that where it began first to flowe▪ there it beginneth first to ebbe, whereby it seemeth that the water of the sea hath contrary moouings one from another, and besides this wee see that the riuers runne to the sea, and also the sea commeth vp by them, and this seemeth meruellous in nature: for the water naturally goeth downwarde, as a body which is heauie, as it is, and if the riuers be higher then the sea, the sea should not goe vp into them, and if the Sea be higher then the riuers they woulde not runne into the sea, wherby with reason it may be doubted, saying. ( A Doubt,) what is the cause seeing that all the waters of the sea, being one bodie haue so many different and contrary moouinges, so that some waters are moouing towardes one place, and some towards another, whereby it may be sayde eyther that the sea mooueth it selfe in these moouinges by chance, and without any order, or that shee is mooued by different moouinges or mouers ( A declaration,) To these doubtes Albertus magnus answereth, in the second of the Metheoros the sixth chapter of the third treatie where he sayth, absoluing all the difficulties, which are put, touching these moouinges of the sea, wee say with Seneca that there is no other cause of the course of the waters, to one place or other, but the places which are high or low, (except that only mouing, whereby the sea ebbeth or floweth,) for in this it followeth the circle of the [Page] moone, as wee teach in another place: And that the saying of Seneca is true, it is prooued because the waters of the sea doe come flowing to all partes of the worlde, that is to say, to the east, and to the west, to the north & to the south. And▪ likewise they goe ebbing from all the sayde partes. And therefore the Sea hath no parte proper where his flowing and ebbing doeth beginne, so that by accedent the water mooueth it selfe from one place to another, vnlesse it be downe right, for because this moouing commeth not to it by any accedent but by proper essence, consequentlie to his forme.
The fyfth Chapter wherefore the Sea neuer ouerfloweth, nor is augmented nor made greater.
IT may be asked what is the cause, seeing that in the sea there is so muche water ingendred, and continually entreth into her so many riuers and fountaines, wherefore shee neuer ouerfloweth nor is augmented. To this is some cause the whiche Albertus th [...] great bringeth in the second of his metheoros where hee saith, the sea receyueth no augmentation nor yet maketh it self greater, for because she is a naturall receiuer of all the waters, and is their quiet place. And the place cannot ouerflowe, with the comming in of the thing which by nature ought to bee in this place: for the place ought to be conformable with that whiche it shutteth into it according to nature, so that the sea is able to receaue into it al y e riuers. And for the entrance of them neither to ouerflowe nor to augment it self. Likewise it ouerfloweth not by reason that the Sea is so great that the riuers in the respect of her are nothing, for there is not any thing in them able to augmē it▪ The third reason is because the heate of the sunne and the blowing of the windes doe consume so great parte of the water, that although it ingender continually in the sea and continually the riuers enter into her: yet in such order God disposed it that it: neyther decreaseth nor encreaseth. And so it may be sayde that which is written in Iob, Lorde thou diddest appoint her a precinct, that she should not breake it. And it is to be noted, that in the floode of Noah. The holy scripture saith in Gene [...]s the seauenth chapter, that the water did [...]ise vp fifteene cubites vpon y e most high mountaine that is vnder the heauen, so that all the earth was coueted with water. But although that this encreasing of the waters were so great, the sea did not ouerflowe nor did couer the earth, by going foorth of her limmet and precinct. But the great encrease of waters came for two causes, one was that the windowes & cloudes of heauen were opened, and it raigned fortie dayes and fortie nights very leisurly. The seconde was that the fountaynes and riuers of freshe water did runne so much that all the earth was couered as it is sayde, so that all liuing things which were vpon the earth did perishe (except Noah and all that were in the arke) But the rayne being ceased, the sayde text saith, that God sent such great windes, that they consumed the water, & returned the earth to his own perfectnes.
The sixth Chapter of the excellencie of the Nau [...]gatiō, and of the antiquitie therof.
WIth reason it may bee sayde that the nauigation hath great excellency seeing that God was y e first that commanded to make a shippe or instrument to goe vppon the water: so it is written in Genesis the sixte chapter where is sayde that God commanded Noah to make a ship or arke of timber. This Arke had. 300. cubites in length. and 50. in bredth, and 30. in hight, of these cubites, there are diuerse opinions what length they were of, some say after the manner of Geometry, others say common, with more reason it seemeth they were in manner of Geometrie, because they should be greater, for it was conuenient that in the arke there shoulde be [...] for that which shoulde be put there in.
S. Isidore writeth of the nauigation [Page 11] in the Ethimologias that the Lidians were those that first found out the making of shippes, but these did not attain to more knowledge then to ioyne one timber with another, and were wel calked and nayled, they sayled in them not departing farre from the lande, after that Epaminundas, the Greeke made an end to put shippes to sayl in perfection, and so in the warres of Peloponeso ther was founde that notable captaine, Bias with shippes, carrackes, and Gallies.
In the third of the kinges in the; 10. chapter is reade that Salomon king of Hierusalem sent two shippes to Tharsis. and euery three yeere they went and came from whence they brought golde siluer, woorkes of Iuorie, and apes.
Iulio Solino sayth that al the sea towardes the south, which doeth compasse Affrica about behinde and from the India to Spaine was sayled, and of this hee bringeth testimonie of the king of Inba for the confirmation & argument thereof he maketh mo [...]tion of Ilandes, and of a certaine people the manne [...]s and confines of y e places & the spaces of thē Plato in y e .32. booke, in the dialogue of Tim [...]o, sayth that from an Iland called y e colūnes or pillers of Hercules, which is at the mouth of a straight there was failing to a firme land, which contained greater then all Affrica & Asia; wherby it appeareth that before the time of Plato was sayling from the Iland of Cadiz, which is at the mouth of the straite of Iebralter vnto the land of the Indias which we now haue.
Pliny writeth, that gouerning the thinges of the empire of Tiberius Caesar there did appeare in the coast of the sea of Arabia signes of ships that the Spaniardes had lost. Cornelius Nepote geueth knowledge that in his time one that was called E [...]do [...] [...] from the latine king sayling by the sea of Arabia, and likewise sayth that he saw one Ce [...] Antipatro that called with merchandise frō Spain Ehiopia. In the time of Augustus [...] most pa [...] y e north Occeā seas were sailed round about. Al [...] vnto the cape of the land of the [...]. Reyhold Seleuco and Anthioco saye that the riuers of the Caspian sea were sayled and known with the armies of those of Macedonia: As also they sailed all the north parts frō one place to another. Plinie himselfe vseth the testimony of Cornelius Nepote who affirmeth that the king of the Sweuiās or Esquicaros gaue to Metello Celeri chiefe consull of Fraunce certain Indians y e which sailing frō y e India w t merchandise were driuē into Almain with tēpest of weather. Likewise it is read in Othō that in y e time of y e Iermain emperours certaine ambassadours of y e India were foūd in y e riuers of Almaine which were driuen thither with great windes, & if was not doubted y t they came from the regiō towards the cast, which could not be if it be as some doe think y t the north seas be frosen Pope Pio the 3. saith that in the booke he wrote of Geographie and reasō doth manifest, & shew y e the sea in old time was sailed seeing y t the men of old time did put names vnto the riuers of the O [...]cean sea, which doth cōpasse about the farthest parts of the earth, of y e great nūber & multitude of ships y t was molde time some authors haue writtē. Homer. saith y t in the host of y e Greekes which came vnto Troy were 1180. ships, likewise Diodorus saith y t Xerxes king of y e Persians brought in his against Gretia, 700000. men of his owne, & 300000. of his friendes, and when became to the Sea called Pontico, hee made in the sea a bridge of ships whereby he past with his people so y t the ships being together, reached from the land of Asia vnto that of Europa, which is at y e least a league of sea.
The 7. chapter how by some signes of the sun & of the moone may be known whē stormes wil come.
MAny times there happeneth to be in the Sea tempests of winds & waters which doe cause greate stormes whereof followeth to such as are saylers death or losses of ships and goods or other great troubles: therfore here I mind to declare the signes as I find thē writtē by y e which the sayd tē pests or stormes may be known & being foreseen or known they may do les hurt. [Page] This pleased V [...]rgil greatly, who sayth, that many hurtfull battels of windes doe come vpon the ignorant: it is trade of Democrito the Philosopher, that a brother of his being reaping in time of great heat, who was called Damaso, the sayde Philosopher sayde vnto him, y t he should reape no more, but shoulde gather together that he had reaped, & keepe it, for shortly would come a great tempest of wind, that would carry it away from him, And so a fewe houres being past. It followed as y e Philosopher had said, after declaratiō made of signes or prognosticatiō of the tempests or stormes, there shall bee first noted, those which are shewed in the Sunne.
The signes of the Sunne.
Plinie in his natural history the eighteenth booke Chapter forty fiue sheweth that if the Sunne when it riseth be cleere and not cloudie, foresheweth a fayre day, if it seeme yellow, it foresheweth rayne with hayle. It when the sun doth rise it seemeth hollow, it foresheweth rain and winde, if when the sunne doth rise there be cloudes before it, and shewe redde, and parte of the sayde cloudes are dispersed abrode towardes the north and part towardes the south it signifieth windes with great rayne: Jf when y e Sunne riseth & setteth doe appeare any streekes gathered together neere it, if foresheweth rayne:
If before the Sunne rise do appeare vpon it round cloudes it foresheweth great colde, this is if after Sunne rising they goe towardes the south, but if they goe towardes the west it signifieth fayre weather.
Jf cloudes doe compasse the Sunne rounde aboute the lesse light and cleerenes they geue signifieth, the greater tempest, and it will be the greater if her roundnes doe seeme dubled.
If in the rising of the Sunne do appeare redde, cloudes lying ouer the sun being brought thither by any manner of winde it signifieth that the selfe same winde will blowe, but if it be a southerly winde it betokeneth rayne.
If when the Sunne riseth if be compassed aboute with cloudes, from that part where the roundnes doth discouer, it is to be loked for that the wind will come, but if it discouer all, it signifieth equally faire weather.
If when the Sunne riseth shee extend her beames farre of, by the clouds and in the middest it seemeth emptie, foresheweth rayne.
If beefore the sunne come foorth shee shew her becames it foresheweth water and winde.
If when the sunne shall let, her circle be white, it foresheweth some tempest that night, and if it be very hote, there will be winde.
If whē the sunne doth set, her round bodie doth seeme blacke or thicke of the parte which is moste discouered, it will blowe much winde.
The signes of the Moone.
Seeing there hath beene declared y e signes of the sunne, for to know the tempestes or stormes that are to come I will speake of the thinges which are to come, that the moone sheweth.
In A [...]gypt they keepe holy day, the fourth daye of the moone the whiche if shee seeme shining with a cleane brightnes it foresheweth a very fayre day, and if she shewe redde it betokeneth much winde, if blacke it signifieth raine, if in the fifth day her hornes be not sharp & small, but great and brode, it foresheweth rayne.
If the moone be straight and shewe her selfe vpwarde it signifieth winds & chiefelie when this is in the fourth day.
If the moone being foure dayes old, & her roundnes be of an Alborne [...]ulle [...] it signifieth great windes, the authour hereof is Var [...]o.
Pl [...]nie sayth that if in the fourth day of the moone she be vpright it betokeneth tempest in the sea: vnlesse that all rounde about her she hath a circle very cleere.
If at the full moone in the middest of her shee be cleere if sheweth a token of [Page 12] fair weather, or if she be of an alborne colour or like to a rose colour it foresheweth windes, if she be blacke it foresheweth rayne.
When at her rising shee rise with the vpper parte of her horne blacke about, at the decreasing of y e moone, it wil rain, and if likewise her horne be blacke beneath rounde aboute beefore the full moone it also foresheweth rayne.
If the moone being at the [...]ull haue a circle round about her of that parte which doeth shewe most bright, will the winde come.
If at the first appearing of the moon that is to say when shee is newe, the bornes of her doe shewe great it signifieth tempest. And it shall be the greater if before the fourth day the wind do not blows at the west.
If at the sixteenth day of the moone the seeme to be of a great colour of flame it foresheweth tempest.
The eyght Chapter of the fires and lightes, which doe appeare in shippes that doe sayle when there is torment or tempest in the Sea.
IT happeneth to such as doe sayle when there is stormes in the sea when it seemeth that they should be lost y t al night they see vpon the maste or yarde or in some other parte of the shippe a certaine fire or clearenes, the which some saylers call, S. Edmund, which ought not to be so taken, seeing that it is not as they thinke, therfore I say that these fires or lightes are a certain impressiō in the ayr which the Greekes call Pili Deuces, & is so called by meanes of the grosenes of y e humor which goeth from the earth & fighteth with the coldnes of the might, & so it gathereth it selfe together and congealeth in the first region of the ayre, and when his exhalation findeth any body wherunto to cleaue, it kindleth and holdeth it selfe fast to it vntill it be consumed and wasted. This fire burneth not.
And Plinie in his second booke of the naturall historie, the thirtie seauen chapter, saith that when these fires be two they be called Pollux & Castor and it is a good signe, and when it is but one it is called Hellena, and it is an euil signe.
These fires are also seene in the lande. And they haue beene seene in the campes vpon the pikes which the souldiers carry, and vpon the deade bodies.
And Plinie sayth also that they haue beene seene vppon the heades of men, and of beastes, And so did Virgil affirme that it appeared vpon the head of lulio Escanio: In the campes of the wars these fires doe appeare as wel because of the continuall fumes, as also because of the heate of many people: Jn the ships they ingender of y e fume of the said ship and of the heate of the people gathered together into little rome, and of the Marriners and people in the shippe, which in the stormes with the greate moouing they haue, doe ingender heate: this is when there is disposition that the rising vp of the vapour, shoulde make impression in the ayre, as before is sayde: And Plini [...] saide that one only fire is no good signe.
This is because when there are two it seemeth that in the ayre is abundance of grosse smoke and signifieth that it is sufficient to consume the matter of the tempest.
Peter de Castroboll, vpon the seconde of the Metheoros sayth, that whensoeuer these fires are seene in a tempest, it is a good signe, for it noteth faire weather. Likewise it happeneth, that there are great stormes, & none of these fires are seene, and in small stormes they see sometime one or twoo, so that the sayle [...]s shoulde haue no deuotion vnto these fires to beleeue that Sainte Edmunde is there, for it is a naturall thing.
And therefore euery one with his deuotion ought to commende himselfe too GOD, that hee keepe them, and bryng them foorth of that Storme, and putte them [Page] in the porte of saluation.
The nienth chapter of other certaine signes, wherein shall be knowne when stormes will come in the sea.
IN the seuenth chapter of this secōd booke I haue declared some signes of the sunne & the moone wherby may be knowne when stormes of winde and raine will come, as it is declared: and because these stormes are thinges, that vnto such as saile is very conuensent they shoulde knowe, and preuent: it seemed well to mee to adde this present chapter in the which, I will also declare other fiue signes or prognostications, which I finde written, that ought to be looked on and knowne of the saylers, which are these following.
The first is when in the high places or in the woodes there is heard a noyse of winde, and abrode it is not heard it signifieth stormes of winde.
The second when the waues of the scaswel and giue great falles or strokes in the bayes of the sea being with great noyse or ratling, signifieth stormes in the sea: of these 2. Plinie is the author in the eigteenth booke of the naturall historie.
The thirde, if the sea being calme doeth make a nosse within it selfe signifieth great windes: of this speaketh Virgil in the tenth of Ac [...]eados and Lucano.
The fourth whē the Porpisses of the sea goe leaping vpon the sea, and shew them selues vppon the Waues is a signe of stormes, And that the wind will come frō that place that they come, This S. Isidore bringeth in the twelfth of the Etimologias.
Of the fifth, Virgil, saith, in the Georgians that when the Sea Meowes or Gulles doe leaue the sea and goe to the drye lande it signifieth stormes in the Sea.
¶The third booke of the VVindes, and their quallities, and names, and how one should sayle with them.
The first chapter what thing the winde is, and what quallitie it is of, and howe it ingendreth.
FOR the declaration of the nature of the winde, for the diuersitie of the doubtes that are of it, some say it is the ayre and it moueth: others say that it is water: others that it is a vapour of the earth: and others, that it is some great celestiall body, or other, that with great force and violence doth pushe forwarde the ayre.
And this cannot bee determined, if his nature bee not considered in that which principally it is. The which I say that the winde is a vapour of the earth that riseth vppe and stretcheth euen to the highest parte of the ayre and strongly thrusteth foorth the ayre.
This vapour is hote and dry, and by his subtiltie doth pearce the ayre: for as the winde is of a subtile vapour in his kinde, and being subtile and light, it is natural to rise vp & so it riseth vp, & of y e subtilt [...]e of y e vapour of y e earth, he is made, and frō thence he descendeth, & in his descending he sheweth that the vapour mooueth it selfe vnto a high place & as he is come to that place is made winde, and so hee descendeth blowing. And it is to be vnderstoode, that the vapour riseth not so high as the superiour parte of the ayre, which is called Estus, [Page] but riseth vp to the colde part, & there as Algazel saith with the colde, he waxeth thicke and descendeth of the which it seemeth, that the vapour wherof the winde is made, is not congregated with the inwarde colde as some say, but with the outwarde cold of the place, by y e which as Algazel saith, he is letted that he come not to the superiour parte of the ayre. Likewise it is proued, that the vapour is raised vp with heate, and for this, if the heat of ayre round about doe helpe him, it heateth the more: for the [...]ner heat is holpen by y e outward heat, & so if it were not for the cold of the place, he would neither waxe thicke nor blowe.
The 2. Chapter, how the wind moueth not right from aboue downward: nor contrarywise, but his mouing is in circle of water and earth.
FUrther for the mouing of the winde, it is to bee noted that it moueth not from aboue downward, nor frō beneath vpward but it moneth in circuler or round manner, of the water and the earth: so saith Albertus the great in the treatie of windes, chap. 12. all windes commonly moue their blast & mouing in circle manner, in such sort, that they moue not vp vnto that which is high nor descendeth to that which is lowe: but moueth by the round superficiall of the earth, and water in the ayre in circuler manner, as appeareth by the cloudes: that with the windes goe vp & descend down from the East, into the West: euen like to the moouing of the starres. Where it is to bee vnderstood, by the doctrine of the Astronomers, that there are some starres, which moue the winds, as lupiter, that moueth northerly winds: & the sunne moueth Easterly winds: and Mars moueth y e blast of Southerly winds: & the Moone moueth, Westerly windes. This is as it were a beginning, as euery manner of cause, by his owne meanes induceth to one effect, & therfore it is cōueniēt that the effect doe immitate the moouing of the cause. And seeing that the star [...]es doe moue in circuler māner, it is conuenient that the wynd should moue like a bowe vpon his Horison. In like māner it is saide, when the signes doe cause winds to blowe, because there are three signes, which haue hotte and drie qualities, which are these, Aries, Leo and Sagitarius: and this is called the triplicitie of the fire. And these are called Easterly signes, because they moue the winds of the East part. There are other three signes, which haue cold and drie qualities. These are Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorne: and this is called triplicity of the earth, these signes are called Meridionales, because they moue the Southerly winds continually. There are other 3. signes, which haue their qualities hot and moyst: these are Gemini, Libra, & Aquarius: & this is called the triplicitie of the ayre. These are called occidē tall or Westerly signes, because they moue y e winds of the West part. There is another fourth triplicitie of the other 3. signes, which are Cancer, Scorpio, & Pisces, And this is called triplicity of y e water: for because his property is colde and moyst, and these signes doe moue y e Northerly winds, & that humor which they haue in his propertie, they cause to abounde in the times so attributed in those bodies, where they are ingendred. Of the aforesaide, it is concluded: that the winds do moue thēselues in r [...]ūdnesse of the water and earth like to the mouing of the starres, and not right going vpward nor descēding. For the vapour is eleuated with the heate, and is expelled with the colde, which congealeth him, and so it is conuenient, that the wynde descende not right downe, for the heate that riseth vp, but that it bee by one side in the circuite of water and earth. And this reason Aristo [...]le giueth.
The 3. Chapter, wherefore the wynde is not alwayes alike: but at sometime bloweth harde, and at other times calme: and wherefore it moueth to his opposite.
[Page 14] WIth reason might be asked two doubtes concerning the wind, which are these: ( the first doubt.) What y e cause is wherfore when the winde beginneth his blast, it is not equall, but sometimes harde, and other times more calme. And sometimes it ceaseth, and other times it turneth to blowe, so that it bloweth not cōtinuallye after one sort. ( the second doubt.) The second is, wherfore the winde mooueth to his opposite, for so we cal it whē from the east he goeth to the west: And from the north to the south, and likewise contrary, of this it seemeth that there is no reason, because the Uapour whiche is the roote of the winde either followeth his moouing which is to bee eleuated because he is hote, and according as it is straight so it ought to goe vpwarde, or follow his matter which is earthly, & at it is straight, ought to descēd. Likewise what doth make the winde to mooue more to one side then to the other, rather then to moue it self straight so that the east likewise should mooue it selfe towardes the north, or towardes the south, as towardes the west, and likewise of the other windes. Item all thinges whiche are ingendred in one place naturally mooue not vnto the place opposite: so that if the easterly winde be ingendered in the east, and the northerly wind in the north, they ought to mooue to their owne place, and not to the place opposite. By the which it is to be said that the windes mouing of them selues to their opposite is violent, and against nature, or the matter of the windes is maruellous & vnknowne to vs. ( The first declaration.) The first is to be vnderstoode that as y e matter of the winde, which is the vapour of the earth, riseth vp by little & little, maketh a weake & little moouing: But as he is encreased in great quantitie: so with a great force hee descendeth and maketh a strong winde. Also the winde bloweth not continually alike because the matter which riseth vp is not alwayes equal nor is equally put forward, for the colde is more or lesse, & the vapour not equally congealed. And therfore the winde at one time bloweth hard, and at another time soft, ( The. 2 declaratiō.) The 2. is to be vnderstoode, that the wind to mooue to his opposite is for two causes. The 1. is as Alpetragio sayth, the stars doe mooue in circle manner; & so the wind doth immitate y e circle mouing, The 2. as Albertus saith, that it is more naturall, because the vapour is ingendred of heate, & is expelled & thrust out of the cold, & the cold is behinde the heat, & therefore is thrust out to his opposite, so that he cannot go vpright for the cold y t is in the ayre nor can descend, for the heat that riseth vp, nor can returne backward for the colde which is behind him: and therfore it is necessary, that he moue in circle manner to his opposite, & as much as y t which is said that nothing moueth forth from the place of his generation it is to be noted, that which is of the nature of ayre, mooueth it selfe to the place of ayre, and the ayre hath place in all partes, and the vapour hath the nature of aire as much as apperteineth to his seldom mouing so that he moueth not forth of his place.
The 4. chapter, of the whirling of the winde, and how it is caused.
IT hath been spoken before y t the mouing which y e winde maketh is mouing himself to his opposite by y e roundnes of the water & earth, & not going vpright nor descending, as it hath been proued, & experience in the nauigation doth shew it: and seeing that it is so it may be asked what is the cause that many times the winde maketh his mouing right from beneath vpward. This we see that the winde raiseth vp from the ground the dust and the straw, and carrieth them vpright one heigh which is commonly a whirlwind, and this is as well caused or done in the sea as in the Lande. And in the Sea it is made wel neere like a right sleeue, & by it the water riseth upwarde, as many [Page] times it is seen▪ Wherby it s [...]emeth y t y e wind hath likewise a straight mouing, y t is to say frō beneath vpward, as the mouing in roundnes before is declared. To this is to bee noted that this moouing, which the winde maketh is not naturall to it, but accidentall and violent: for because it is done by force, by meeting together in this manner: when one winde commeth from one part, and another frō another part contrary, & y e strēgth of the one, doth meete with y t of the other as euery one of thē hath no free running, by the let of the winde he findeth contrary: then he that is strongest thrusteth forwarde the other, and so they put themselues into roundnes, and make a whirlewinde vntill they be deuided. This appeareth by an example in the water when it runneth, that if it finde another body that doth make any resistāce, it maketh a whirling, moouing it in roundnes: euen so the winde as it findeth resistance of another winde or of some mountaine, or of any like thing, that doth resist his course, it cannot goe forward. Therefore hee maketh that round whirling. and this causeth in the Sea many times that shippes be sunke downe vnder the water, when they find thēselues vnder such a whirlwinde or spout: for the water which y e winde raiseth, doth ouerwhelme & drown them. Likewise when there are moouinges of contrary windes, they cause to rise vp stormes in the Sea, which the saylers many times may know before hand considering and beholding the moouing of the cloudes if they be contrary and different to the winde that is beneath. For when it is so, it is a token that contrary windes doe runne abrode, of the which continually the superiour doth ouercome: because he is of more strength & swiftnes then the inferiour.
The fifth chapter, of the windes, of the cardes of nauigation, of their number, & names.
AND seeing there hath byn treated of y e winds, what things they are, & how they are ingendred and mooue, In this I wil speake of the winds that are marked in the cardes of nauigation, their number, & how they haue their names according to the [...]se of the saylers. Of the which it is to be vnderstood y t the windes of the cardes which we cal courses, do shew forth 32. names of windes, which are practised in y e nauigation, & no more nor lesse: & the reason wherefore this number is geuen, is because the roundnes of the worlde, is imagened to be deuided into 32. partes, & in euery one of these is assigned one wind, & is geuē to him a whole name, or halfe, or a quarter, according to the part where it seemeth to vs that he cōmeth; as hereafter shall be declared. And to vnderstād, this is to be noted, that this roundnes of the world hath 4. principal regions. These 4. partes are named and knowne by 4. windes, which are east, west, north, south. The east is also called solan [...], it groweth vnder y e equinoctiall line, it is also called lecuāte, because the sunn [...] riseth there, and beginneth to appeare in the morning. This winde is called in the nauigation east. The second principall winde riseth of the Occident, vnder the equinoctiall line, it is called poniente, because the sun setteth there, or hideth himselfe in the evening. It is also called, fauonio, and in the nauigation it is called west. The 3. principall wind is called, Cierco and groweth vnder the pole artick, he is also called, Aquilonall, and Septemtrionall, Aquilonal because he groweth in the part of Aquilon Semptentrional by the 7. starres of y e Vrsa minor. This winde in the nauigation is called north. The fourth winde is called Meridionall he commeth forth vnder y e pole antartike, he is called Meridional: for when he is come to the sun, there he maketh vnto vs the middest of the daye. And in the Nauigation this winde is called South. These Windes are marked in this manner.
These foure windes haue other four Colaterales, and are compounded of the taking a name of halfe the name of euery one in this manner.
The 1. is marked betweene y e north and the east, and taketh name of both, and therfore is called northeast.
The second is between the east and the south, and is called southeast.
The third is between the south and the west, and is called southwest.
The fourth is betweene the west & the north, and is called northwest, and is marked in this manner.
These 8. windes are called in the nauigation, whole winds or principalles, amōg the which there is to bee marked other 8. which are called halfe windes not because they haue lesse force thē the 1. but because they are described among those 8. winds afoesaid, the which also do take their names of y e 2. windes Colaterales and are called in this manner.
The first is described between the north and the northeast, and taking [...] of both of them is called North Northeast.
The [...] called east, northeast, because he standeth between the east and the northeast.
The third is east southeast, because he is between the east & she southeast.
The [...] is south Southeast, because he [...] betweene the south and the southeast.
The fifth is south southwest, because he is betweene the south and the southwest.
The sixt is west southwest, because he is between the west & the southwest.
The seuenth is west northwest, because it is betweene the west and the northwest.
The eight north northwest, because it is betweene the north and the north west.
And they are ordained in this manner.
Among these xvi. courses of winds & half windes, are marked other sixteene which are named quarters, and they are put in this manner, euery one of the eyght principal windes hath two quarters, gathered foorth of them, and euery one of them doth take the name of y e windes nearest to him, in this manner.
The north hath two quarters, which is by the part of the northeast, and is called North and by east, & that which is by the part of the northwest is called north and by west.
The northeast hath other 2. & y t which standeth towardes the north, is called [Page] northeast and by north, and that which standeth towardes the [...] is called northeast and by east.
The east hath other two that which is towardes the parte of the northeast is called east & by north, & th [...] whiche is towardes the [...] of the so [...]th is called east and by south▪
The southeast hath two quarters, that which is towardes the east part, is pacled southeast and by east, & that whiche is towardes the south part, southeast & by south.
The south hath two quarters, that which is towardes the east, is called south and by east, and that whiche is towardes the West is called south and by west.
The southwest hath other 2. y e which is towardes the part of the south is called southwest and by south, and y e which is towardes the west, is called southwest and by west.
The west hath two quarters, that which is towardes the southwest is called west and by south, & that whiche is towardes the part of northwest is called west and by north.
The northwest hath two quarters, that which is towardes the part of the west is called northwest and by west, & that which is towardes the parte of the north is called northwest and by north,
They are ordayned in the manner following.
The sixt chapter, how the windes of the cardes whereby the saylers doe sayle doe girde or compasse about the roundnesse of the worlde for to sayle by them.
SEeing there hath beene declared, the windes of the cards of nauigation, their names, & differences: I wil speak in what manner and order these windes doe compasse about the roundnesse of the world, to know how to saile by thē. Of this is to be noted, that this round body of water and earth, hath in roundnesse three hundreth and threescore degrees. Therefore hee that is in any part or place, and woulde sayle towardes the North. All inconuenience being taken away, shall sayle with the winde at South, & with no other. It is to bee vnderstood, sayling before the winde. Although that hee not hauing the wind at South: But some other wind sayling by the bowling: may goe rising vp by other courses, making boords, one boord vnto one wind, & another boord vnto another: vntill he come to the place where he pretendeth to go. Likewise, he that wil sayle frō y e north to the south, must be with a Northerly winde, or in the manner aforesaide.
The nauigation of the east or west, is in this maner: a shippe departeth from the Islande of Saynt Thomas, or as they cal it Saynt Thome, which is vnder the equinoctiall, and woulde goe roūd about y e world, if in case, y t it might be sailed: this ship if she shoulde saile toward the east, her way should be in this maner, frō y e said Island or place where she departed, she shall saile w t west, 180. degrees, & if frō thēce she wil returne to y e place frō whence she departed, by the same course y t she wēt, she shal returne w t east y e same way: but if she goe forward on her way, you shal vnderstād, then all y e roūdnes wil serue you, y e west wherwith you departed, vntil you come to y e point where you came forth, in such sort y t in a place where a man is, a circle beyng imagined, which gyrdeth the worlde, all this circle is sayled with one winde, but if from the halfe circle, or before or after he will returne by the way that he went, he shall returne with the winde contrary. For it is to bee vnderstoode, that from the place that a man departeth vntill the halfe circle bee ended, he goeth departing from the place, from whence hee came, and the other half he returneth towards it againe, as the figure following sheweth it.
I say that one departeth from A. to goe towarde C. and goeth by B. in A. which is the place from whence hee departeth: the wynde beginneth, & being come to C. which is his opposite, if hee returne from thence to goe to the same B. the wind which is contrary, wil serue him. But if he goe sayling from C. to D. and from D. to A. you shal vnderstande that with the winde hee began to saile by, he shall goe al the roundnesse, vntill he returne, where he came foorth. The same accompt, shall be made, if you beginne to sayle towardes the West, and that which hath beene saide of the nauigation by the equinoctial, the same must bee kept by any manner of circle, whatsoeuer.
And it is to bee noted, that onlie from the East and West, there are circles or courses greater and lesser: the greater circle passeth by the Center, and the lesser passeth not by the Center. But all circles greater or lesser, haue three hundreth and sixtie degrees of length, but in the leagues that euery degree hath, there is difference of more & lesse, euen as the circle stādeth neere to the equinoctial, or to the [Page] poles. But the windes which must serue the turne ought to be of the greater circles and none of them of the lesser circles. The nauigation by the other windes is in this sorte. If one sayling towardes the northeast, gaue a turne about the worlde, going alwaies by the same course, he shall returne by y e southwest, from y e place where he departed: and the same will bee done by the contrary. And in the rest let the account be kept as before hath beene declared. The same doe I say by the nauigation towardes the southeast, that he shall returne by the northwest. And for an example of this, let it be asked: if two shippes bee in one port, and one departeth towardes the north and the other towardes the south, these shippes if they shall meete, and if they doe meet for to goe equall way how much shall euery one of them sayle? I say that these may meete, and that sayling by these courses, when euery one of them haue gone .180. degrees they shall be together. And in like manner, this acount is to be kept departing by other courses. And so it is to be vnderstoode, that whensoeuer two shippes or more doe goe forth of one port, and do sayle by different courses, when euery one of them haue gone 180. degrees, they shall returne and ioyne in the place opposite, from whence they departed: this is because as it is sayde, y t all the windes of the nauigation bee of y e greater circles, for all of them doe passe by the center, & so euery one going the half circle which is the sayde. 180. degrees shal finde him selfe in the point opposite from whence he came forth.
The seuenth chapter, of the order of the Cardes of Nauigation.
AMong the instrumentes which are necessary for the nauigation, one is the carde: for without it good nauigation cannot be made, seeing that in it the Pilot or sayler doeth see the place where he is, and the place whether hee pretendeth to goe, & seeth y e height of degrees that euery place hath, so that hee knoweth if he shall goe foorth right, or if he shall goe rising or descending: hee seeth also what winde or windes will serue him in his course, and where hee shall leaue one and take another: he also seeth the distance of the way which he shal goe, how many leagues it hath, and so he ordaineth in all thinges that which is best and conuenient for him. But it seemeth that with reason there may be had a doubt in the cardes wherwith the nauigation is made▪ And say that they be not certain nor true for this cause following. ( A doubt,) This being prooued that the worlde is a round body, and not onely the heauens, but also euery one of the elementes, so that the water whereby we sayle is round, and the winde wherewith it is sayled mooueth it selfe in roundnes & this being so we see that the cardes of nauigation be not made round but plaine: Therefore frō the round to the plaine is great difference, as appeareth by this present figure,
If two shippes should departe from A. vnto C. and the one of them went by B. and the other by D. so great differēce will be of the way that the one maketh to the other by how much the distance is from the B. vnto the D. & seeing that the way which by the sea is sayled is from the A. vnto C. by D. because the water is round, & the cardes doeth not shewe it to bee so, but it sheweth it in plaine manner which is from A. vnto C. [Page 17] by B. whereby it seemeth that the way which the ship maketh, is halfe more thē that which the card sheweth. Seeyng the ship goeth it in circle manner, and the card sheweth it by diameter, & the diameter hath but only the thirde part and one seuenth part of the circumference. Likewise the aforesaid seemeth to be so: because the roūd bodie is greater then all other bodies, and as the world is a round body, there is no other figure so great, that may be compared to it: and so the card which is made in plaine, cannot bee equall with the round. Also the courses of the nauigation, as they are put in the cardes in euery hundreth leagues: they departe one from the other twentie leagues, in such sort that from the place where the ship doth depart vnto the xc. degrees whiche doth amount to 1575. leagues. An these leagues they depart one ship from another, or one course from another 315. leagues. And seeing there are 32. courses, the world, that is to say, y e earth & y e water should haue in roundnesse, ten thousād & fourescore leagues: this is false, because this roundnesse hath 360. degrees of 17. leagues, and a halfe, euery degree, which doth amount to 6300. leagues and no more. Of all the aforesaid, it seemeth that the cardes of nauigation because they are made in plaine: should be false and vnperfect. ( A declaration.) To this is to be noted▪ that the cardes of nauigation are true and altogether perfect: and the art wherwith they are made and ordained, doth conteine all certeintie▪ And aunswearing to the first is: that the nauigation which the ship doth make in roundnesse, and the card doth shewe in playne: is to be vnderstood, that the same quantity or distaunce of way, that euery part hath in roundnesse, the selfe same is reckoned and giuen in playne: aswell in y e land, as in y e water, by marking in the leagues and degrees the distance that euery thing hath in roūdnesse, without taking from it any thing. And this may wel be done, for although that one body be round, there may bee giuen to it the self same proportion and greatnesse in playne, as Ptholome setteth it foorth in the playne sphere. And Iordan in the treatie which he made of the same matter. This seemeth to be by an example in an apple, that although it be rounde, the length & breadth that his roundnesse hath, may bee put in playne forme: euen so in the cardes of nauigation, although in their figure or shape they be not rounde, yet in the accounting of the way, they giue and hold in equalitie with the round: And the round body to be greater then another body. It is to be vnderstood, that those bodies being equall in circumference, for not beyng equal, another figure may wel be greater then the round. And for as much as I say, of the courses of the cardes. It is likewise to be vnderstood, that these be ordayned in Geometry, & because it is so singuler among y e Mathimaticals, they cānot be false as those Authours whiche I haue spoken of doe shewe. And if by a point of the card there are founde more Leagues in the courses then the world hath: This is not hurtfull to the carde, for this arte and shew of the courses, is not only for this number of sixe thousand and three hundreth Leagues which the worlde hath: but for any manner of number, so that although the world had a hundred thousand leagues, or had a thousande, the selfe same woulde serue those courses in one number as in another: as it appeareth, that such as saile one hundreth leagues doe goe in their waye as well as those which goe vnto the East India, which sayle fiue thousande. And as Magalanes sailed, and suche as went with him in the yeere 1521. when the straight was discouered, which of Magalanes is named, that then sayling from Spayne, they gaue a turne about the world: of that as is said, it appeareth plainely, that the cardes of nauigation are so well ordayned, that theyr agreement and perfection is a thing maruellous: seeing a thing so great as the earth and the Sea is, beeing marked in so little roome as a Carde is, and doe so muche agree, that it doth not misse one [...]otte to sayle the [Page] whole world thereby.
The eight Chapter, of the account which the pilot ought to haue in his waye when hee sayleth with a winde different to his course.
SEeing there hath beene declared y e order which ought to bee vsed, if the roundnesse of the world were sayled: In this I will speake of shorter voiages or wa [...]es, and such as are more commonly sailed by sea frō one place to another. And howe y e pilots & saylers should know to keepe a good account, & giue reason of their nauigations, whether soeuer they goe: for the which I saye, whensoeuer the pilot will saile, he ought principally to look vpō 3. things.
First of al, the place where he is, and the place whither he mindeth to goe, & to know the distance, that is frō the one place to the other.
The second, in what height of degrees he findeth himselfe, and in what height the place is which hee mindeth to goe vnto.
The third is, to know the winde or winds that shall serue him in his nauigation, al the which he may see & know in his carde.
And this beeyng knowne, let him looke if he haue a winde that is conuenient for his nauigation, and hauing it let him proceede vppon his voyage as weather, & time will permitte him. And it is to bee noted, y t many times it happeneth that for the nauigation which should bee made, the wind serueth not according to the course, which the ship should goe: And therefore it is sayled with another wynde whiche is different.
Likewise it happeneth, that as a ship goeth sayling, there commeth such weather, that causeth her to goe foorth of her right way: and take her course by another, by the which how much more she goeth, so much the land y e they goe to seeke changeth it selfe into different courses of the cōpasse. This is because the shippe goeth not her right course to the place, whither she pretēdeth to goe: so that the selfe same place, varieth or changeth it selfe from one cour [...]e into another. And likewise sometimes it waxeth neere, and other times farre of.
And when it is so, that the pilot sayleth with a winde, different to that which is conuenient for his course, and sayling would knowe in what poynt or course, the land whither he mindeth to goe, lieth from him: and howe manye leagues hee hath from him to it, in the figures & accounts following, hee shall finde it: the which shall profite him to knowe the certayne place where hee is, and thereby hee shall knowe howe to choose the true course, (when weather serueth him) for to returne to the certaine place whither he mindeth to goe, which is to be vnderstood in this manner. I say that you will sayle to a land, which beeing seene in your carde, and the place marked where you are: You shall find y e it is from you towards the North or South, or any other course, and so sayling towardes one place, you runne towardes another: and put the case that the land whether you pretend to goe, be from you towards the North, so that you should sayle with the winde at South, & because this winde bloweth not, you sayle with another winde: Therefore if the nauigation bee by the first course more neere to the winde it selfe, in the first figure you shall finde marked this first course, and neere to it the leagues which you shall goe for to get the land, whither you pretende to goe towards all the courses of the compasse: as also how many Leagues the land is of from you, and in the manner that the nauigation is declared by this course, so all others are declared.
And when in sayling you haue not the proper winde which shoulde serue, marke by the winde which you haue, how many poynts it is of frō the proper wind, wherewith you should saile, and seeke it in one of the figures, that is here put, which shalbe one of thē marked with the crosse, & nere to the figure where the like winde is, you shall finde three accountes, these accountes serue [Page 18] in this manner.
In the first account, you shall finde how many leagues you shall goe by the course where you sayle.
In the second account is the course where you haue the lande whether you pretend to goe, (I will say) that hauing gone those leagues which there are declared you shall come vnto the lande, which you seeke after by the course that is there marked: the which you shall knowe what course it is, by the number that he hath, seeking the same number in the figure that is nexte to it.
In the third account, you shall finde how many leagues you are distant of the same lande whether you goe, so that hauing gone the leagues of the first account you shall haue the land whether you goe at the course which standeth in the second: And you shall be from the same land the leagues that are marked in the third account.
This being knowne, three thinges are to be noted.
The first, because heere cannot be put any rule for the number of the leagues that are from the place where you are vnto the place where you pretende to goe: because at one time there will be more distance then at another time.
Therefore this account is taken out for the number of a hundreth leagues, I will say that the place where you are vnto the place whether you wil goe, is a hundreth leagues of way. And it is to be noted, that although this accoūt, doe serue for this number of a hundreth leagues, it serueth likewise for any other number of leagues, that the way hath, in this manner, if the waye be of 200 leagues you shall goe it twise as much as the numbers of the first account doe shewe: And then you shall haue the lande whether you goe in the course which is marked in the seconde account, and you shall be from the sayd land, twise as many leagues of them which are accounted in the thirde account: and if the way be of 300 leagues you must goe thrise as much as the nū bers of the first account shewe so that of euery hūdreth leagues, which is encreased of the way you shall geue as much more number of that which is in first and third account, & then you shall haue the lande at the same courses or pointes, which are marked in the secōd account, and if in the way bee fifties, or more or lesse you shall geue a halfe, a thirde, a fourth, or a fifth, or according as the number is.
The second is, that in the figures which are put here, the nauigation goeth marked by the windes of the one parte of the compasse: and by the other parte of the course where you shall finde the lande.
This is to be noted that the same account is when you shall faile by the parte where the courses goe, and so it serueth for all partes.
The thirde is, that towardes the wind that these figures doe shew forth right, shalbe geuen the name of the proper winde wherewith you shoulde sayle [...]
Leigues of the way. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
l. | 1 | l. |
lx vii. | 2 | xl |
lxx. vi. | 3 | xx viii |
l [...]xx. | 4 | xx v |
xx. | 5 | xx ii. |
xx. iiii. | 6 | xx. |
xx. viii. | 7 | xx. |
c. | 8 | xc. ii |
c. | 9 | xx. v. |
c. x | 10 | xx. v. |
c xv. | 11 | xx. vi |
c. xx. | 12 | xl |
c. xl. | 13 | l |
[...] [...]. v | 14 | c |
Leagues of the way. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
xxx. | 1 | lxxii. |
l iii. | 2 | l i. |
lxx. | 3 | xl ii. |
lxx ii. | 4 | lx ii. |
lxx | 5 | xl. |
xcv. | 6 | xxx. |
c | 7 | xl. |
c iii. | 8 | xl |
c x v. | 9 | xl ii. |
c xxx. | 10 | lx. |
c xl iii. | 11 | lxx. |
c lxxx. | 12 | c. |
cc lxxx ii. | 13 | cc. |
Leagues of the waie. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
xx v | 1 | lxxx. |
xl v | 2 | lxx. |
lx | 3 | lx |
lxx | 4 | l viii |
lxxx i | 5 | l viii. |
xc | 6 | lx. |
c | 7 | lx. |
c x viii | 8 | lx v |
c xxx v | 9 | lxxx. |
c lx v. | 10 | c |
cc x v | 11 | c xl v |
ccc lx. | 12 | cc xc |
Leages of the waie. | Courses. | [...] of distance. |
xx | 1 | lxxx v |
xl | 2 | lxx v |
l viii | 3 | lxx |
lxx | 4 | lxx |
xc. | 5 | lxx |
c | 6 | lxx v |
c x | 7 | lxxx |
c xl | 8 | c |
c lxx v | 9 | c v |
cc xxx v | 10 | c lxxx |
ccc lxxx | 11 | ccc x |
Leagues of the waie. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
xc | 1 | xc |
xl | 2 | lxxx |
l v | 3 | lxxx |
lxx | 4 | lxxx |
xc | 5 | xc. |
c x | 6 | c |
c xxx v | 7 | c x v |
c lxxx | 8 | c xl v |
cc x | 9 | cc xx v |
ccc lx | 10 | cccc xx v |
Leagues of the waie. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
xx | 1 | xc. |
xl | 2 | xc. |
l v | 3 | xc |
lxx v | 4 | c |
c | 5 | c x |
c xx v | 6 | c xx v |
c lxx | 7 | c lx |
cc l | 8 | cc xx |
d x | 9 | cccc lxxx v |
Leagues of the way. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
xx. | 1 | xc v. |
xl i. | 2 | xc v. |
lx. | 3 | c v. |
lxxx. | 4 | c x. |
c x. | 5 | c xxx v. |
c l v. | 6 | c lx v. |
cc xl. | 7 | cc xl. |
cccc xc. | 8 | cccc lxxx. |
Leagues of the way. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
xx. | 1 | c. |
xl. | 2 | c x. |
lx v. | 3 | c xx. |
xc v. | 4 | c xxx. v. |
c xl. | 5 | c lxx v. |
cc xxx v. | 6 | cc l viii. |
cccc lxx. | 7 | cccc lxxx. |
Leagues of the way. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
xx. | 1 | c iii. |
xl v. | 2 | c x v. |
lxxx. | 3 | c xl. |
c xx v. | 4 | c lxx. |
cc v. | 5 | cc l. |
ccccxl v. | 6 | cccclxx. |
Leagues of the way. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
xx. | 1 | c x. |
l v. | 2 | c xxx. |
c | 3 | c ix ii. |
c lxxx. | 4 | cc xl. |
cccc xl. | 5 | cccclxx. |
Leagues of [...]he way. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
xxx. | 1 | c xx. |
lxx. | 2 | c l. |
c xl. | 3 | cc x. |
ccc xxx. | 4 | ccc cx. |
Leagues of [...]he way. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
xxx. | 1 | c xx. |
c | 2 | c lxxx. |
cc xc. | 3 | ccc lxx. |
Leagues of the way. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
l. | 1 | c xl. |
c xc. | 2 | cc ixxx. |
Leagues of the way. | Courses. | Leagues of distance. |
c. | 1 | c xc. |
AND for the better declaration of the rules aboue written, this present figure is to be noted in the whiche I say, that you finde your selfe, in the poynt, A. And the lande whither you will goe, you haue it, I put the case at the North, in the poynt B. and there is from you to it an hundreth leagues, so that your way should be from A. vnto B. that is to say, sayling from the south towardes the North, and because you haue not this winde, you sayle by the first course, and the account beeyng put in the first rule, doth teache you, that if you goe fiftie leagues by this first course: that the Lande, which you had first towardes the North, you shal haue it at North and by East (you sailing by the course of North, & bywest) and there shalbee from you to it fiftie Leagues, and if you goe by the same course sixtie seuen Leagues, then you shall finde it towards y e North North-East, and then it will be from you to it fortie leagues. And if you sayle seuentie sixe leagues, you shall haue it towardes the Northeast and by north, and there will be frō you to it twentie eight Leagues. And so in the rest, this rule teacheth you how many leagues shuld be sailed for to get to the lande whether you goe to all these courses. The second figure and rule is, when you shall sayle by the seconde course distant from the proper winde: in the whiche you shall find the account that shalbe kept in that way. And the third for the third course, and so for all the rest: and it is to be noted, that to this winde at North, which was put for an example, shalbee giuen the proper name of the winde, whereby you should saile, and to the others the [Page] names of the windes, that are next to him.
Also it is to be noted, that alwayes it must be considered what distance is from the place where your are, vnto y e place whither you mind to goe, wherby you may make the account, euen as before is declared.
The nienth Chapter, how the pilot shal certeinly knowe sayling by any manner of course where the Meridian is.
AND seeyng that in the rules before writtē hath beene declared howe the Pilot shall knowe whersoeuer he shall sayle, and to what point or course of the compasse he hath the land whither he goeth, and how many Leagues the lande is from him. Here I will speake, that departing from one place for to sayle to another by anye manner of course, you shall knowe howe muche you depart frō that Meridian wherin you were, and knowe the Meridian, wherein you finde your selfe: for this is a thing most necessary in the nauigation, the height or altitude only excepted. And because this rule of the Meridian, may bee the better vnderstood, you shall note this example. I saye that eight shippes beeyng in one porte, and they goe foorth sayling, the one from the North to the South, the seconde by the first quarter, the third by the seconde: and so all the other by different windes, when euery one of these shippes haue gone one degree, or two, or more, being equal in degrees: they shalbe East and Weast all of them one with the other, although not equal in way, for the one hath gone muche more then the other, in such sorte, that that which hath sayled by the seconde course hath gone more waye, then that which sayled the first, & the thirde more then the second, and so of the rest: by how much they goe from the first, so much y e more way is to be gone to raise vp, or to descend a degree. This is caused by reason of the obliquitie of y e courses as more largely shalbee declared in the 14. Chapter of this third booke, and this being knowne (I say for to know) howe farre a man is from y e Meridian, from whence hee departed, imagine that his nauigation shoulde bee by the same Meridian: that is to say, from the North, to the South, or from the South to the North: and that hee saileth by the first, the seconde the third, or fourth course, or by any of the other: according as the course lieth whither you minde to sayle, to one place, or to an other. And this is to bee vnderstood in the fourteene courses colaterales, from y e North to y e South, or frō the South, to the North, according as in the first figures which are put heere doth appeare: for because for y e other 14. courses Colaterals, frō the East to the West, in the secōd figure or fable they are declared: therfore I say, when you shall sayle by any of the 14. courses heeretofore declared, two thinges must be considered. The first in what height of degrees you were, when you were in them, and in what height you doe presētly find your self in: and looke how many degrees of differēce are frō the one to y e other. The seconde is to looke by what course you haue come vnto y e place where you are, and this being knowne, looke into the account hereafter written in y e first table, and in it you shall finde how many Leagues you haue departed from the Meridian, which you had in place from whence you departed.
An example. I say, that you departed from the point of these first marked figures following, & so you were in 20. degrees of height, & after that, taking your altitude, you found your self in 15. degrees, or in 25. in such sorte, that you found to haue raysed or destended fiue degrees, and this was sayling by the fourth course, whose name you shall know looking on y e fourth where he is marked in the figures which are heere put, & the course being knowne & agreeed with y^ which you haue sailed, looke in y e table which is next in the 4. course at the fiue degrees, and you shall finde [Page 23] that you haue gone from the Meridian from whēce you departed 87. leagues. And for y e better vnderstanding of this rule, immagine that from this point of the twentie degrees, where you were, or from any other place from whence you departed, that when from thence you departed, there departed, likewise another shippe from the same point sailing by the same Meridian, and that when you had gone the fiue degrees she likewise had gone other fiue, in such sort that you haue her East and West with you, and so it is to be vnderstoode that these 87. leagues are of distance frō you to this shippe, because you are so farre distant of that Meridian, And so knowing the distance which you haue from the Meridian, where you departed, foorthwith you shal know the Meridian wherin you are, and in this sorte immagine that any manner of course that you shall saile, by any of these that are marked heere vnder in the two first figures, you haue this shippe East and West with you, and this shall be your guide for to know how farr distant you be from the Meridian where you were, this is by seeing how many leagues you haue raised or descended, and the course wherby you haue sailed, and being sought in the figures and table following, by it you shall know the Meridian certaine wherin you are.
The Nauigation by those courses Colaterales from the North to the South.
The Nauigation by those courses Colaterales from the South to the North.
A Table of the nauigation from the north to the south, or from the south to the north.
When you shall sayle by the first course
Degrees, | i. | ii. | iii. | iii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x |
Leagues. | 3 | 7 | 10 | 14 | 17 | 21 | 24 | 28 | 31 | 35 |
When you shall sayle by the second course.
Degrees | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 7 | 15 | 22 | 30 | 37 | 45 | 52 | 60 | 67 | 75. |
When you shall sayle by the third course.
Degrees. | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 11 | 23 | 34 | 46 | 57 | 69 | 80 | 92 | 103 | 115 |
When you shall saile by the fourth course.
Degrees | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii | ix. | x |
Leagues, | 17 | 35 | 52 | 70 | 87 | 105 | 122 | 140 | 157 | 175 |
When you shall saile by the fifth course.
Degrees. | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x, |
Leagues. | 26 | 53 | 79 | 106 | 132 | 159 | 185 | 212 | 238 | 265 |
When you shall saile by the sixth course.
Degrees | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 42 | 85 | 127 | 170 | 212 | 255 | 297 | 340 | 382 | 425 |
When you shall sayle by the seuenth course.
Degrees. | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 85 | 171 | 256 | 342 | 427 | 513 | 598 | 680 | 769 | 855 |
¶The Nauigation by the courses Colaterales from the east to the west.
The Nauigation by the courses Colaterales from the west to the east.
A Table of the nauigation from the East to the West, or to the contrary
When you shall sayle by the first course.
Degrees. | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 85 | 171 | 256 | 342 | 427 | 513 | 598 | 680 | 769 | 855 |
When you shall sayle by the second course.
Degrees. | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 42 | 85 | 127 | 170 | 212 | 255 | 297 | 340 | 382 | 425 |
When you shall sayle by the third course.
Degrees. | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 26 | 53 | 79 | 160 | 132 | 159 | 185 | 212 | 238 | 265 |
When you shall saile by the fourth course.
Degrees. | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 17 | 35 | 52 | 70 | 87 | 105 | 122 | 140 | 157 | 175 |
When you shall saile by the fifth course.
Degrees. | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 11 | 23 | 34 | 46 | 57 | 69 | 80 | 92 | 103 | 115 |
When you shall saile by the sixth course.
Degrees. | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 7 | 15 | 22 | 30 | 37 | 45 | 52 | 60 | 67 | 75 |
When you shall sayle by the seuenth course.
Degrees. | i. | ii. | iii. | iiii. | v. | vi. | vii. | viii. | ix. | x. |
Leagues. | 3 | 7 | 10 | 14 | 17 | 21 | 24 | 28 | 31 | 35 |
The tenth Chapter, wherein is declared, more of this rule before written.
FOR it is not onely necessary to knowe the nauigation which is made from the north to the south, and so contrary: but also that which is made from the East to the West, or from the West to the East (that is to say) by these courses their Colaterales. Therefore I haue put the demonstrations & table before written, of the whiche is to bee noted the same order that is in the Nauigation from the North to the south, or from the south to the north as it hath been declared. (The whiche is) when you goe sailing you shall mark in howe many degrees of height you finde your selfe in, and after that when you turne to take the sayde altitude, you shall marke howe manye degrees you haue risen or descended from the place from whence you departed. And this being knowne looke vpon the figures before written, the course whereby you haue sailed, and if it be the first the second or third, or any of the others, and y e course being knowne seeke it in y e table, & in y e same course looke y e number of y t degrees which you haue gone, and nere to the degrees, you shal finde the leagues which you haue sailed. I speak of an exāple, that taking your altitude you found your selfe in 30. degrees, and after that you found your selfe in thirtie two, or in thirtie eyght in such sorte you rose v p or descended two degrees, and you sailed by the third course.
Therfore looke in the table in y e third course at the second degree, and you shal finde that you haue gone fiftie two leagues, and in this order you shall know the rest.
And note that in these tables, there are not put more numbers thē vnto ten degrees. (The reason is) that whilest these be a sayling by any manner of course, there will be place to take the altitude, and being taken, to marke the place, and from thence to begin the account as well rising as descending, and in this sort you shal goe making a point in your carde, and knowe the certaine place where you are.
The eleuenth chapter, how the Pilot ought to choose the course which is conuenient according to the place hee mindeth to saile vnto.
THE Pilot or any other person that mindeth to sayle, before all thinges he ought to consider of the waye that hee mindeth to goe, and so to choose the course or courses which are necessary, according to the way whiche he mindeth to make, and for this put before you a certaine rule, and this in any manner of place where a man standeth, is a point or beginning where the courses or winds of the nauigation doe proceede and come foorth. Therefore the Pilot ought to looke in his card the place where he is, & the place whether he mindeth to goe vnto, and this being knowne, he ought to seeke for the course that maye goe moste right to it from whence he doth depart vnto the place whether he mindeth to goe, and if there be a course that will carry him straight from one place to the other, let him put the foreparte of his shippe into it as his compasse will shewe him, and by that course let him follow his way, as long as weather will serue him.
And when there is no course that goeth the right way, let him seeke with the compasse the course that is most agreeable vnto him, which is it y t wil bring him least out of his way to the place whether he mindeth to goe, and by the saide course let him follow the degrees or leagues which are of distance, vntill he finde another that goeth more right to the place, and in this let the Pilot haue great care, to see how much waye euery course serueth him, and where he shall leaue that way and take another, and that he keepe a good reckoning & knowledge of the way that hee maketh as much as is possible, and at all times when neede requireth to make a point in his carde and mooue his course, let him doe it keeping alwaies a good reckoning of his waye, and this to [Page 26] continue vntill hee finde a course that may cary him directly to the place that he desireth. And the Pilot in the beginning ought not to keep himself towards the courses that are nearest adioyning to him where he is, but vnto those that are nearest to the place whether he goeth. And it woulde doe well to pricke his carde often, and prouide diligently vpō his course: & let the Pilot note, that for to chose y e course y e right way as he ought to doe, he hath need to know precisely the Meridian wherin he is: for not knowing it there may follow great errour, as by this example appeareth.
If one shippe goe sayling, the Pilot maketh her to be in the point. A. and would goe seeking for B, and in truth his point was the C. it is euident by reason he is ignorant & without knowledge of the Meridian beleuing that he sayled from A. vnto B. his nauigation was from C. vnto D. And therefore it seemeth that so much as is erred in the knowledge of the place where the shipp is, as much more she is distant from the place that she goeth to seeke: and this is one of the causes, whereby the Pilots doe finde themselues in great errour in theire nauigatiō, and loose much time, and other inconuententies happen to them. Therfore let the Pilot take this for a good aduise, in long wayes to keepe for him selfe a booke of account of his nauigation, where he should be put in remembrance of the winde y t serueth him euery day, and in what sorte and so how much the singlenes may bee, that his shippe maketh, looking by his clocke how many leagues he may runne euery houre: and you shal vnderstand, that the most which she can runne is foure leagues in an houre, and three leagues in an houre is a great tunne, and in one houre two leagues is reasonable, and and in an houre to runne a league and a halfe or sometime but a league. It must be well looked vnto, and great aduise must be had in this, for it will profit much to pricke the carde to knowe the Meridian, and therby to choose the true course as it is sayd.
The twelfth chapter, how you should prick your carde to know the place, wherein the shippe is.
ONE of the thinges that the Pilot ought to know perfectlie, is to pricke his carde very precisely, for it is verye necessarye for good nauigation. Therfore whē y e pilot wil prick his card for to knowe the place where hee is, he ought first of al to looke in his card, y e place frō whence he departed in what height of degrees it is in, according as hee shall finde by the graduation which the rard hath, and let him looke also in how many degrees of height he findeth himselfe in according as he tooke it, and this being knowen let him take his two compasses and put the pointe of one of them in the place from whence he departed, & the other pointe of the same compasse let him put in the course or winde which he hath had, and take the other compas and put the one pointe in the degrees of height which he hath found, seeking them in the graduation of the card, and the other pointe of this compasse in the winde East, and West that is neerest, and make these compasses to runne the one vnto the other not taking away y e two points which come vpō the winds, (that is to say) the one, is it which the ship hath gone, and the other the East or West and comming in this manner where ioyntly you shall ioyne the two pointes of both compasses, [Page] the one which was put in the place from whence the shippe departed, and y e other in the height or altitude where in ye found your selfe. In this point is the place wherin the ship is, & to knowe if this point be certeine make the proofe in this māner. Look in the point where you finde your selfe in, and from thence with the compasse measure how many leagues are frō it to y e place frō whence you departed, & this being known, looke into y e wind that brought you how many leagues is to be reckoned for a degree, according as you shall finde in the fifteeneth chapter of this third booke, & beeing seene howe many degrees you haue raised or descended from the place where you departed, vnto y e place wher you make your selfe to bee, you shall reckon the leagues that these degrees doe amount vnto, and if the leagues of the degrees bee iust with the leagues that you finde of your way, your reckoning is good, and if the reckoning be not agreeable the one with the other, looke wherein the errour is, for because that these two summes or reckonings should come iust. And if the place where you finde your selfe be iust in altitude with the place from whence you departed, heere is no rule that can instruct you iustly that which you haue sayled, but by iudgement that which your shippe may goe, according to y e dayes & houres that she hath sailed, and according to y e weather she hath had, and so the reckoning is made little more or lesse. But let the pilot [...]atke that [...] this account or reckoning of little more or lesse, ought to be considered the currents or tides that may be in your way, for y e many times the winde and tide are one way, & whē it is so the shipp runneth more way thē the Pilot thinketh: at other times the windes & tides are contrary in such sorte that as much as the winde carrieth so much the currēt or tide reteineth or keepeth backe, & for this cause you ought to consider that if the winde doe cast y e ship to one parte & the currents to another, the race of the ship will be in that parte where is lesse strength or power, & if the winde & the currents be equall the race of her will be of y e side where the currēt is. Let the pilot cōsider the falling down or holding vp that the shipp may make, and so let him make the account that is conuenient. This aduise is to bee had whē he pricketh his card by squarenes or by fancie, which is by reckoning the singlenes that the ship hath made, and arbitrar or indg how much way it may be that shee hath gone in euery one, and by what course, of all these the Pilot must keepe a good reckoning in his nauigation as much as in him lieth.
The 13. chapter, howe the Pilot ought to looke that his carde be iust & certeine that there be no errour in his nauigation.
IN the chapter before hath beene declared the manner y t the Pilot or sayler should haue in the pricking of his card & know the place where he is, & be cause my intēt is to declare how y e sailers should know to make their nauigatiōs with out perill or danger, as well of the ignorance of the rules & instructions of the nauigation, as also to knowe the defectes of the cards & instrumentes wherewith they gouerne thēselues by the sea.
I say let the Pilot or any other persō y t shall sayle, be well aduised that the card which he shal prick, and order his nauigation by, be iust & true, as well in the courses as in the setting down of y e coast in such sort y t euery one thing bee in his proper place both true & certein as well in the course as in y e altitude. So that the errour or defect of the card be not occasion that in nauigation you erre, and you must note y t amōg the cards of nauigatiō y t vntil now haue byn vsed in y e way of y e Indiās of his maiesty, there are many which haue 2 graduatiōs differēt one frō the other, in such sort that from one graduatiō to the other is more thē 3 degrees of difference, these cardes are false and in the nauigations that by thē are made may followe much hurte and greate incōuenience by reason of the differēce, that these 2. graduatiōs haue betweene them, because their difference doth cause that al the courses y t reache [Page 27] frō one graduatiō to the other are false, being seen frō y e place where they begin vnto y e place where they make an end. The reason is, y t as they begin in one graduatiō, and make an end in another, y t is different from that: so y e said courses doe make the selfsame differēce, & so the way that is sayled by them, shalbe erred, & you shall not find the place that you doe seeke by it: seeing y t the ports, baies, Ilandes, & shooldes, & the other thinges of the cardes, where these said courses doe beginne, beeing looked on where they end, they bee foorth of their owne places & true altitude, making it equall with the altitude where the nauigation began. Also looking in euerie course of the card, y e distance of leagues, that are from one place to another, or from one porte to another, I say, from the place where the course began, vnto the place where it endeth: and these Leagues beeyng taken with the compasse, & the Leagues being seene which are reckoned for a degree in euerye course of the nauigatiō shalbe found, y t y e leagues of the courses be not agreable with those leagues, which are of the distance of the way. This is in the courses that doe reach frō one graduatiō to another: the which is caused by reason of the difference that the two graduations haue: so that by these saide cardes cānot be made any good nauigatiō, seeing that they in themselues doe varie: likewise because they haue 2. equinoctiall lines, and many other errors, al the which I haue made declaration of before. The Coūsel royall of the Indians, of his Maiestie, wherevpon it hath beene commaunded that the said cards be not vsed by reason they haue two different graduations, and therefore are false and erronious as it is said. Therefore I say, that the Pilot or sayler ought to looke well that the carde whereby hee doth sayle, be of one only graduation: I wil say if they haue two graduations or more: let them bee equall or vniforme and not different, the one frō the other. And likewise the other instruments, let them bee certayne and true, that they cause no errour, whereby may followe hurt and daunger, as it is most certeine that with false instrumentes it maye and doth oftentimes happen.
The fourteenth Chapter, of the number of the Leagues, which are reckoned for a degree in euery course of the nauigation.
FIrst, before I declare the nūber of y e leagues, that ought to bee giuen to euery degree in euery one of y e courses of nauigation; it is conueniēt to speake here what is the cause wherfore to the roundnes of the worlde, from the East to the West, or from the North to the South, was giuen to euery degree, 17. leagues and a halfe, and no more. And in y e other courses, although they be equal: with these are reckoned more leagues for a degree then in them. To this is to be noted, what degree is taken in one of two sortes, is to be vnderstood a degree of the roundnesse of the world, or a degree of eleuatiō or height of the pole. For the first which is a degree of roundnesse, in this all the degrees of the courses or winds be equal, for all the windes are as the greater circles in the sphere, & as it hath beene declared, they haue three hundreth and sixtie degrees of longitude, and for that cause is giuen to euery degree of roūdnesse seuenteene leagues and a half: but in the secōd māner, which is the degrees of the eleuation of the pole, these are different vnto those of the roundnesse. For if in sayling towards the north going 17. leagues & a half, the pole is raised a degree, whē you saile towards the Northeast, although you goe these 17. & a halfe, you haue not raised y e pole [...] degree: but it is necessary that you goe by this course 24. Leagues and a halfe, for euery degree of eleuatiō of the pole, and like in all the rest of the courses, by howe muche euerie one is more straight from the pole vnto the Lyne: so manye more Leagues, or lesse shall be gone for euery degree of eleuation of the pole, so that the roūdnes wherwith the world is girded, is not to be looked on in all the courses of the nauigation. But do you also look how much should [Page] bee gone by euery course for to raise vp or to put down euery degree of y e height of y e pole, because this altitude of y e pole, is to bee reckoned from the halfe of the world, which is from the Equinoctiall line: for that from thence they begin to reckon the degrees, as well for the part of the North, as for that of the South, so that in the cardes of nauigation, are put the coastes and all the rest that are marked in it according to the degrees y t euery thing is distant of the sayd line: in such sort, that sailing by any manner of course, from what place a man is in, towards the Equinoctiall, or from the saide Equinoctiall or any other part, by as much as the course is more straight or crooked, by so much they shall reckon more or lesse leagues in euery degree in this manner.
The Equinoctiall line.
I put the case, that two shippes bee in y e poynt A. which is a port towards the North, sixe degrees distant from the Equinoctial, and both of them doe depart from thence towardes the sayde line, & the one departeth with North, & the other with Northeast towardes the Southwest: It is certayne, that she which carrieth the winde at North, sailing by the same course from the North towardes the South after shee hath gone a hundreth & fiue leagues whiche are the said sixe degrees, by that course she shalbe in the Equinoctiall: And the other that saileth with Northeast towards the Southwest, by reason that that winde goeth more leaning towards the sayde line, the way is longer to her. And so although that in the altitude shee goeth not downe more then sixe degrees, but for to come to y e Equinoctiall she shall goe one hundreth fortie seuen leagues, by y e which shee hath euery degree by this course 24. leagues & a halfe: so that only from the North, to the South, and from the East to y e West, & contrariwise euery degree hath 17. leagues & a halfe, but in the other courses euery degree hath the leagues following.
The second course hath a hundreth and eight leagues deuided into sixe degrees, which commeth foorth euery degree 18. leagues.
The thirde course hath a hundreth and fifteene leagues and a halfe, so that euery degree hath nieneteene leagues and a terce.
The fourth course hath a hundreth twentie sixe leagus, so that euery degree hath 21. leagues.
The fifth course hath a hundreth fortie seuen Leagues, so that euery degree hath 24. leagues and a halfe.
The sixe course hath a 189. leagues, so that euery degree hath 31. leagues and a halfe.
The seuenth course hath two hundreth seuenty three leagues, so that euery degree hath forty fiue leagues and a halfe.
The eight course hath fiue hundreth thirtie fiue leagues, so that euery degree hath eighty and niene leagues.
The fifteenth Chapter, of number, and measure, and of how many parts a degree is compounded.
IT is writtē in the book of wisedome, that God made all things in number, waight, & measure, therfore without knowledge of the numbers we can knowe nothing, of the time, of the houres, or of the moouinges, or other thinges, by the which it seemeth that without knowledge how to reckon we cannot know any thing.
There are two sortes of quantities, or numbers: one is continuall, another is deuided or discrete: The continuall is in 3. sorts, y t is to say, towardes the length only like to a line, and this is called quantitie lineall: Another is continued in length, & bredth, but not deepe, & this is called superficial: The third is cōtinued in length, bredth, & depth, & is called corporal, or set together. The quā titie deuided or discrete, is whē we say, one, two, three, &c: wherby it seemeth by the diuersitie of the nūbers are vnderstood diuers meanings of writinges, & so he that knoweth them not, ought not to bee called a man. Plato saith, for this cause is man so wise a creature, because he knoweth the manner how to accoūt: for the which he had written at y e doore of his Academia, y t who could not make a reckoning or account, should not enter in, to heare him. The measures, & y e reasōs for thē & their properties haue sprōg of Geometry: for Geometry is a science of measure, the which doth containe lines, superficies, and bodies, as appeareth in any circle three square, foure square, & other figures, of Geometrie: [Page] many Authors haue written, and principally Euclides, the father of Ypocras. Plurtarch saith, that Archimedes made an artificiall thing by Geometry, with the which, Marcellus a captayne of the Romaines, hauing besieged the citie of Syracula, in Sicilia with the saide artificiall thing Archimedes tooke out the ships of Marcellus, that were in the Sea, by raising them vp into the aire, he put them within the Citie: this science is called Geometry, as Saint Isidore saith, for the distribution of landes and fieldes: Geometry properly is of y e corporal things for that all corporall thinges haue their proper measure.
And of the spaces or distances that are frō one prouince or citie to another, which are measured by Escadios, miles, Leagues, & Degrees: And this measure whereby that all may be alike in equalitie is ordayned in this manner.
Foure graines of Barley doe make one finger.
Foure fingers one hand.
Foure handes one foote.
Fiue foote maketh one pace.
An hundreth twentie fiue paces maketh one Escadio.
Eight Escadios which are a thousand paces, doe make a Mile.
Three Miles doe make a league.
Seuenteene leagues and a halfe doe make a degree.
Euery degree hath lx. minutes.
Euery minute 60. seconds.
Euery second 60. thirdes.
And so vnto tenthes.
The reason why this account is diuided into this number of 60. more thē into any other. Ptholome declareth in the first of y e Almagesto, the nienth chapter: where he saith, that y t Astronomers, sought a number, that hath many numbers in proportionall partes, which we call parts, Alicotas, and there cannot be giuē any other number vnder sixtie, for that this number may bee parted into many diuisions and numbers, as in two times thirtie, in three times twentie &c.
¶The fourth booke of the height or altitude of the Sunne, and how the nauigation ought to be ruled thereby.
The first Chapter, wherein are declared 17. Fundamentall principles, which ought to be knowen in the Altitude of the Sunne.
ONe of the things most subtile and of greatest vnderstanding cō teyned in y e Art of nauigation, is the altitude of the sunne: for it sheweth truely the way, that hee which sayleth, maketh, or shall make in suche sorte, that if hee hath made any errour in his voyage: by this altitude hee knoweth it: and so by reason that it is a thing so excellent and subtile, y e auncient writers in old time did highly esteeme of y e practise therof, chiefly that great Ptholome, & other singuler authors, for the which they used diuers instruments as y e Astrolabio, & the 3. rules, and others.
This altitude is so effectuall for good nauigatiō, that those which doe saile to farre coūtries, cānot make their nauigations: if this should lacke. For among all the rules and aduises that I haue declared in this art, and will declare as wel touching the altitude of the North as of others which serue in the nauigation: This altitude [...] the sunne hath excellency among all others, because he [Page] is as a proofe of Arithmeticke, that soeweth the errours whiche are in the numbers: so that by the altitude of the sunne, being precisely taken, the Pilot may know the want or lacke that hath beene in his nauigation. And because this altitude of the Sunne is a matter delicate and subtile as I haue sayd. In this fourth booke, I will treate therof as plainely as possible I can, shewing the rules by Text, and giuing thē their declaration & true vnderstanding, that they ought to haue. And likewise giuing to euery one an example and demonstration that they may bee the better vnderstood, and for this shalbe noted 17. fundamētal beginnings, which are these following.
- Altitude.
- Degree.
- Horizon.
- Zodiake.
- Equinoctiall line.
- Declination.
- Circles.
- Tropikes.
- Part of the North.
- Part of the South.
- Longitude.
- Latitude.
- Parelius.
- Meridian.
- Hemisphera.
- Zenith.
- Centrum.
Altitude is the degrees which the sūne or the [...]ole doe raise themselues aboue the Horizon. Likewise an altitude is vnderstood by those degrees, that anie citie, port, Iland, &c, are distant from the Equinoctiall line. A degree is one part of three hundreth and sixtie: wherein the world is deuided, it hath seuēteene Leagues and a half of way, by the longitude which is the length or bredth of the water and earth.
Horizon is a circle which wee doe imagine vpon the vppermost part of the earth: in the whiche our sight is fixed, which is as farre as our sight cāreach, and by this circle half the heauen is deuided which we see, from the other half which we see not.
Zodiake is a circle really scituated in the eight heauen, vnder the which the sunne mooueth it selfe in all the yeere. This Zodiake deuideth y e Equinoctiall line, into two equall partes: the one frō y e Equinoctial line by y e part of y e north, & the other by the part of the South, by euery part of these it hath 180. degrees, so that the Zodiake hath 360. degrees.
The Equinoctiall is a s [...]rcke or circle imagined by the halfe of the worlde frō the East into the West in equal distance from both the poles, so that from the Equinoctiall vnto euerye one of the poles are nientie degrees. It is called Equinoctiall, because the sunne passing by it causeth Equinoctio, whiche is as much to say, the day and the night to be equall.
Declination is the distance which the sunne by his owne mouing maketh frō the Equinoctial line, 6. monethes of the yeere to the North part, & 6. monethes to the South parte.
Circles are the waye whereby the poles of the Zodiake doe moue in roundnesse from the poles of the world. These doe take their names of the said poles: and so they are called circle Articke, and circle Antartike, these circles are distant of the saide poles of the worlde, 23. degrees, and 33. minutes.
Tropicos or Tropikes are 2. circles where y e sunne last of all doth come once in a yeere. One vnto the parte of the North, and the other vnto the parte of the South. It is called the Tropike of Tropos which is a greeke name, and is as much to say as conuersion, for the sunne being come to euery one of these Tropickes conuerteth her selfe and turneth backe.
The parte of the North is taken for halfe the worlde, whiche is from the Equinoctiall line vnto the Pole articke.
The parte of the South is the other halfe of the roundnesse of the worlde, which is from the Equinoctial line vnto the pole antartike.
Longitude or length, is vnderstood by the way from the East into the West, or from the West into the East, for that [Page 30] this is the length of the world.
Latitude or bredth is the way which is taken from the North to the South, which is frō one pole to y e other, for this is the bredth of the world.
Parelius is a way imagined to goe straight by the heauē, or by the Sea, or by▪ y e land, from the East into the West, or from the West into the East, with, outcomming neere to the Equinoctiall line, or to the poles more in one parte then in another.
The Meridiā is a line, which is imagined frō one pole of the world to the other, right ouer our heades, and when the sunne commeth to this line, it is the middest of the day vnto suche as inhabite vnder it.
Hemisphera is as muche to say, the halfe sphere▪ and it is to be vnderstood, that alt the worlde is one Sphera Esphera, and is taken for a rounde thing, and because the worlde is rounde, it is called Sphera, and seeing that in what place soeuer a man is, hee seeth the halfe of Heauen: This halfe of the Heauen, which wee see, we call Hemisphera.
Zenith is apoynt imagined in y e heauen very precisely put ouer our head, & frō this point or Zenith to any manner of place of our Horizon are 90. degrees.
Center is a point in the middest of the sphere imagined, & so in the middest y t from it to the superficie, al the lines that frō foorth right shalbe layde, shalbe equall: and from any part of the superficie to this point is to descend, and from it to the superficie is to rise vp.
The second Chapter, of the excellencies of the sunne, and of his moouings.
SAint Ambrose saieth▪ in the Exameron, that the sunne is the fountaine of light, the fairenesse of y e day, the ornamēt of heauen, the measure of time, the vertue and strength of all thinges which are borne, and according as the Philosopher saith, is cause of all generation and corruption. It is of a very great quantitie, so much that Ptholome saith in the Almagesto and Alfragano, in the difference 22. that the sunne in an hundreth sixtie & sixe times greater then the earth, his mouing is more swift then any arrow, and we doe not see him mooue by reason of his greate brightnesse which is of more strength to be seene, then our sight can see: And to our iudgement hee goeth by leasure. But the quātitie of y e way being knowen which he goeth, his lightnesse is innumerable: so y t for the greate distance that is from vs to him, we cānot determine his moouing. And it is to bee noted, that the sunne hath two moouings contrary, which are one forcible, and the other proper: the forcible mouing is it that we see that euery day he maketh a forcible going by the first moueable, & in euery 24. houres, hee goeth round about the world from the East into the West. The other mouing which is naturall, with proper to himselfe, woorketh contrary to the first, that is to be vnderstood from the West into y e East, in his circle Excentrico: the which moouing, he maketh in three hundreth sixtie and fiue dayes & sixe houres, & lesse a little quantity: And this mouing he maketh in this maner, from the eleuenth day of Marche, that the sunne passeth by the line Equinoctial vntil the eleuenth day of June, the sunne goeth rising vp, by the parte of the North, and so putting himselfe from the said line, the eleuenth day of June, he commeth to the tropike of Cancer, and in this rising vp that he maketh these three monethes hee departeth from the sayd line twenty three degrees and thirtie three minutes: which is his greatest declination, or distaunce that hee maketh from the fayde line; and from the twelfthe of June, vnto the thirteenth of September, the sunne descendeth from the sayde Tropike vnto the line: and from the fourteenth of September, vnto the thirteenth of December: the sunne [Page] descendeth by the parte of the South from the line to the Tropike of Capricorne, from whence he departeth other twentie three degrees, and thirtie three minutes, which is likewise his greatest declination of that parte: and from the fourteenth of December, vnto the tenth of Marche, the sunne goeth using vp from the Tropike of Capricorne vnto the line: so that of the twelf-monthes of the yeere, sixe of them, the sunne goeth from the line to the parte of the North, and the other sixe to the parte of the South. And all the moouinge which the sunne maketh, is from one Tropike to another: in the whiche are 47. degrees, and 6. minutes. This is the latitude of the Zona, whiche the auncient Writers called Torrida, which is as muche to saye, tosted, because alwayes the sunne maketh his moouing by her within these Tropikes, without going worth of them at anye time.
And it is to bee vnderstood, that the time which the sunne goeth towarde the parte of the North, and the time hee goeth towarde the parte of the South, Is not equall, for the sunne goeth towarde the parte of the North, a hundreth eightie and seuen dayes, and hee goeth towardes the parte of the South, a hundreth sixtie and eight: where it appeareth that the sunne goeth more time of the yeere vnto the parte of the North, then vnto the part of the South. The cause is, because this circle Excentrico: wherein the sunne maketh his moouing, is so shut into the Sphera, that of one parte hee commeth more neere to the firmament, then of the other, for the which cause be is described foorth of the Conter of the worlde.
The parte of this circle that commeth more neere to the firmament, is called auxe, which is as much to say eleuation, and this hee doth, when hee commeth to the tropike of Cancer, and that when he is most distant is called opposite of auxe, and this is when hee commeth to the Tropike of Capricorne: so that when the sunne is in Auxe, hee is more neere to the firmament; and when hee is in his opposite, hee is more neere to the earth, in suche sorte that in the Sommer the sunne goeth farre from the earth, and in the Winter, is more neere to the earth. This is to bee vnderstoode in respect of vs in the Winter [...] respect of suche as inhabite towardes the parts of the South in Sommer. The Cardinall Peter de Aliaco proueth, that aforesaid in the twelfth question, in the first article of the seconde notable, where hee sayeth that the sunne maketh his moouing, beeyng come to the ende of Gomini, is in the Auxe: of his Excentrieo, and in the ende of Sagitarius is in the opposite.
This seenteth by the demonstration that Ptholome putteth in the thirde distinction of the Almagesto. And seeing that the Center of the Excentrico of the sunne is distant from the Center of the worlde, by so muche when the sunne in his Auxe is more distaunt from the earth; and when hee is in the opposite, hee is more neere to it. And so it is prooued that the sunne is more neere to the earth in our Winter, then in Sommer.
The thirde Chapter, of the yeere called Solar, & other manner of yeeres, & how the leape yeere is reckoned.
THE yeere Solar is the time, wherein the sunne passeth y e twelue signes of the Zodiake, and returneth where hee begā. It is called a yeere, whiche is, as if one shoulde say, a ring, or circle, because the sunne hath gone his circle, he returneth to the same place where he began.
The Egyptians as S. Isidore saith, before they had y e knowledge of learning, they accustomed to figure the yeere in a dragon, that bitt the taile, but since they [Page 31] had learning and account of the yeere, they began it in September, because they say that in that moueth the world was made. And the Arabians beginne in the same time, the Hebrues beginne in the moneth of March, because it was geuen to them by lawe, wee begin it in I [...]nuarie, because then did our [...] yeere begin, which was the birth of the sonne of iustice, Christ our God. And because the sunne doth begin to come [...] vs, In the scripture I finde fiue sortes of yeeres. Anno Solet Anno Lun [...] Anno Emergence, Anno Grande, Anno Mundano. The yeere [...]ol [...] is it the therfore hath beene declared. The yeere Lunar is the time which doth containe twelue moones, of twentie niene daies and a halfe, which amounteth to th [...] hundreth fiftie foure d [...]es vnto the which is added the eleuen dayes of the concurrent, because the yeere Lunar which is of the moone may come with the Solar which is of the sunne. [...] yeere Emergente is when there happeneth, a thing very not [...]le, and in the time following is speech thereof, euen as they talked in the time of Caesar▪ [...]od now of the birth of our Lorde Jesus Christ. Anno Grande is as much to far, as a great yeere, according as the maister of the histories sayth, that it is a time of sixe hundred yeeres. Anno Mundano according to Macrobio, is when the Starres and all the Planets will come to the pointe of our degree where they began their first moouing. And this hee sayth shall bee in fifteene thousand yeres, likewise the other saith that it will come in fortie & niene thousand yeeres. But any manner of thing that the philosopher speaketh of in this matter, is according to his owne opinion, we ought to holde that the time and the moouing of the things and the end of them is in the hand of him that made them of nothing, and vnto men doth not appertaine to iudge nor determine of the time or ending of the world. For y e most high prouidēce of y e father eternall did put it in his owne bosome, as our redemer Jesus Christ teacheth vs, answering to such as asked him the saide question, as it is written in the Actes of the Apostles the first chapter, Therefore I say that the yeere called [...] hath three hundreth sixtie fiue [...]yes and sixe houres lacking twelue minutes giuing to euery houre sixtie minutes and because in the yere are accounted sixe whole houres of this hath come although the quantitie bee little, that it is no more but one fifth parte of an houre ins euery one yere, in so many number of yeeres they haue not made eleuen dayes of difference in the time, so that these sixe houres which are accoū ted in the yeere besides these sayd daies from foure to foure yeres doth amount to twentie foure [...]oures which maketh & natural day, and so this fourth yeere bath three hundreth sixtie sixe dayes and this is called the leape yeere, it is also called Bissiesto by the minutes which are as called Bises the which minutes the sun tarieth in euery one signe most then the thirty dayes Bissiesto is [...]oun [...] to say two times six, for because [...] of Bissiesto the day that is sixe dayes before the Kalendes of march is [...] so that in one onely letter of the Kalender there are two daies which are the twentie foure, and twentie [...] of Februarie, that is to saye the [...] which [...] the saide letter, and more the day whiche is encreased by the Bissiesto or leape yeere by the which the leape yeere in the moneth of February hath twentie nine dayes and the other yeeres twentie eyght.
Therefore it is to be seene, when the altitude of the sunne is taken to knowe his declination if it be a leape yeere, or [...], the seconde, or the thirde after the leape yeere as is plainely to bee founde in the seuenteene Chapter, which treateth of the declination, and according to the yeere, so must the declination of the Sunne bee sought for.
The fourth Chapter, what thing a shadow is, & how the shadow which the sunne maketh ought to be looked on, for to take his altitude.
[Page] THe shadowes are caused when any darke body is opposite to the light, and so the shadow hath an apparance or shewe of a body, and it is none The shadowe flyeth away from such as followe it, and followeth such as flye from it. The shadow by how much the sunne is higher, by so muche it is lesser, and how much the lower, the greater: whereby the shadow of a man is greater in the morning and in the euening, then at the middest of the day, and it is to be noted, y t the sun goeth alwaies is one of these 3 places, which is toward the part of the north, or in the equinoctiall, or towardes the part of the south: & in these three partes to such as inhabit in the world it maketh 5 shadowes: (That is to saye,) a shadow at the east, a shadow at the west, a shadow at the north, a shadow at y e south, & a straight shadow. The shadow at the east, is when the sunne doth set. The shadowe at the west is when the sunne riseth.
The shadowe at north is when the sunne commeth to the middest of the day, and he that maketh the shadow is more towardes the north then the sun. And the shadow at south is when he that maketh the shadowe is more towardes the south then the sunne there is likewise a straight shadowe, when the sunne is in our Zen [...] Al these shadowes, such as dwel within y e tropikes haue. Those which inhabite vnder the tropikes, haue 4 shadowes, (that is to say) shadow at east shadow at west and those of y e tropike of Cancer, haue y e shadow at north and those of the tropike of Capricorne haue the shadowe at south: and once in the yere a straight shadow, which is when the sunne entreth into that tropike. Such as dwel without y e tropikes haue three shadowes, at east, and at west, and those of the parte of the north, haue shadowe at north, and those of the parte of the south, haue shadowe at south, and neuer any straight shadowe. But do you note, y t although the sunne doth make in the yeere fiue shadowes to such as dwell in the world not onely in fiue partes, but in xiii. differēces of parts, you may be with y e sunn and haue xiii. differences of shadowes, and no more, (that is to say) fiue when the sunne goeth towardes the parte of the north, and three when hee is in the line, and fiue when he is towardes y e part of the south, y e which by xiii. rules with their demonstratiōs shalbe noted in this manner.
VVhen the Sunne is towardes the north.
The Sunne being towardes the north, if the shadowes be towardees the north, you are more towardes the north then the Sunne, and the Sunne betweene you and the line.
The Sunne towardes the north, if the shadowes be to no parte, then are you towards the north as farre from the line as the Sunne.
The Sunne towardes the north, if the shadowes be towards the south, you may be towardes the north betweene the Sunne & the line.
[Page] The Sunne towardes the north, and the shadowes going towards the south you may be in the Equinoctiall line.
The Sunne towards the north, and the shadowes going towardes the south you may be towardes the parte of the south, and the line betweene you and the Sunne.
When the Sunne is in the Equinoctiall Line.
The Sunne in the Equinoctiall if the shadowes be towardes the north, you are towardes the part of the north.
[Page 33] The Sunne in the equinoctiall, if the shadowes be straight you are in the equinoctiall.
The Sunne in the Equinoctiall, if the shadowes be towardes the south you are towardes the part of the south.
When the Sunne is towardes the south.
The Sunne towardes the south, if the shadowes be towardes the south you are towardes the south, and the sunne is betweene you and the line.
[Page] The sunne at the south if the shadowes bee straight you are towardes the south as farre from the line as the sunne.
The sun at south if the shadowes be towards the north you may be towardes the south beetweene the sunne and the line.
The Sunne towardes the south, and the shadowes going towardes the north you may be in the Equinoctiall.
[Page 34] The sunne towardes the south, and the shadowes towardes the north you may be towardes the north, & the line betweene you and the sunne.
The fifth chapter, wherein is declared what thing the height of the sunne is, and how it ought to bee taken to knowe the place where a man is.
SEing there hath beene declared the difference of shadowes which the sunne maketh, or maye make by all the yeere in any manner of place that a man is, y e which shadows are necessary to be knowne. For to knowe precisely how to take the altitude of the sunne, I will speake, what thing the altitude of the sunne is, and the manner that must be had, for to take it well. For this is to bee noted, that Ptholomie saieth in the firste of Geographia, that wheresoeuer a man is, hee seeth halfe the heauen and the other halfe is hid from him, in such sort that of three hundreth and sixtie degrees that the heauen hath in roundnes wee alwaies see the hundreth and foure score which is the halfe wherein is contayned our Hemispherio, so that wheresouer a man is, and in any manner of time, from his heade or Cenith, vnto the horizon are ninetie degrees, and so from what place that a man is in euen vnto the sunne, when he riseth in the morning, that hee doe begin to appeare in the horizon are ninetie degrees, and how much more the day goeth forwarde, and the sunne goeth rising, so much more he commeth neerer towardes our Cenith. And this rising vp that the sunne maketh, is called the altitude of the sunne, because he goeth rising, and going vp vppon the horizon, the which altitude he that shall take him at the middest of the day, let him vnderstande that the degrees that he shall finde in his Astrolabio, lesse then ninetie, those should be from him to the sunne, for that the sunne shall be so many distant from his Cenith, which is from the right of his heade. Therefore I say to know the altitude that y e sunne hath euery day vpon the horizon which the pilot or any otherpersō that would take it, ought, first of all to looke on syue thinges which are these following.
The first, that it be taken in the middest of the day.
The second, that hee see to whiche parte of the line, the sunne goeth that day.
The third, to what part the shadows goe.
The fourth, what declination the sun hath.
The fifth, that he knowe how to applye the rule that is conuenient according to the time and place wherein he findeth himselfe. Vnto the first I say, y t the altitude of the sunne ought to be taken at the middest of the day iustly, this is because vntill the sunne commeth to the Meridiā he goeth alwaies rising aboue the Horizon, and if hee bee taken before or after hee wil not bee so [Page] iustly taken, but although that in this be some difference of time being but a little thing before or after, it is no great inconuenience, because the most times it cannot be punctually knowne whē he commeth to the Meridian. Although you looke on the clock, the Astrolabio, or any other instrumēt, but alwaies doe you procure to take him at the houre aforesaide.
To the second, it ought to bee seene at what parte of the line, the sunne goeth, if it be at the north or at the south, considering that the time, which the sun goeth to the part of the north, is frō the eleuenth of March vnto the thirteenth of September, and from the fourteenth of September vnto the tēth of March hee goeth to the parte of the south.
Vnto the thirde, he that taketh the altitude ought to see to what parte the shadowes are from him, (that is to say) the shadow of his person, or of the maste of his ship, or of any other thing y t is put vpright. And so by the shadowe hee shall knowe at which parte of the line hee is, for being knowne to which parte the sunne goeth, it may be easily known by the sayde shadowe, towardes what parte he is of, as in the fourth chapter hath beene declared.
To the fourth, the yeere ought to be looked vnto, if it be a leape yeere, or the first, the second, or third yeere after the leape yeere, and according as the yeere is, let him looke on the moneth, and day wherein he is: and what declination the sunne hath towardes the parte where he goeth, that is how many degrees and minutes hee is distant from the sayde line.
To the fifth, y t hee apply euery rule of y e altitude in his proper time and place, and this the pilot ought alwais to procure and knowe the rules of the altitude, not onely the woordes but the meaning of them for he that onely knoweth the rule, and doth not attaine to the reason or foundation thereof, as it ought to be vnderstoode, it procureth to him many harmes, and hee knoweth not of what they proceede, and finding him selfe in the errour he putteth faulte in the instrumentes and rules, the fault being in him selfe, because he vnderstandeth them not.
And because these rules of the altitude of the sunne may bee well vnderstoode, and that their shoulde be no ignorance in any thing, here shal be put euery one with his declaration, figure, and example, in manner following.
The first rule, when the Sunne goeth towarde the parte of the north, and the shadowes goes towardes the north.
THE Sunne towardes the parte of the North, if the shadowes be towardes the North you bee towards the north, and the Sun is betweene you and the line, see howe many degrees you tooke of altitude and how many doth lacke of ninetie, and with those whiche lacke, ioyne the declination of that day, and all ioyned together you are distant from the line towardes the north.
This first rule doth shewe how you shall knowe the altitude of the sunne, when he goeth towardes the north, and hee that taketh the altitude is more towardes the north then y e sunne, and so he sayth.
The Sunne towardes the parte of the North, is as muche to say, that when you doe take the altitude of the Sunne in any day of the sixe monethes, that he goeth from the line vnto the parte of the north.
If the shadowes bee towardes the North, if in this daye that you take the altitude of the Sunne the shadowes bee from you towardes the north.
You are towardes the North and the Sunne is betweene you and the line, in such sorte that by the shadowes you doe know that the Sunne is between you and the line, at such time as when they are in this manner.
Beholde how many degrees you take of altitude, these degrees are those that you take the sunne in your Astrolabio, therfore looke on these degrees howe many they are.
[Page 35] And how many lacketh for nientie, is to be vnderstood vpō those that you found of Astrolabio, looke how many they are, which doe lacke for to come to nientie, And with those whiche lacke, as if you had taken fiftie, there lacke fortye: and if you had taken 65. there lacke 25. Therfore with those forty, or twenty, or more or lesse, Ioyne the declination of that day, which are those degrees & minutes which y e sunne is distant frō the line, as you shall finde in the declination of the sayd day, And all put together, that is to say, the declination of y e sunne, & the degrees which lacke for nienty, and that which this shall summe or amoūt vnto, you are distaunt from the line towardes the North.
An Example.
The sixte day of April, I taking the altitude of the sunne, the shadowes were from mee towardes the North, and I tooke the sunne in sixtie degrees of Astrolabio, there lacked 30. for 90. with these 30. I ioyned 10. degrees, which the Sunne had this day of declination, whiche did amounte to fortie degrees, so much was I distant frō the line towards the part of y e North. The reason is, for because in the moneth of Aprill, the sunne goeth towardes the part of the North, & as the shadowes were from me towardes the North, I knewe that I was more towardes the North, then the sunne, therefore the sunne beyng taken in sixtie degrees, the thirtie which lacked for nientie, was I distant of the sunne.
This is because alwaies, when that I shall take the altitude of the sunne, those degrees that I shall finde in my Astrolabio, lesse then nientie, the selfe same am I distant from the sunne, and the same day, the sunne was distant from the line, ten degrees, which was his declination, so that from mee to the sunne, were thirtie degrees, & from the sunne to the liue, tenne whiche make fortie: so much was I distaunt from the sayde line.
The seconde rule, that when the sunne is towardes the North, and the shadowes towardes the South, the declination and altitude are more then nientie degrees.
IF the sunne be towards the North, and the shadowes bee towardes the south, ioyne the declination with the altitude, and if they passe nientie degrees, those which are more, you are distant from the line towardes the North, and you are betweene the sunne and the line.
In the firste rule hath been declared that when the sunne is towardes the part of the North, & hee that taketh the altitude is more towardes the North then the sunne whereby the shadowes goe frō him towardes the North. This rule is, when the sunne goeth towards the selfsame parte of the North, and he which taketh the altitude, y e shadowes goe from him towardes the South in this manner. The sunne towardes the North, the time which the sunne goeth towards the North, hath beene declared. Therefore in this time, If the shadowes be towards the south, the south ioyneth the declinatiō with the altitude, which is as much to say, looke on the degrees and minutes, that this day hath of declination, and ioyne them with the degrees, that you take the sunne in your Astrolabio, and if they doe passe of nientie degrees, if altogether the declination of the sunne, and the altitude whiche you tooke, were more then nientie degrees.
Those which were more, you are distant from the line towards the North. It is to be vnderstood, that if the altitude and declination were nienetie fiue degrees, you are distant of the line, fiue degrees: and if they were an hundreth, you were distant tenne degrees: and so are to bee reckoned those whiche are more then nientie.
And then are you betweene the sunne and the line. The which you shall know because the shadowes goe frō you towardes the South, and because the altitude & dedination did passe of nienetie degrees.
An Example.
The twenty day of May, I tooke the sunne in 80. degrees, this day hee had of declinatiō twentie and one degrees, I ioyned the declination and the altitude, & they amounted to an hundreth and one degrees, so that they be eleuen degrees more then nienetie. These eleuen was I distaunt from the line towardes the North, betweene the sunne & the line, y e reason is, because this day y e sunne was distaunt of the line, 21. degrees: which was his declination towardes the part of the North: so that I hauing taken the sunne in fourescore degrees, there was from me to the sunne, tenne degrees, and as I am betweene the sunne and the line, I beeyng tenne degrees distaūt frō the sunne towards the line, there was from mee to the line eleuen degrees, which lacketh for the twentie one, which is the declination of the sunne.
The third rule, when the sunne is towardes the North, and the shadowes towardes the South, and the declination, and altitude, are nienety degrees iust.
THE sunne towardes the North and the shadowes towardes the South, if ioyning the altitude and declination, they be nienety degrees, you are vnder the Equinoctiall line.
Hee that taketh the altitude in the time that the sunne goeth towards the North in one of three partes, hee may stande that the shadowes may be from him towardes the South, The first is when he is betweene the sunne and the line, and this hath beene already declared in the rule, before this. The second is, the sunne being towardes the North and hee that taketh the altitude in the selfe same line. The thirde is, the sunne beeyng towardes the North, and hee that taketh the altitude towardes the parte of the South, therefore of the seconde, which is, the man beeing in the line, the rule saith,
The sunne at the North parte if the shadowes goe towardes the South, ioyne the declination with the altitude.
It is to bee noted, that alwayes when the sunne goeth to one parte, and the shadowes to an other, the declination is to bee ioyned with the altitude, And if they be nientie degrees iust. Euen like if there were seuentie degrees of altitude and 20. of declination, or eightie of altitude and tenne of declination, or any other number, wherin the altitude and declination be nientie degrees iust, when it is so: you are vnder the Equinoctiall liue.
An Example.
The 11. day of Iuly I tooke the sunne in my Astrolabio, in 68. degrees, there was this daye of declination, 22. degrees, ioyne the altitude & declination, and they amounted to nientie degrees, then was I vnder the Equinoctiall line.
The reason is, because the sunne was towardes the parte of the North, and the shadowes going from me towardes the South, I was more towardes the South, then the sunne, there, fore taking sixtie eight degrees of altitude, I was distant from the sunne twentie two degrees, and this day had the sunne twētie two degrees of declination, so that the sunne was distant from the line twentie two degrees, and I distant from the sunne towardes the line, the saide twentie two degrees, by the which I knewe that I was vnder the said line. For by how much the sūne was distant from the line, so much was I distant of the sunne from the sayde line.
The fourth rule when the sunne is towardes the North, & the shadowes towardes the south, and the altitude and declination doe not amounte to nienetie degrees.
THe sunne at North and the shadowes at south, if ioyning the altitude and declination, they come not to nientie degrees, those that doe lack for nientie, you are distant of the line towardes the parte of the south, and the line wilbe betweene you and the sunne.
It hath beene declared that when the sunne goeth towardes the part of the North, if the shadowes goe from him that taketh the altitude towardes the [Page 37] South, he may be in one of these three places, y t is to say, towards the North, betweene the sunne and the line, and in the sayde line, and at the parte of the South, the line beeing betweene him and the Sunne, for in any parte of these that a mā is, the sūne going towardes y e North part, alwayes at the middest of the day, the shadowes will goe towardes the South, of these three, two haue beene declared, of the thirde this rule speaketh.
The sunne towards the North, if the shadowes be towards the South, and ioyning the altitude and declination, if they come not to nientie degrees.
If the altitude which you haue taken in the Astrolabio, were fiftie or sixtie degrees, and the declination fifteene or twentie, so that all being put together, come not to nienetie.
Those whiche doe lacke for nienetie, you are distaunt from the line towardes the South.
So that those Degrees and Minutes fewe or many, that bee lesse then nienetye, You are distaunt of the lyne, towardes the parte of the South, & then The line wilbee betweene you and the Sunne.
An Example.
The tenth of August, taking the altitude, the shadowe was from mee towardes the South: I tooke the sunne in the Astrolabio, in seuentie degrees. This day hee had of declination twelue degrees: I ioyned the altitude and declination, and they amounted to eightie and two degrees, there lacked eight degrees for nientie, these eight degrees was I distaunt from the line towardes the part of the South. The reason is, that taking the Sunne in seuentie degrees, there was from mee to the Sunne, twentie degrees, and this day the Sunne was distaunt from the line, twelue degrees: which was his declination towardes the parte of the North: so that the eight which lacketh for twentie, was I distaunt of the line towards the part of the South, so that from mee to the line was eight degrees, and from the line to the Sunne twelue, these bee the twentie which were from me to the Sunne.
The fifth rule, when the sunne is in the Equinoctiall, and you take his altitude in lesse then ninetie degrees.
WHen the sunne is in the Equinoctiall, if you take his altitude in lesse then ninetie degrees, those whiche are lesse then ninety, you are distant from the line towardes that part which the shadowes are from you.
There hath beene declared the rules of the altitude of the sunne, when he goeth towardes the parte of the North: nowe this rule serueth for the dayes of the yeere, that the sunne is in the Equinoctiall line, and sayeth, when the sunne is in the Equinoctiall line.
The sunne is in the Equinoctiall, the eleuenth of March, & thirteenth of September, so that in any of these dayes, If you take his altitude in lesse then ninetie degrees, so that if you take it in 75. whiche are lesse by fifteene then ninetie, or in eightie or more or lesse:
Those which you take lesse then ninetie, These fifteene, or tenne, or fiue, or as many as are lesse then nientie, you are distant from the line vnto the parte whiche the shadowes doc fall from you.
So that if the shadowes goe from you towards the North, those degrees which you finde lesse then ninetie, you are distant from the line towardes the part of the North, and if the shadowes goe from you towards the South, the same degrees you shall finde your selfe towardes the South.
An Example.
The 11. of March I tooke the sunne in eightie degrees, the shadowes were from mee towardes the North, [Page 38] this day the sunne hath no degree of declinatiō, therfore the 10. degrees, which I tooke lesse thē ninetie, I was distant from the sunne. The reason is, because y e sunne was in the line, the same degrees that I was distant from the sunne, the selfesame am I from the line, & because the shadowes went from me towardes the North, was I towards the part of the North, the which if they had gone from me towards the South, the selfesame degrees should I haue been towards the part of the South.
The sixt rule, when the altitude is taken in nientie degrees, whether in the sunne be a declination o [...] no.
VVHen you shall take the altitude of the sunne in nienety degrees, the sunne is ouer your heade, looke vpon the declination of this day, & if there bee no declination, you and the sunne be in the line, & if there be any declination, that which is, you are distant from the line, towards that part which the sunne goeth.
This rule declareth how the altitude of the sunne shoulde bee knowen, when he that taketh him, hath him in the Cenith, or poynte that is right ouer his head, the which rule hath two partes, that is to say, one, when the sunne is in the Equinoctiall line, & the other when it is foorth of it, of the first it speaketh.
When you doe take the altitude of the sunne in nientie degrees. It is to be vnderstood, that the measurer of the worlde, sheweth in your Astrolabio, the nientie degrees iust, when it is so. Knowe yee that the sunne is right ouer your head:
In such sort, that your shadow shall not goe to any part, therfore thē Looke on the declination of this day:
Is to bee vnderstood the degrees and minutes, which the sunne is distant frō the Equinoctial.
And if there be no declination, Which [Page] will be the eleuenth of Marche, and the thirteenth of September, thē the declination is of few minutes.
You and the sunne be in the line, the sunne beingin the [...]ne then he hath no degrete nor halfe a degree of declination, and you are in the line, seeing that you are vnder the sunne.
And if there be any declination: This is the second part of this rule, wherein is declared, when the sunne, and he that taketh the altitude be out of the Equinectiall, the which will bee knowne in the degrees, that the sunne hath of declination, because it saith, that which is, is to be vnderstood few degrees, or many. So much you are distant from the line so that seesyng you are vnder the sunne, and the sunne is distaunt from the line, that the same degrees & minutes, that the sunne hath of declination, the same you are distaunt from the line, towards the part where the sunne goeth.
If it bee that the sunne goeth to the North part, you are toward the North part, & if he goe towardes the South, you are towarde the same parte of the South, and because with this that is declared, this rule may be well vnderstood, there is put in it no more declaration.
The seuenth rule, when the sunne is towards the part of the South, and the shadowes goe likewise towards the South.
THe sūne towards the part of the south, and the shadowes towards the South, the sunne is between you and the line, looke how many degrees of altitude, you tooke, and how many doe lacke for nientie, and with those that lacke, ioyne the declinacion of this day, and beeing altogether the degrees that be, you are distaunt frō the line, towardes the South.
This rule is, when the sunne is towards the part of the South, and the shadowes goe towardes the South, is agreeable with the first rule, which was declared whē the sūne goeth towards the part of the North, and because it is declared according to his proper meaning, & this is agreeable to that, there shall not be put here any other declaration, but the same that is there declared, is to be vnderstood in this. Onely making difference of the names, that is to say, from the North to the South, but because this rule is for y e time when the sunne goeth towardes the South, I wil put an example of the part of the South, in the manner following.
An Example.
The fourth of October, taking the altitude, y e shadowes went from me towards the South, and I tooke the sunne in 85. degrees in my Astrolabio, this day y e sun had 8. degrees of declinatiō towards the south, therefore taking the altitude in 85. degrees, there lacketh siue, for nienetie, these fiue was I distaunt from the sunne, and with these fiue, I ioyned the eight of declination, they amounted to thirteene degrees, these thirteene degrees was I distaunt from the line, because from mee to the sunne was fiue, and from the Sunne to the line eight, which are thirteene, so that I was distaunt thirteene degrees from the line towardes the parte of the South.
The eyght rule, when the sunne is towardes the nouth, and the shadowes towardes the [...]orth, and the declination and altitude are more then ninetie degrees.
THe Sunne towardes the south, if the shadowes be towards the north, ioyne the declination with the altitude, and altogether if they passe of nientie degrees, those which are more, you are distant of the line towards the south, and you are between the sunne and the line.
This rule is declared in the seconde rule before written when the sunne goeth towards the north parte, for the same account or reckoning that is made the sunne beeing towardes the north and he that taketh the altitude at the same parte of the north, betweene the sunne and the line, the selfe same is to be done, the sunne beeing towardes the part of the south, and hee which taketh the altitude in the same part betweene the sunne and the line.
Therfore y e declaration which is writtē for the one, by the selfe same fourme serueth for the other, and to know that he which taketh the altitude is betweene the sunne and the line, the rule declareth in what altitude and declination, they shoulde passe of nienty degrees, as it is shewed in this example.
An Example.
The xiii. of Ianuary I tooke the sun in seuentie eyght degrees, this day hee had of declination nienteene degrees, I ioyned the declination and altitude as the rule sheweth and did amount to nientie and seuen degrees, these seuen, degrees y t past of nienty, was I distant frō the line towards the south. The reason is, that taking the sunne in seuentie & eight degreees, I was distāt from y e sunne xii. degrees, & seeing that y e sunne was distāt from the line ri [...]. degrees, & I being between the sunne & the line, therfore there are frō me to the sunne xii degrees, & frō me to the line seuē which are nienteene, so many are the degrees which the sunne is distant of the line.
The nienth rule, when the Sunne is at the south, and the shadowes at north, and the altitude and declination are nientie degrees iust.
THE Sunne at south and the shadowes at north if ioyning the altitude and declination they bee nientie degrees, you are in the equinoctiall line.
It hath beene declared that y e sunne being at north, he which taketh the altitude, may be in one of 3 partes wherby his shadowes, may goe towardes the south one of them is towardes the parte of the north, betweene the sunne and the l [...]n [...]e, another in the sayd line, the other towardes the parte of the south▪ the line betweene him and the sunne▪ the same is vnderstood the sunne going towardes the parte of the south, that hee whiche toketh the altitude in one of three partes, he may be that the shadowes goe from him towardes the north, the one being towarde the parte of the south betweene the sunne and y t line, the other being in the saide line. The thirde being towardes the part of the north the line betweene him and the sunne.
Seeing of the first it hath beene written of, and in the rule going before, of the second, which is the sunne being towardes the parte of the south, & for him which taketh the altitude in the line is put this present rule, the which because in the third rule when the sunne goeth towarde the parte of the north, it is declared. Only here is to be noted, the example following.
An example.
The seconde of December I tooke the sunne in sixtie seuen degrees, this day he had of declination twentie three degrees, ioyne the declination, and the altitude they amounted to nientie degrees, and being so I was in the equinoctiall, for because the sunne at south, the shadowes going from me towards [Page 40] the north, I was more towardes the north then the sunne, the sunne this day was distant of the line twentie three degrees which was his declination, so that taking the altitude in sixtie seuen degrees, there was from me to the sun twenty three degrees, in such sorte that the same twentie three degrees which the sunne was distant of the line, the same was I distant of the sun towards the line, so thereby I knew that I was in the saide line.
The tenth rule, when the Sunne is towardes the South, and the shadowes towardes the North, if the Altitude and declination beeing ioyned, they come not to nientie degrees.
THe Sunne at South, and the shadowes at North, if the altitude and declination doe not come to ninetie degrees, those which doe lacke for [...] you are distant of the line towarde [...] the parte of the north, and the line should be betweene you and the Sunne.
The thirde difference which hath beene spoken of, wherein hee which taketh the altitude, may bee the sunne beeing towardes the South, and the shadowes going towardes the North, is, beeing towardes the parte of the North, the line betweene him and the Sunne, as this rule sheweth, whose declaration is written in the fourth rule, when the Sunne goeth towardes the parte of the North. And it is to lie noted, that at all times whē y e sunne goeth towards one part, & [Page] the shadowes towardes another, the declination is to be ioyned with the altitude, and if they passe nientie degrees, those which are more, you are distant of the line, towardes the parte which the sunne goeth and if they bee nientie iust, you shoulde be in the line, and if they come not to nientie, those which are lesse you are distant at the contrary parte where the sunne goeth, as in this rule is declared, and therefore in this example following is to be noted.
An Example.
The thirtie of Septēber I tooke the sunne in sixtie degrees, and the shadowes were from me towardes the north, and the sunne this daye had sixe degrees and a halfe of declination, I ioyned the declination and the altitude, and they amounted to sixtie and sixe degrees and a halfe, there lacked twentie three degrees and a half for nientie. These twenty three degrees and a halfe was I distant from the line towardes the parte of the north. The reason is, for that taking the sunne in sixtie degrees there was from me to the sunne thirtie. I was towardes the part of the north, and the sunne towardes the part of the south distant from the line, sixe degrees & a halfe, so that of the thirtie degrees, which were from me to the sunne, taking out the sixe and a halfe which the sunne is distāt from the line, there will be from me to the line twenty three degrees and a halfe.
The sixt chapter, wherefore the rules of the height of the sunne doe shewe the degrees that a man is distant of the equinoctiall line more then by any other parte.
IN the rules before written hath beene declared how that euery day that you wil take the altitude of the sunne, you shall knowe at what parte of the line you are, and how many degrees distant as wel of the one part as of the other.
[Page 41] Of this may be [...] what the cause is, wherefore all the rul [...]s of the [...] tude of the sunne, are made and ord [...] ned that a man should vnderstand how many degrees he is distant of the equinoctiall line, more then from the pole, or from the other tropikes or from any other parte.
To this is to bee answered, that the reason whereby onely we would know the distance, that is from the sayd line, more then from any other parte, is, because the sayde equinoctiall line, as before hath beene declared, is put and [...] tuated in the middest of the worlde, and all the cardes of nauigation whereby the pilots & sailers doe rule themselues by. In the card of nauigation a [...] ordayned and put the portes, and bayes, riuers, capes, Ilandes, and shooldes, & all other thinges, which are marked in thē, according to the degrees that euery thing is distant from the sayd equinoctiall line, as wel towardes the part of the north, as of the south: and beeing knowne by the pilot or sayler, with the altitude which he taketh, howe many degreees he is distant of the sayde line, to one parte or to another, or if he bee in the sayde line, likewise he knoweth if he be equall in altitude with y e place which hee goeth to seeke according as in his carde he hath pricked, or if he ought to rise vp or goe downe, and how many degrees, vntill he put him selfe right of the place, and for this cause the line is more sought for, then any other parte.
The seuenth chapter, by what reason al rules of the altitude of the sunne are reduced to nienty degrees, more then to any other number.
IT may be asked by what reason all the rules of y e altitude of the sunne, as before hath beene declared goe reduced to this nūber of nientie degrees, more then to any other, for that it is so written, that the degrees of altitude are to be seene, wherein the sunne is taken in the Astrolabio, how many doe lacke, vnto nientie and in other rules is sayde that the altitude and declination is to be ioyned and seene if they amount to nientie degrees, or if they passe nientie degrees, or if they come not to nienty degrees, in such sorte, that all the rules are made and ordained to this number of nienty, therfore it ought to be known wherfore more to this number thē to any other. For the vnderstanding of this doubt is to be immagined that wheresoeuer a man standeth is the middest of the worlde, and he seeth half the heauen, in such sort, that as the roundnes of y e worlde hath three hundreth & sixtie degrees, the horizon discouereth y e half which are a hundreth and eyghtie, and they are vnderstoode in this manner▪ from any manner of part of the horizō vnto y e Cenith are nienty degrees, and from my Cenith vnto the other part of the horizon other nientie. Which is to be vnderstoode in this manner, immagine that in what place so euer a man is in, he is right in the middest of this circle, which circle is his horizon.
Therefore I saye that I am in the middest of the circle, and from the point A. which is the horizon vnto my heade are nientie degrees, and from my Cenith to the point C. other nientie, which are a hundreth and eyghtie, and from the point B. vnto my heade nientie, and from my heade vnto the pointe D. other nientie, and so there is nientie degrees from my heade to any parte of my horizon. Therefore declaring the doubt, I say that the reason why the rules of the [Page] altitude of the Sunne are reduced to this number of nientie, is because the Sunne cannot rise vp aboue the horizon, more then nientie degrees, which is vntill he come right ouer our heads, and so when we take him in nientie degrees of Astrolabio, wee saye that wee haue the sunne right ouer our heades, & when we take him in lesse, that which is lesse then nientie is the sunne distant from vs: so that because the sunne cannot rise vp, vpon the horizon more then nientie degrees, with the which as I haue saide, he commeth vntill he be vpon our heads: therefore the rules of his altitude goe reduced to this number, and not to any other.
The eight Chapter, wherein is declared wherefore we saie, that the man is distant of the sunne, the degrees that he taketh in the Astrolabio lesse then nientie.
OF the rules of the altitude of the Sunne before written, hath been sayde, and declared, that at all tymes when the Altitude is taken, the degrees are to bee looked for which doe lacke in the Astrolabio of nientie, and that those same, the man is distante of the Sunne. And beecause it is conuenient and expedient that this rule bee well and throughly vnderstoode and knowne, I will most euidently declare it, in this manner following.
It is to bee noted, when the Sunne doth beginne to appeare by our horizon which is, when he goeth foorth in the morning, then he hath no Altitude but from thence hee goeth rising vp, and howe much more hee ryseth, so much he goeth hauing more Altitude, vpon y e Horizon, in such sort that if one houre after he is come forth, hee hath raysed him selfe vp fiue degrees, in two houres hee shall haue raysed him selfe vp tenne or twelue, and in three houres [...] vp vn [...] the myddist the daye, and from of thence hee t [...]eth to desc [...] by the [...] order that hee went risy [...]g vp, vntyll hee put or hyde him selfe vnder the horizon. Of that which hath beene sayde, two thinges are to bee noted, the fyrst is, that from the time the Sunne [...] foorth, vntyl it be the middest of the day, he goeth alwayes rising vp, and aug [...]nting in his [...], vntyll hee come to [...], Meridian, and alwayee the Meridian is in the middest of the bow, which the Sunne maketh, from the time that hee commeth foorth vntill hee is sette▪ This is because alwayes the man is in the middest of the roundnes, which roundnes is his horizon.
The seconde is, that this Bowe which the Sunne maketh vppon our horizon, is not euery day equall, but at some times is greater then at other some, euen as the daye is great or litle, but although that the bowe bee great or little, alwayes the Sunne goeth rising vp, vntill he come to the Meridian, and from thence hee descendeth. And it is to be noted, that alwayes the Sunne commeth forth, and setteth in equall distance from vs, but at the middest of the day, he is not alwaies in equal distance of vs, but at one time hee is neere, and at another time farre off, this is from the right of our heads, which is to be vnderstood in this manner. I put the case that I bee distant from the equinoctiall line tenne degrees, and the Sunne hath of declination the same daye the same tenne degrees, towards the part that I am, and beeing so, when the Sunne came foorth this daye, and beganne to appeare in the horizon, then hee was from mee nientie degrees, and from thence hee went rysing vp vntyll the middest of the day, and beeing come to my Meridian, hee shall bee precisely right ouer my head.
Insomuch that if a lyne be imagined▪ that rightly doth descende frō the Sun [Page 42] vnto the earth, this line woulde come vpon my head, and this woulde bee so at all times, when I were as distant of the line, as the declination is, which the sunne hath this day, because I am in that way where the Sunne that day doth make his moouing, by the which that day at the middest of the day, I shall haue it vpon my head: but if I be distant of the waye of the sunue, although that when he came foorth, hee was from me ninety degrees, it is to be vnderstood, that when it is the middest of the day, I shall not haue it right ouer my head, but I shal haue it as farre of, as the distance is frō the place, where I am, to y e place of the way of the sūne, in such sort that if the distance, which is of the place or way, where I am, to the place or way where the Sunne came foorth, were fiue degrees, or tenne, or more, or lesse: Those same the Sunne shalbe at the middest of the day distant from y e right of my head, so that, if there were layd two straight lines or strekes, from the East into the West, the one by the place where the Sunne commeth foorth, and the other by the place where I am: the degrees of distance y t shoulde be from one line to the other, the selfesame at the middest of the day, wilbe of distance of the Sunne to my Cenith. And doe you note, that in this distance, which the Sunne maketh from mee is not to bee looked, howe muche there is from mee to the Sunne, but doe you looke how much the Sunne is distant at the middest of the day, from the right of my head, for so much as this distance is, so muche will I say, that I am distant of the Sunne, to one parte or other.
The nienth Chapter, wherein is declared, howe it is vnderstoode, that a man hath the Sunne right ouer his head.
IT hath beene declared in the Chapter going before, that when a man findeth himselfe in the course where y e sun maketh his way, that that day at the middest of the day, he shall haue him right ouer his heade, of this maye bee had a greate doubt, (whiche is this.)
A doubt.
It hath beene declared in the seconde Chapter of this fourth Booke, according to the opinion of Ptholome, and Al [...]rag [...]no, that the Sunne is an hundreth sixtie and sixe times greater then the earth: and that the Sunne is so great, it appeareth well, seeyng that continually hee geueth light to all the starres of the heauen, the heauen beeing so greate, and the starres so many in nūber, as the royall prophet saith, that God only doth reckon and number them. Likewise the greatnesse of the Sunne doth shewe, in the which, although that there bee alwayes put all the roundnesse of the water and earth betweene the Sunne and the Heauen in such sort, that continually, he putteth himselfe before, according to the sight of man, whereby wee see not anie more then halfe the heauen: and although the earth and the water are so great bodies, yet they occupie not anye thing, nor deteyne the light of the Sunne, that it doe not passe to geue light to all the starres. This is because the earth and water are so little things in respect of the sunne, that well neere they maye bee compared to a graine of mustard seed, put before a great torche lighted, which doth let nothing of the light thereof, but that it doth extende to all partes. Therefore all the earth beeyng so little in comparison of the Sunne, and the man beeyng well neere of no quantitie in respecte of all the earth, it seemeth to be farre out of reason, to say that a man shoulde haue the Sunne right ouer his head in anye time or place, euen as there shoulde bee no reason to saye, that a greate shippe going by the Sea, may bee right vppon the poynte of a little nayle, [Page] which were in the depth of the water: or that a great cloude shoulde be right vpon a little worme of the earth, euen as wel it seemeth, that there is no reasō to say, that the sunne is right ouer the heade of a man: seeing that the sunne is alwayes, and sheweth it selfe vpon the halfe of all the earth, by the which reason likewise it seemeth, that it ought not to be thought, that the sunne in one time is in the Equinoctial, and another time at the North part, and another at the South parte, seeing that these are partes of the earth, and the sunne not only is greater then these parts, but in very great quantity, greater then all of them, as it is saide, and so it is prooued & seemeth that it is an improper thing, to say that the sunne is right vpon our head, or that he is in one parte or other of the earth.
A declaration.
For the declaring of this doubt, is to be noted, that although the sunne is of so great a quantitie, as before hath beene declared, this doth not let, that a man may haue him right ouer his head, and in the discourse of the yeere he be in one part or other of the earth, the which is vnderstood in this manner, y t the greatnesse of the sunne is not to be considered how great it is in it selfe, but how great it is to vs, I will say according to our sight, and according to the effect which it maketh with vs. (An exāple of this is) that many times it happeneth to mē that goe sayling, and they see very farre of in the Sea a ship, and although shee be very great, and goeth very swiftly, it seemeth to him that beholdeth her, that she is little, and that shee moueth not: the same doth happē to vs with a great cloude, which the wind doth carry with great lightnesse: this is caused for the great distaunce that is from the one to the other, in such sort, that we iudge not as it is, but according as the sight doth represent it to vs: euen so the sunne although he be very great, and mooueth with great haste, we iudge not of it, but according to our sense, for because in as much as toucheth the hastinesse of his mouing, as y e earth is wel neere a point of the circle, which y e sunne maketh, it is certayne, that it cannot bee perceiued or knowne according as his moouing is, this is by reason of the greate distance that is betweeene him and vs, and so by this greate distance hee commeth to diminish himselfe so muche in our sight that he may be right ouer the heade of of one man, and not right ouer the head of another, that is one league from him.
This is shewed, that in taking the altitude of the sunne, one man will take him very precisely right ouer his owne head, & another although hee bee neere, will finde him sarre of from him, this is bicause he was more right ouer y e head of the one then of the other. Likewise this is shewed by the shadowes, the which doe shew infallibly the moouing which the sunne maketh from one part to another: in such sort, that in one place one mā may haue his shadow so right, that at the middest of the day, the sunne doth make no shadow to any part, and to another that is not farre from thence, although he be in the same Meridian, and at the same houre and minute, the shadow wil decline to some part, wherby it manifestly appeareth▪ to haue the sunne right ouer our head, and howe if mooueth not onely by the middest, but likewise by the sides of y e earth. And for the better declaration of that aforesayd is to be noted, that naturally all things which wee see, the sight doth comprehend it by A piramide, so saith Alacen in the perspectiue in the 17. rule, that the comprehension of all thinges visible is by a rooted pyramide. The pyramide is to be imagined in this manner.
So that although the thing be great, it cōmeth diminishing by the lightning of the sight, vntil it remayne in the litl [...] [Page 45] space or place of the light of our eye, so that in our eye doth containe, a mountaine or great hill, howe so euer it bee, therefore we may say, that the greatnes of the sunne, by a piramide commeth deminishing vntil he be vpō our heads, this is when a man is precisely put vnder y e centre of the sun in this sort, and so
it is to be vnderstoode, when wee say to haue the sunne vpon our head, or to bee distant of vs to one part or other.
The tenth Chapter, to knowe howe the altitude of the Sunne ought to be seen if it be leape yere, or what yere it is.
IN the sixth Chapter of this fourth booke, I said how it is necessary when the altitude of the sunne is taken to knowe the yere, if it be the leap yere, or the first or seconde, or thirde after the leap yere, because the dayes of one yere, with those of the other haue not the degrees and minutes equall, and the reason is, because as in the third chapter of this fourth booke hath beene declared, that the yere called Solar, hath three hūdreth sixty fiue daies, & sixe houres, and that those sixe houres of euery one yeere, from foure to foure yeres, do make a natural day, and that such a yeere is called a leap yere, so that the first yere after the leape yeere, hath three hundreth sixtie fiue dayes and sixe houres. And the seconde yeere, three hundreth sixtie fiue dayes and twelue houres, the sixe of the first yeere, and sixe his owne, and the third yeere, three hundreth sixetie fiue daies and eighteene houres, the twelue of the two yeres the first and seconde, and the vi. his owne, and the fourth yeere three hundreth sixtie sixe dayes, so that in this fourth yere is shut vp the houres of al foure yeres, and the fourth yere being past, The first begineth, and so the other yeres successiuely as it is said, and for this cause they bee not equall in degrees and minutes all dayes one with another: Therefore it is conuenient, as it is before declared, when the altitude of the sunne is to bee taken, that it be seene what yere it is, and seeke what daye and moneth you are in, and there you shal finde the declination, or distance which the sun hath, from the line, as in the tables folowing is conteined, therfore to knowe the yere that you are in, if it be a leape yere, or the first, second, or thirde after the leape yeere, looke ouer the two rules of the discourses folowing, for in them playnely is shewed, by reckoning the yere of our L [...]be, a thousande fiue hundreth fourtie fiue in the first house of the which is the first yere, and so successiuely in euery yere one house, & the house being ended of the last rule, returne to the beginning, and so this account is for euer.
A rule to knowe the leape yere.
1545. ☜ 1. 2. 3. B 1. 2. 3. B 1. 2. 3. B 1. 2. 3. B 1. 2. 3. B 1. 2. 3. B 1. 2. 3. B.
When you will knowe if the yeere be a leape yeere, or not without looking in the booke, looke in the yere of the birth of our Lord, & leaue the thousand fiue hundreth, the rest deuide in the middest, and when euery halfe were of euen number in payers or cupples it is the leape yere.
The tables of the distance or declination which the Sunne maketh from the equinoctiall line euery day of the foure yeres, aswell towardes the part of the north as towardes the south.
Ianuarie. | Februarie. | March. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | xxi | [...]i | 1 | xiii | iviii | 1 | iii | xxxix |
2 | xxi | xl [...] | 2 | xii [...] | xxxviii. | 2 | [...]i | xv |
3 | xxi | xxxi | 3 | xiii | xviii. | 3 | ii | iii |
4 | xxi | xx | 4 | x [...] | lviii | 4 | ii | xxviii |
5 | xxi | ix | 5 | xii | xxxvii | 5 | ii | iiii |
6 | xx | lviii | 6 | xii | xvi | 6 | i | xli |
7 | xx | xiv | 7 | xi | lv | 7 | i | xvii |
8 | xx | xxxiii | 8 | xi | xxxiiii | 8 | 0 | liii |
9 | xx | xxi | 9 | xi | xii | 9 | 0 | xxx |
10 | xx | viii | 10 | x | [...]i | 10 | 0 | vi |
11 | x [...]x | lv | 11 | x | xxix | 11 | 0 | xviii |
12 | x [...]x | xli | 12 | x | vii | 12 | 0 | xiii |
13 | x [...]x | xxvii | 13 | ix | x [...]vii | 13 | i | v |
14 | x [...]x | xiii | 14 | ix | [...]iii | 14 | i | xxix |
15 | xviii | lviii | 15 | ix | 15 | i | lii | |
16 | xviii | xlii | 16 | viii | xxxviii | 16 | ii | xvi |
17 | xviii | xxvii | 17 | viii | xv | 17 | ii | xl |
18 | xviii | xi | 18 | vii | [...] | 18 | iii | iii |
19 | xvii | liiii | 19 | vii | xxx | 19 | iii | xxvi |
20 | xv [...]i | xxxviii | 20 | vii | vii | 20 | iii | xlix |
21 | xvii | [...]x [...]i | 21 | vi | xliiii | 21 | iiii | xii |
22 | xvii | v | 22 | vi | xxi | 22 | iiii | xxxv |
23 | xvi | xlv [...]i | 23 | v | lviii | 23 | iiii | lviii |
24 | xvi | xxix | 24 | v | xxxv | 24 | v | xxi |
25 | xvi | xi | 25 | v | xi | 25 | v | xliiii |
26 | xv | liii | 26 | iiii | xlviii | 26 | vi | vi |
27 | xv | xxxv | 27 | iiii | xxiiii | 27 | vi | xxix |
28 | xv | xvi | 28 | iiii | [...] | 28 | vi | liii |
29 | xiiii | lvi | 29 | vii | xv | |||
30 | xiiii | xxxv [...]i | 30 | vii | xxxvii | |||
31 | xiiii | xvii [...] | 31 | vii | lix |
April. | May. | Iune. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | viii | xxi | 1 | xvii | 14 | 1 | 23 | [...] |
2 | viii | xliii | 2 | xviii | [...] | 2 | 23 | 13 |
3 | ix | v | 3 | xviii | 24 | 3 | 23 | 17 |
4 | ix | xxvi | 4 | xviii | 39 | 4 | 23 | 21 |
5 | ix | xlviii | 5 | xviii | 54 | 5 | 23 | 24 |
6 | x | ix | 6 | xix | 8 | 6 | 23 | 26 |
7 | x | xxx | 7 | x [...]x | 21 | 7 | 23 | 28 |
8 | x | lii | 8 | xix | 35 | 8 | 23 | 30 |
9 | xi | xii | 9 | xix | 47 | 9 | 23 | 31 |
10 | xi | xxxiii | 10 | xx | 0 | 10 | 23 | 32 |
11 | xi | liii | 11 | xx | 13 | 11 | 23 | 33 |
12 | xii | xiiii | 12 | xx | 24 | 12 | 23 | 33 |
13 | xii | xxxiii | 13 | xx | 36 | 13 | 23 | 33 |
14 | xii | liii | 14 | xx | 47 | 14 | 23 | 32 |
15 | xiii | xiii | 15 | xx | 59 | 15 | 23 | 31 |
16 | xiii | xxxii | 16 | xxi | 10 | 16 | 23 | 29 |
17 | xiii | li | 17 | xxi | 20 | 17 | 23 | 27 |
18 | xiiii | x | 18 | xxi | 30 | 18 | 23 | 25 |
19 | xiiii | xxix | 19 | xxi | 40 | 19 | 23 | 22 |
20 | xiiii | xlvii | 20 | xxi | 49 | 20 | 23 | 18 |
21 | xv | vi | 21 | xxi | 57 | 21 | 23 | 15 |
22 | xv | xxiiii | 22 | xxii | 6 | 22 | 23 | 11 |
23 | xv | xlii | 23 | xxii | 14 | 23 | 23 | 6 |
24 | xv | lix | 24 | xxii | [...] | 24 | 23 | 2 |
25 | xvi | xvi | 25 | xxii | 29 | 25 | 22 | [...]7 |
26 | xvi | xxxiii | 26 | xxii | 36 | 26 | 22 | 51 |
27 | xvi | l | 27 | xxii | 42 | 27 | 22 | 45 |
28 | xvii | vii | 28 | xxii | 49 | 28 | 22 | 39 |
29 | xvi [...] | xxiii | 29 | xxii | 58 | 29 | 22 | 32 |
30 | xvi [...] | xxxviii | 30 | xxii | 0 | 30 | 22 | 25 |
31 | xxiii | 4 |
Iulie. | August. | September. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes |
1 | xxii | xvii | 1 | xv | xxxii | 1 | iiii | xivi |
2 | xxii | i [...] | 2 | xv | xiiii | 2 | iiii | xxiii |
3 | xxii | i | 3 | xiiii | ivi | 3 | iiii | 0 |
4 | xxi | ii | 4 | xiiii | xxxvii | 4 | iii | xxxvii |
5 | xxi | xliiii | 5 | xiiii | xix | 5 | iii | xiiii |
6 | xxi | xxxiiii | 6 | xiii | 0 | 6 | ii | li |
7 | xxi | xxiiii | 7 | xiii | xli | 7 | ii | xxviii |
8 | xxi | xilii | 8 | xiii | xxi | 8 | ii | iiii |
9 | xxi | iii | 9 | xiii | ii | 9 | i | xl |
10 | xx | [...] | 10 | xii | xliii | 10 | i | xvii |
11 | xx | xli | 11 | xii | xxii | 11 | 0 | liiii |
12 | xx | xxix | 12 | xii | iii | 12 | 0 | xxx |
13 | xx | xviii | 13 | xi | xliii | 13 | 0 | vi |
14 | xx | vi | 14 | xi | xxii | 14 | 0 | xviii |
15 | xix | li [...]i | 15 | xi | [...] | 15 | 0 | xli |
16 | xix | xl | 16 | x | xl | 16 | i | v |
17 | xix | xxvii | 17 | x | xix | 17 | i | xxviii |
18 | xix | xiii | 18 | ix | lvii | 18 | i | lii |
19 | xviii | [...]ix | 19 | ix | xxxvi | 19 | ii | xvi |
20 | xviii | xlv | 20 | ix | xv | 20 | ii | xl |
21 | xxviii | xxx | 21 | viii | liii | 21 | iii | iii |
22 | xviii | xv | 22 | viii | xxxii | 22 | iii | xxvi |
23 | xviii | 00 | 23 | viii | ix | 23 | iii | l |
24 | xvii | xliiii | 24 | vii | xlvii | 24 | iiii | xiii |
25 | xv [...]i | xxix | 25 | vii | xxv | 25 | iiii | xxxvi |
26 | xvii | xliii | 26 | vii | iii | 26 | v | 0 |
27 | xvi | [...]vi | 27 | vi | xli | 27 | v | xxiii |
28 | xvi | xl | 28 | vi | xvii | 28 | v | xlvii |
29 | xvi | xxiii | 29 | v | lv | 29 | vi | ix |
30 | xvi | vi | 30 | v | xxxii | 30 | vi | xxxiii |
31 | xv | xlix | 31 | v | ix |
October. | Nouember. | December. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes |
1 | vi | iv [...] | 1 | xvii | 29 | 1 | 23 | 7 |
2 | vii | xix | 2 | xvii | 45 | 2 | 23 | 11 |
3 | vii | xli | 3 | xviii | 2 | 3 | 23 | 16 |
4 | viii | iiii | 4 | xviii | 18 | 4 | 23 | 20 |
5 | viii | xxvii | 5 | xviii | 33 | 5 | 23 | 23 |
6 | viii | xlix | 6 | xviii | 49 | 6 | 23 | 26 |
7 | ix | xi | 7 | xix | 5 | 7 | 23 | 28 |
8 | ix | xxxiii | 8 | xix | 19 | 8 | 23 | 30 |
9 | ix | lv | 9 | xix | 33 | 9 | 23 | 32 |
10 | x | xvii | 10 | xix | 47 | 10 | 23 | 33 |
11 | x | xxxix | 11 | xx | 1 | 11 | 23 | 33 |
12 | xi | [...] | 12 | xx | 14 | 12 | 23 | 33 |
13 | xi | xx [...]ii | 13 | xx | 20 | 13 | 23 | 32 |
14 | xi | xliiii | 14 | xx | 38 | 14 | 23 | 31 |
15 | xii | v | 15 | xx | 51 | 15 | 23 | 30 |
16 | xii | xxvi | 16 | xxi | 3 | 16 | 23 | 28 |
17 | xii | xlvi | 17 | xxi | 14 | 17 | 23 | 26 |
18 | xiii | vii | 18 | xxi | 25 | 18 | 23 | 23 |
19 | xiii | xxvii | 19 | xxi | 36 | 19 | 23 | 19 |
20 | xiii | xlvii | 20 | xxi | 46 | 20 | 23 | 15 |
21 | xiiii | vii | 21 | xxi | 5 [...] | 21 | 23 | 11 |
22 | xiiii | xxvii | 22 | xxii | 4 | 22 | 23 | 6 |
23 | xiiii | xivi | 23 | xxii | 13 | 23 | 23 | 1 |
24 | xv | v | 24 | xxii | 21 | 24 | 22 | 56 |
25 | xv | xxiiii | 25 | xxii | 29 | 25 | 22 | 50 |
26 | xv | xliii | 26 | xx [...]i | 36 | 26 | 22 | 4 [...] |
27 | xvi | i | 27 | xxii | 44 | 27 | 22 | 35 |
28 | xvi | xi [...] | 28 | xxii | 51 | 28 | 22 | 28 |
29 | xvi | xxxvii | 29 | xxii | 56 | 29 | 22 | 20 |
30 | xvi | lv | 30 | xxiii | 1 | 30 | 22 | 12 |
31 | xvii | xiii | 31 | 22 | 3 |
Ianuarie. | Februarie. | March. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | xxi | liiii | 1 | xiiii | iiii | 1 | iii | xliiii |
2 | xxi | xliiii | 2 | xiii | xliii | 2 | iii | xxi |
3 | xxi | xxxiii | 3 | xiii | xxiii | 3 | ii | lviii |
4 | xxi | xxiiii | 4 | xiii | iii | 4 | ii | xxxiiii |
5 | xxi | xiii | 5 | xii | xlii | 5 | ii | x |
6 | xxi | i | 6 | xii | xxii | 6 | i | xlvi |
7 | xx | xlix | 7 | xii | i | 7 | i | xxiii |
8 | xx | xxxvii | 8 | xi | xl | 8 | 0 | lix |
9 | xx | xxiiii | 9 | xi | xviii | 9 | 0 | xxxv |
10 | xx | xii | 10 | x | lvii | 10 | 0 | xii |
11 | xix | lviii | 11 | x | xxxv | 11 | 0 | xii |
12 | xix | xliiii | 12 | x | xiii | 12 | 0 | xxxvi |
13 | xix | xxxi | 13 | ix | li | 13 | 0 | lix |
14 | xix | xvii | 14 | ix | xxix | 14 | i | xxiii |
15 | xix | ii | 15 | ix | vii | 15 | i | xlvi |
16 | xviii | xlvii | 16 | viii | xiv | 16 | ii | x |
17 | xviii | xxxi | 17 | viii | xxii | 17 | ii | xxxiiii |
18 | xxviii | xv | 18 | vii | lix | 18 | ii | lvii |
19 | xvii | lix | 19 | vii | xxxvii | 19 | iii | xx |
20 | xvii | xlii | 20 | vii | xiiii | 20 | iii | xliii |
21 | xvii | xxvi | 21 | vi | li | 21 | iiii | vii |
22 | xvii | ix | 22 | vi | xxvii | 22 | iiii | xxx |
23 | xvi | lii | 23 | vi | iiii | 23 | iiii | liii |
24 | xvi | xxxiiii | 24 | v | xli | 24 | v | xv |
25 | xvi | xvi | 25 | v | xviii | 25 | v | xxxviii |
26 | xv | lviii | 26 | iiii | liiii | 26 | vi | i |
27 | xv | xxxvii | 27 | iiii | xxxi | 27 | vi | xxiiii |
28 | xv | xxi | 28 | iiii | viii | 28 | vi | xlvii |
29 | xv | ii | 29 | vii | x | |||
30 | xiiii | xliii | 30 | vii | xxxii | |||
31 | xiiii | xxiii | 31 | vii | liii |
April. | May. | Iune. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Daye [...] | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | viii | xvi | 1 | xvii | x [...]x | 1 | 23 | 8 |
2 | viii | xxxviii | 2 | xviii | vi | 2 | 23 | 12 |
3 | viii | lix | 3 | xviii | xx | 3 | 23 | 16 |
4 | ix | xxi | 4 | xviii | xxxv | 4 | 23 | 20 |
5 | ix | xlii | 5 | xviii | l | 5 | 23 | 23 |
6 | x | iiii | 6 | xix | iiii | 6 | 23 | 26 |
7 | x | xxv | 7 | xix | xviii | 7 | 23 | 28 |
8 | x | xlvi | 8 | xix | xxxi | 8 | 23 | 29 |
9 | xi | vii | 9 | xix | xliiii | 9 | 23 | 31 |
10 | xi | xxvii | 10 | xix | lvii | 10 | 23 | 32 |
11 | xi | xlviii | 11 | xx | x | 11 | 23 | 33 |
12 | xii | x | 12 | xx | xxii | 12 | 23 | 33 |
13 | xii | xxviii | 13 | xx | xxxiii | 13 | 23 | 33 |
14 | xii | xlviii | 14 | xx | xliiii | 14 | 23 | 32 |
15 | xiii | viii | 15 | xx | lvi | 15 | 23 | 31 |
16 | xiii | xxvii | 16 | xxi | vii | 16 | 23 | 29 |
17 | xiii | xlvi | 17 | xxi | xviii | 17 | 23 | 27 |
18 | xiiii | vi | 18 | xxi | xxviii | 18 | 23 | 25 |
19 | xiiii | xxv | 19 | xxi | 37 | 19 | 23 | 23 |
20 | xiiii | xiiii | 20 | xxi | 46 | 20 | 23 | 19 |
21 | xv | [...] | 21 | xxi | 55 | 21 | 23 | 16 |
22 | xv | xix | 22 | xxii | 4 | 22 | 23 | 12 |
23 | xv | xxxvii | 23 | xxii | 12 | 23 | 23 | 7 |
24 | xv | lv | 24 | xxii | 20 | 24 | 23 | 3 |
25 | xvi | xii | 25 | xxii | 27 | 25 | 23 | 58 |
26 | xvi | xxix | 26 | xxii | 34 | 26 | 22 | 53 |
27 | xvi | xiv | 27 | xxii | 41 | 27 | 22 | 47 |
28 | xvii | iii | 28 | xxii | 48 | 28 | 22 | 40 |
29 | xvii | xix | 29 | xxii | 52 | 29 | 22 | 33 |
30 | xvii | xxxiiii | 30 | xxii | 58 | 30 | 22 | 27 |
31 | xxiii | 3 |
Iulie. | August. | September. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | xxii | xix | 1 | xv | xxxvi | 1 | iiii | lii |
2 | xxii | xi | 2 | xv | xviii | 2 | iiii | xxix |
3 | xxii | iii | 3 | xv | 0 | 3 | iiii | vi |
4 | xxi | liiii | 4 | xiiii | xlii | 4 | iii | xliii |
5 | xxi | xlv | 5 | xiiii | xxiiii | 5 | iii | xix |
6 | xxi | xxxvi | 6 | xiiii | v | 6 | ii | lvi |
7 | xxi | xxvii | 7 | xiii | xiv | 7 | ii | xxxiii |
8 | xxi | xvii | 8 | xiii | xxvi | 8 | ii | x |
9 | xxi | vi | 9 | xiii | vii | 9 | i | xlvi |
10 | xx | lv | 10 | xii | xlvii | 10 | i | xxiii |
11 | xx | xliiii | 11 | xii | xxvii | 11 | 0 | lix |
12 | xx | xxxii | 12 | xii | viii | 12 | 0 | xxxv |
13 | xx | xx | 13 | xi | xlviii | 13 | 0 | xii |
14 | xx | ix | 14 | xi | xxvii | 14 | 0 | xii |
15 | xix | lvi | 15 | xi | vi | 15 | 0 | xxxv |
16 | xix | xliii | 16 | x | xlv | 16 | 0 | lix |
17 | xix | xxx | 17 | x | xxiiii | 17 | i | xxiii |
18 | xix | xvii | 18 | x | iii | 18 | i | xlvi |
19 | xix | iii | 19 | ix | xii | 19 | ii | x |
20 | xviii | xlix | 20 | ix | xx | 20 | ii | xxxiiii |
21 | xviii | xxxiiii | 21 | viii | iix | 21 | ii | lvii |
22 | xviii | xix | 22 | viii | xxxvii | 22 | iii | xx |
23 | xviii | liii | 23 | viii | xv | 23 | iii | xliiii |
24 | xvii | xlviii | 24 | vii | lii | 24 | iiii | viii |
25 | xvii | xxxiii | 25 | vii | xxxi | 25 | iiii | xxxi |
26 | xvii | xvii | 26 | vii | ix | 26 | iiii | liiii |
27 | xvii | i | 27 | vi | xlvi | 27 | v | xvii |
28 | xvi | xliiii | 28 | vi | xxiii | 28 | v | xli |
29 | xvi | [...]xviii | 29 | vi | 0 | 29 | vi | iiii |
30 | xvi | xi | 30 | v | xxxviii | 30 | vi | xxvii |
31 | xv | liiii | 31 | v | xv |
October. | Nouember. | December. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | vi | li | 1 | xvii | 25 | 1 | 23 | 5 |
2 | vii | xiiii | 2 | xvii | 41 | 2 | 23 | 10 |
3 | vii | xxxvi | 3 | xvii | 58 | 3 | 23 | 15 |
4 | vii | lviii | 4 | xviii | 14 | 4 | 23 | 19 |
5 | viii | xxi | 5 | xviii | 29 | 5 | 23 | 22 |
6 | viii | xliiii | 6 | xviii | 46 | 6 | 23 | 25 |
7 | ix | vi | 7 | xix | 1 | 7 | 23 | 27 |
8 | ix | xxviii | 8 | xix | 15 | 8 | 23 | 29 |
9 | ix | l | 9 | xix | 29 | 9 | 23 | 31 |
10 | x | xii | 10 | xix | 43 | 10 | 23 | 32 |
11 | x | xxxiiii | 11 | xix | 57 | 11 | 23 | 33 |
12 | x | lvi | 12 | xx | 21 | 12 | 23 | 33 |
13 | xi | xvii | 13 | xx | 23 | 13 | 23 | 33 |
14 | xi | xxxix | 14 | xx | 36 | 14 | 23 | 32 |
15 | xii | 0 | 15 | xx | 48 | 15 | 23 | 30 |
16 | xii | xxi | 16 | xxi | 0 | 16 | 23 | 28 |
17 | xii | xli | 17 | xxi | 12 | 17 | 23 | 26 |
18 | xiii | ii | 18 | xxi | 23 | 18 | 23 | 23 |
19 | xiii | xxii | 19 | xxi | 33 | 19 | 23 | 20 |
20 | xiii | xlii | 20 | xxi | 43 | 20 | 23 | 16 |
21 | xiiii | ii | 21 | xxi | 53 | 21 | 23 | 12 |
22 | xiiii | xxii | 22 | xxii | 2 | 22 | 23 | 7 |
23 | xiiii | xlii | 23 | xxii | 11 | 23 | 23 | 2 |
24 | xv | i | 24 | xxii | 19 | 24 | 22 | 57 |
25 | xv | xx | 25 | xxii | 28 | 25 | 22 | 51 |
26 | xv | xxxix | 26 | xxii | 35 | 26 | 22 | 44 |
27 | xv | lvii | 27 | xxii | 42 | 27 | 22 | 37 |
28 | xvi | xv | 28 | xxii | 49 | 28 | 22 | 30 |
29 | xvi | xxxiii | 29 | xxii | 55 | 29 | 22 | 22 |
30 | xvi | l | 30 | xxiii | 0 | 30 | 22 | 14 |
31 | xvii | viii | 31 | 22 | 5 |
Ianuarie. | Februarie. | March. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | xxi | lvi | 1 | xiiii | viii | 1 | iii | l |
2 | xxi | xlvi | 2 | xiii | xlviii | 2 | iii | xxvi |
3 | xxi | xxxvi | 3 | xiii | xxviii | 3 | iii | iii |
4 | xxi | xxvi | 4 | xiii | viii | 4 | ii | xl |
5 | xxi | xv | 5 | xii | xlvii | 5 | ii | xvi |
6 | xxi | iiii | 6 | xii | xxvi | 6 | i | [...]i |
7 | xx | lii | 7 | xii | vi | 7 | i | xxviii |
8 | xx | xxxix | 8 | xi | xlv | 8 | i | v |
9 | xx | xxvii | 9 | xi | xxiii | 9 | 0 | xli |
10 | xx | xv | 10 | xi | ii | 10 | 0 | xvii |
11 | xx | ii | 11 | x | xl | 11 | 0 | vi |
12 | xix | xlviii | 12 | x | xviii | 12 | 0 | xxx |
13 | xix | xxxiiii | 13 | ix | ivi | 13 | 0 | liiii |
14 | xix | xx | 14 | ix | xxxiiii | 14 | i | xvii |
15 | xix | v | 15 | ix | xii | 15 | i | xli |
16 | xviii | l | 16 | viii | l | 16 | ii | iiii |
17 | xviii | xxxv | 17 | viii | xxvii | 17 | ii | xxviii |
18 | xviii | xix | 18 | viii | iiii | 18 | ii | lii |
19 | xviii | iii | 19 | vii | 42 | 19 | iii | xiiii |
20 | xvii | xlvi | 20 | vii | xix | 20 | iii | xxxviii |
21 | xvii | xxx | 21 | vi | lvi | 21 | iiii | i |
22 | xvii | xiii | 22 | vi | xxxiii | 22 | iiii | xxiiii |
23 | xvi | lvi | 23 | vi | x | 23 | iiii | xlvii |
24 | xvi | xxxviii | 24 | v | xlvii | 24 | v | ix |
25 | xvi | xx | 25 | v | xxiii | 25 | v | xxxiii |
26 | xvi | ii | 26 | v | 0 | 26 | v | lvi |
27 | xv | xliiii | 27 | iiii | xxxvi | 27 | vi | xviii |
28 | xv | xxv | 28 | iiii | xiii | 28 | vi | xli |
29 | xv | vi | 29 | vii | iiii | |||
30 | xiiii | xlvii | 30 | vii | xxvi | |||
31 | xiiii | xxviii | 31 | vii | xlviii |
April. | May. | Iune. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | viii | ix | 1 | xvii | 46 | 1 | 23 | 7 |
2 | viii | xxxi | 2 | xviii | 2 | 2 | 23 | 11 |
3 | viii | liii | 3 | xviii | 17 | 3 | 23 | 15 |
4 | ix | xvi | 4 | xviii | 31 | 4 | 23 | 19 |
5 | ix | xxxvii | 5 | xviii | 46 | 5 | 23 | 22 |
6 | ix | lviii | 6 | xix | l | 6 | 23 | 25 |
7 | x | xx | 7 | xix | 14 | 7 | 23 | 27 |
8 | x | xii | 8 | xix | 28 | 8 | 23 | 29 |
9 | xi | ii | 9 | xix | 41 | 9 | 23 | 31 |
10 | xi | xxii | 10 | xix | 54 | 10 | 23 | 32 |
11 | xi | xliii | 11 | xx | 7 | 11 | 23 | 33 |
12 | xii | iiii | 12 | xx | 19 | 12 | 23 | 33 |
13 | xii | xxiii | 13 | xx | 30 | 13 | 23 | 33 |
14 | xii | xliii | 14 | xx | 42 | 14 | 23 | 32 |
15 | xiii | iii | 15 | xx | 53 | 15 | 23 | 31 |
16 | xiii | xxii | 16 | xxi | 4 | 16 | 23 | 30 |
17 | xiii | xlii | 17 | xxi | 15 | 17 | 23 | 28 |
18 | xiiii | i | 18 | xxi | 25 | 18 | 23 | 26 |
19 | xiiii | xx | 19 | xxi | 35 | 19 | 23 | 23 |
20 | xiiii | xxxviii | 20 | xxi | 44 | 20 | 23 | 20 |
21 | xiiii | lvii | 21 | xxi | 53 | 21 | 23 | 17 |
22 | xv | xv | 22 | xxii | 2 | [...] | 23 | 13 |
23 | xv | xxxiii | 23 | xxii | 10 | 23 | 23 | 9 |
24 | xv | l | 24 | xxii | 18 | 24 | 23 | 4 |
25 | xvi | viii | 25 | xxii | 25 | 25 | 22 | 59 |
26 | xvi | xxv | 26 | xxii | 32 | 26 | 22 | 54 |
27 | xvi | xli | 27 | xxii | 39 | 27 | 22 | 48 |
28 | xvi | lviii | 28 | xxii | 46 | 28 | 22 | 42 |
29 | xvii | xv | 29 | xxii | 52 | 29 | 22 | 35 |
30 | xvii | xxx | 30 | xxii | 57 | 30 | 22 | 28 |
31 | xxiii | 2 |
Iulie. | August. | September. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | xxii | xxi | 1 | xv | xl | 1 | iiii | lvii |
2 | xxii | xiii | 2 | xv | xxiii | 2 | iiii | xxxiiii |
3 | xxii | v | 3 | xv | iiii | 3 | iiii | xii |
4 | xxi | ivi | 4 | xiiii | xlvi | 4 | iii | xlix |
5 | xxi | xlviii | 5 | xiiii | xxviii | 5 | iii | xxv |
6 | xxi | xxxix | 6 | xiiii | ix | 6 | iii | ii |
7 | xxi | xxix | 7 | xiii | l | 7 | ii | 39 |
8 | xxi | xix | 8 | xiii | xxxi | 8 | ii | xvi |
9 | xxi | ix | 9 | xiii | xii | 9 | i | lii |
10 | xx | lviii | 10 | xii | lii | 10 | i | xxviii |
11 | xx | xlvi | 11 | xii | xxxii | 11 | i | v |
12 | xx | xxxv | 12 | xii | 13 | 12 | 0 | xli |
13 | xx | xxiii | 13 | xi | lii | 13 | 0 | xviii |
14 | xx | ix | 14 | xi | 32 | 14 | 0 | vi |
15 | xix | lix | 15 | xi | xi | 15 | 0 | 30 |
16 | xix | xlvi | 16 | x | l | 16 | 0 | liii |
17 | xix | xxxiii | 17 | x | xxix | 17 | i | xvii |
18 | xix | xx | 18 | x | viii | 18 | i | xl |
19 | xix | vii | 19 | ix | xlvii | 19 | ii | iiil |
20 | xviii | lii | 20 | ix | xxv | 20 | ii | xxviii |
21 | xviii | xxxviii | 21 | ix | iiii | 21 | ii | lii |
22 | xviii | xxiii | 22 | viii | 42 | 22 | iii | xv |
23 | xviii | viii | 23 | viii | xx | 23 | iii | xxxix |
24 | xvii | lii | 24 | vii | lviii | 24 | iiii | ii |
25 | xvii | xxxvii | 25 | vii | xxxvi | 25 | iiii | xxv |
26 | xvii | xxi | 26 | vii | xiiii | 26 | iiii | xlix |
27 | xvii | v | 27 | vi | lii | 27 | v | xi |
28 | xvi | xlviii | 28 | vi | xxix | 28 | v | xxxv |
29 | xvi | xxxii | 29 | vi | vi | 29 | v | lviii |
30 | xvi | xv | 30 | v | xliii | 30 | vi | [...]1 |
31 | xv | lviii | 31 | v | xxi |
October. | Nouember. | December. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes |
1 | vi | xlv | 1 | xvii | 21 | 1 | 23 | 4 |
2 | vii | viii | 2 | xvii | 37 | 2 | 23 | 9 |
3 | vii | xxxi | 3 | xvii | 54 | 3 | 23 | 13 |
4 | vii | liii | 4 | xviii | 10 | 4 | 23 | 17 |
5 | viii | xvi | 5 | xviii | 26 | 5 | 23 | 22 |
6 | viii | xxxix | 6 | xviii | 42 | 6 | 23 | 25 |
7 | ix | i | 7 | xviii | 57 | 7 | 23 | 27 |
8 | ix | xxiii | 8 | xix | 12 | 8 | 23 | 29 |
9 | ix | xlv | 9 | xix | 26 | 9 | 23 | 31 |
10 | x | vii | 10 | xix | 40 | 10 | 23 | 32 |
11 | x | xxix | 11 | xix | 54 | 11 | 23 | 33 |
12 | x | li | 12 | xx | 7 | 12 | 23 | 33 |
13 | xi | xii | 13 | xx | 20 | 13 | 23 | 33 |
14 | xi | xxxiiii | 14 | xx | 33 | 14 | 23 | 32 |
15 | xi | lv | 15 | xx | 45 | 15 | 23 | 31 |
16 | xii | xvi | 16 | xx | 57 | 16 | 23 | 29 |
17 | xii | xxxvi | 17 | xxi | 9 | 17 | 23 | 27 |
18 | xii | lvii | 18 | xxi | 20 | 18 | 23 | 24 |
19 | xiii | xvii | 19 | xxi | 31 | 19 | 23 | 21 |
20 | xiii | xxxvii | 20 | xxi | 41 | 20 | 23 | 17 |
21 | xiii | lvii | 21 | xxi | 50 | 21 | 23 | 13 |
22 | xiiii | xvii | 22 | xxii | 0 | 22 | 23 | 8 |
23 | xiiii | xxxvii | 23 | xxii | 9 | 23 | 23 | 3 |
24 | xiiii | lvi | 24 | xxii | 17 | 24 | 22 | 58 |
25 | xv | xv | 25 | xxii | 26 | 25 | 22 | 52 |
26 | xv | xxxiiii | 26 | xxii | 33 | 26 | 22 | 46 |
27 | xv | lii | 27 | xxii | 40 | 27 | 22 | 39 |
28 | xvi | xi | 28 | xxii | 47 | 28 | 22 | 32 |
29 | xvi | xxix | 29 | xxii | 53 | 29 | 22 | 24 |
30 | xvi | xlvi | 30 | xxii | 59 | 30 | 22 | 16 |
31 | xvii | iiii | 31 | 22 | 7 |
Ianuarie. | Februarie. | March. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes |
1 | xxi | lviii | 1 | xiiii | xiii | 1 | iii | xxxii |
2 | xxi | xlix | 2 | liii | liii | 2 | iii | ix |
3 | xxi | xxxix | 3 | xiii | xxxiii | 3 | ii | xlvi |
4 | xxi | xxix | 4 | xiii | xiii | 4 | ii | xxii |
5 | xxi | xvii | 5 | xii | liii | 5 | i | lviii |
6 | xxi | vii | 6 | xii | 32 | 6 | i | xxxiiii |
7 | xx | lv | 7 | xii | xi | 7 | i | x |
8 | xx | xliii | 8 | xi | l | 8 | 0 | xlvii |
9 | xx | xxx | 9 | xi | xxix | 9 | 0 | xxiii |
10 | xx | xviii | 10 | xi | vii | 10 | 0 | i |
11 | xx | v | 11 | x | xlv | 11 | 0 | xxiiii |
12 | xix | li | 12 | x | xxiii | 12 | 0 | xlviii |
13 | xix | xxxviii | 13 | x | i | 13 | i | xi |
14 | xix | xxiiii | 14 | ix | xxxix | 14 | i | xxxv |
15 | xix | ix | 15 | ix | xvii | 15 | i | lix |
16 | xviii | liiii | 16 | viii | lv | 16 | ii | xxii |
17 | xviii | xxxix | 17 | viii | xxxiii | 17 | ii | xlvi |
18 | xviii | xxiii | 18 | viii | x | 18 | iii | ix |
19 | xviii | vii | 19 | vii | xlvii | 19 | iii | xxxii |
20 | xvii | l | 20 | vii | xxv | 20 | iii | lv |
21 | xvii | xxxiiii | 21 | vii | ii | 21 | iiii | xviii |
22 | xvii | xviii | 22 | vi | xxxix | 22 | iiii | xlii |
23 | xvii | i | 23 | vi | xv | 23 | v | iiii |
24 | xvi | xlix | 24 | v | lii | 24 | v | xxvii |
25 | xvi | xxv | 25 | v | 29 | 25 | v | l |
26 | xvi | vii | 26 | v | v | 26 | vi | xiii |
27 | xv | xlix | 27 | iiii | xliii | 27 | vi | xxxvi |
28 | xv | xxx | 28 | iiii | xix | 28 | vi | iviii |
29 | xv | i | 29 | iii | lvi | 29 | vii | xxi |
30 | xiiii | lii | 30 | vii | xliii | |||
31 | xiiii | xxxiii | 31 | viii | v |
April. | May. | Iune. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | viii | xxvii | 1 | xvii | 58 | 1 | 23 | 10 |
2 | viii | xlix | 2 | xviii | 13 | 2 | 23 | 14 |
3 | ix | x | 3 | xviii | 28 | 3 | 23 | 18 |
4 | ix | xxxii | 4 | xviii | 43 | 4 | 23 | 22 |
5 | ix | liii | 5 | xviii | 58 | 5 | 23 | 25 |
6 | x | xv | 6 | xix | 11 | 6 | 23 | 27 |
7 | x | xxxvii | 7 | xix | 25 | 7 | 23 | 29 |
8 | x | lviii | 8 | xix | 38 | 8 | 23 | 31 |
9 | xi | xviii | 9 | xix | 51 | 9 | 23 | 32 |
10 | xi | xxxix | 10 | xx | 4 | 10 | 23 | 33 |
11 | xii | 0 | 11 | xx | 16 | 11 | 23 | 33 |
12 | xii | xx | 12 | xx | 28 | 12 | 23 | 33 |
13 | xii | xxxix | 13 | xx | 39 | 13 | 23 | 33 |
14 | xii | lix | 14 | xx | 50 | 14 | 23 | 32 |
15 | xiii | xix | 15 | xxi | 2 | 15 | 23 | 30 |
16 | xiii | xxxviii | 16 | xxi | 13 | 16 | 23 | 28 |
17 | xiii | lvii | 17 | xxi | 22 | 17 | 23 | 26 |
18 | xiiii | xvi | 18 | xxi | 33 | 18 | 23 | 24 |
19 | xiiii | xxxv | 19 | xxi | 42 | 19 | 23 | 21 |
20 | xiiii | liii | 20 | xxi | 51 | 20 | 23 | 17 |
21 | xv | xii | 21 | xxii | 0 | 21 | 23 | 14 |
22 | xv | xxx | 22 | xxii | 8 | 2 [...] | 23 | 10 |
23 | xv | xlvii | 23 | xxii | 16 | 23 | 23 | 6 |
24 | xvi | iiii | 2 | xxii | 24 | 24 | 23 | 0 |
25 | xvi | xxi | 25 | xxii | 31 | 25 | 22 | 35 |
26 | xvi | xxxviii | 26 | xxii | 37 | 26 | 22 | 49 |
27 | xvi | iv | 27 | xxii | 44 | 27 | 22 | 43 |
28 | xvii | xii | 28 | xxii | 50 | 28 | 22 | 37 |
29 | xvii | xxvii | 29 | xxii | 56 | 29 | 22 | 30 |
30 | xvii | xliii | 30 | xxiii | 1 | 30 | 22 | 23 |
31 | xxiii | 6 |
Iulie. | August. | September. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | xxii | xv | 1 | xv | 27 | 1 | iiii | xl |
2 | xxii | vil | 2 | xv | ix | 2 | iiii | xvii |
3 | xxi | lviii | 3 | xiiii | l | 3 | iii | liiii |
4 | xxi | l | 4 | xiiii | xxxii | 4 | iii | xxxi |
5 | xxi | xii | 5 | xiiii | xiii | 5 | iii | vii |
6 | xxi | xxxi | 6 | xiii | lv | 6 | ii | xlv |
7 | xxi | xxi | 7 | xiii | xxxv | 7 | ii | xxi |
8 | xxi | xi | 8 | xiii | xbi | 8 | i | lviii |
9 | xxi | 0 | 9 | xii | lvi | 9 | i | xxxiiii |
10 | xx | xlix | 10 | xii | xxxvil | 10 | i | x |
11 | xx | xxxviii | 11 | xii | xvii | 11 | 0 | xlvii |
12 | xx | xxvi | 12 | xi | lvii | 12 | 0 | xxiii |
13 | xx | xiiii | 13 | xi | xxxvii | 13 | 0 | 0 |
14 | xxi | il | 14 | xi | xvi | 14 | 0 | xxiiii |
15 | xix | xlix | 15 | x | lv | 15 | 0 | xlviii |
16 | xix | xxxvi | 16 | x | xxxiiii | 16 | i | xi |
17 | xix | xxiii | 17 | x | xiii | 17 | i | xxxv |
18 | xix | x | 18 | ix | li | 18 | i | lviii |
19 | xviii | xvi | 19 | ix | xxx | 19 | ii | xxii |
20 | xviii | xli | 20 | ix | ix | 20 | ii | xlvi |
21 | xviii | xxvli | 21 | viii | xlviii | 21 | iii | ix |
22 | xviii | xi | 22 | viii | xxv | 22 | iii | xxxiii |
23 | xvii | ivi | 23 | viii | iii | 23 | iii | lvi |
24 | xvii | xl | 24 | vii | xli | 24 | iiii | xix |
25 | xvii | xxv | 25 | vii | xix | 25 | iiii | xliii |
26 | xvii | ix | 26 | vi | lvii | 26 | v | vi |
27 | xvi | lii | 27 | vi | xxxiiii | 27 | v | xxix |
28 | xvi | xxxv | 28 | vi | xi | 28 | v | liii |
29 | xvi | xix | 29 | v | xlix | 29 | vi | xvi |
30 | xvi | ii | 30 | v | xxvi | 30 | vi | 39 |
31 | xv | xliiii | 31 | v | iii |
October. | Nouember. | December. | ||||||
Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. | Dayes | Degrees. | Minutes. |
1 | vii | ii | 1 | xvii | 33 | 1 | 23 | 8 |
2 | vii | xxv | 2 | xvii | 50 | 2 | 23 | 12 |
3 | vii | xlviiii | 3 | xviii | 7 | 3 | 23 | 17 |
4 | viii | x | 4 | xviii | 22 | 4 | 23 | 21 |
5 | viii | xxxiii | 5 | xviii | 38 | 5 | 23 | 24 |
6 | viii | lv | 6 | xviii | 53 | 6 | 23 | 26 |
7 | ix | xxii | 7 | xix | 8 | 7 | 23 | 28 |
8 | ix | xxxix | 8 | xix | 23 | 8 | 23 | 30 |
9 | x | i | 9 | xix | 37 | 9 | 23 | 32 |
10 | x | xxiiii | 10 | xix | 50 | 10 | 23 | 33 |
11 | x | xlvi | 11 | xx | 4 | 11 | 23 | 33 |
12 | xi | vii | 12 | xx | 17 | 12 | 23 | 33 |
13 | xi | xxix | 13 | xx | 30 | 13 | 23 | 32 |
14 | xi | l | 14 | xx | 42 | 14 | 23 | 31 |
15 | xii | xi | 15 | xx | 54 | 15 | 23 | 29 |
16 | xii | xxxi | 16 | xxi | 6 | 16 | 23 | 27 |
17 | xii | lii | 17 | xxi | 17 | 17 | 23 | 25 |
18 | xiii | xii | 18 | xxi | 28 | 18 | 23 | 22 |
19 | xiii | xxxii | 19 | xxi | 38 | 19 | 23 | 18 |
20 | xiii | liii | 20 | xxi | 48 | 20 | 23 | 14 |
21 | xiiii | xiii | 21 | xxi | 57 | 21 | 23 | 10 |
22 | xiiii | xxxii | 22 | xxii | 7 | 22 | 23 | 5 |
23 | xiiii | lii | 23 | xxii | 15 | 23 | 22 | 59 |
24 | xv | xi | 24 | xxii | 23 | 24 | 22 | 54 |
25 | xv | xxx | 25 | xxii | 31 | 25 | 22 | 48 |
26 | xv | xlviii | 26 | xxii | 38 | 26 | 22 | 41 |
27 | xvi | vi | 27 | xxii | 46 | 27 | 22 | 33 |
28 | xvi | xxiiii | 28 | xxii | 52 | 28 | 22 | 26 |
29 | xvi | xlii | 29 | xxii | 58 | 29 | 22 | 18 |
30 | xvii | 0 | 30 | xxiii | 3 | 30 | 22 | 9 |
31 | xvii | xvii | 31 | 22 | 0 |
Ianuarie. | Februarie. | March. | ||||||
1 | a | Newe yeeres day. | 1 | d | 1 | d | ||
2 | b | 2 | e | Pruficatiō of Ma. | 2 | e | ||
3 | c | 3 | f | 3 | f | |||
4 | d | 4 | g | 4 | g | |||
5 | e | 5 | A | Shroue Sunday. | 5 | A | ||
6 | f | Twelfe day. | 6 | b | 6 | b | ||
7 | g | 7 | c | 7 | c | |||
8 | a | 8 | d | 8 | [...] | |||
9 | b | 9 | e | 9 | e | |||
10 | c | 10 | f | 10 | f | |||
11 | d | 11 | g | 11 | g | |||
12 | e | 12 | A | 12 | A | S. Gregorie. | ||
13 | f | 13 | b | 13 | b | S. Leonard. | ||
14 | g | 14 | c | 14 | c | |||
15 | a | 15 | [...] | 15 | d | |||
16 | b | 16 | e | 16 | e | |||
17 | c | 17 | f | 17 | f | S. Gabriel archan. | ||
18 | d | 18 | g | 18 | g | |||
19 | e | 19 | a | 19 | A | |||
20 | f | S. Fabian & Seba. | 20 | b | 20 | b | ||
21 | g | 21 | c | 21 | c | |||
22 | A | S. Uincēt martyre. | 22 | d | 22 | d | ||
23 | b | 23 | e | 23 | e | |||
24 | c | 24 | f | S. Matthias apost. | 24 | f | ||
25 | d | Conuer. of S. Paul. | 25 | g | 25 | g | Anuntia. of Marie. | |
26 | e | 26 | A | 26 | A | Easter day. | ||
27 | f | 27 | b | 27 | b | |||
28 | g | 28 | c | 28 | c | |||
29 | A | 29 | d | |||||
30 | b | 30 | e | |||||
31 | c | 31 |
April. | May. | Iune. | ||||||
1 | g | 1 | b | S. Phil. and Jacob. | 1 | e | ||
2 | A | 2 | c | 2 | ||||
3 | b | 3 | d | Innuenci. of y e crosse. | 3 | g | ||
4 | c | 4 | e | Ascention day. | 4 | A | ||
5 | d | 5 | f | 5 | b | |||
6 | e | 6 | g | 6 | c | |||
7 | f | 7 | A | 7 | d | |||
8 | g | 8 | b | 8 | e | |||
9 | A | 9 | c | 9 | f | |||
10 | b | 10 | d | 10 | g | |||
11 | c | 11 | e | 11 | A | Barnabe apostle. | ||
12 | d | 12 | f | 12 | b | |||
13 | e | 13 | g | 13 | c | |||
14 | f | 14 | A | Whitsunday. | 14 | d | . | |
15 | g | 15 | b | S. Isidore archbish. of Seuill. | 15 | e | ||
16 | A | 16 | c | 16 | f | |||
17 | b | 17 | d | 17 | g | |||
18 | c | 18 | e | 18 | A | |||
19 | d | 19 | f | 19 | b | |||
20 | e | 20 | g | 20 | c | |||
21 | f | 21 | A | 21 | d | |||
22 | g | 22 | b | 22 | e | |||
23 | A | S. George matyre. | 23 | c | 23 | f | ||
24 | b | 24 | d | 24 | g | S. John Baptist. | ||
25 | c | S. Marke Euang. | 25 | e | 25 | A | ||
26 | d | 26 | f | 26 | b | |||
27 | e | 27 | g | 27 | c | |||
28 | f | 28 | A | 28 | d | |||
29 | g | 29 | b | 29 | e | |||
30 | A | 30 | c | 30 | f | S. Peter and Paul. | ||
31 | d |
Iulie. | August. | September. | ||||||
1 | g | 1 | c | 1 | f | |||
2 | A | 2 | d | 2 | g | |||
3 | b | 3 | e | 3 | A | |||
4 | c | 4 | f | 4 | b | |||
5 | d | 5 | g | 5 | c | |||
6 | e | 6 | A | Transfigu. of our Lord | 6 | d | ||
7 | f | 7 | b | 7 | e | |||
8 | g | 8 | c | 8 | f | The natiuitie of our | ||
9 | A | 9 | d | 9 | g | Ladie. | ||
10 | b | 10 | e | Saint Laurence. | 10 | A | ||
11 | c | 11 | f | 11 | b | |||
12 | d | 12 | g | S. Clare virgin. | 12 | c | ||
13 | e | 13 | A | 13 | d | |||
14 | f | 14 | b | 14 | e | |||
15 | g | 15 | c | Assumption of Ma | 15 | f | ||
16 | A | 16 | d | 16 | g | |||
17 | b | 17 | e | 17 | A | |||
18 | c | 18 | f | 18 | b | |||
19 | d | 19 | g | 19 | c | |||
20 | e | 20 | A | 20 | d | |||
21 | f | 21 | b | 21 | e | |||
22 | g | Marie Magdalen. | 22 | c | 22 | f | S. Matthewe apo. | |
23 | A | 23 | d | 23 | g | |||
24 | b | 24 | e | S. Bartholomewe apostle. | 24 | A | ||
25 | c | Saint James. | 25 | f | 25 | b | ||
26 | d | Saint Anne. | 26 | c | 26 | e | ||
27 | e | Saint Christopher. | 27 | A | 27 | d | ||
28 | f | 28 | b | S. Austin. | 28 | e | ||
29 | g | 29 | c | The cutting off of saint John Baptist | 29 | f | S. Michael archan | |
30 | A | 30 | d | 30 | g | S. Jerome. | ||
31 | b | 31 | e | head. |
October. | Nouember. | December. | ||||||
1 | A | 1 | d | All Saintes day. | 1 | f | ||
2 | b | 2 | e | The remembrance | 2 | g | ||
3 | c | 3 | f | of them that are. | 3 | A | ||
4 | d | 4 | g | dead. | 4 | b | Saint Barbara. | |
5 | e | 5 | A | 5 | c | |||
6 | f | 6 | b | 6 | d | S. Nicholas bisho. | ||
7 | g | 7 | c | 7 | e | |||
8 | A | 8 | d | 8 | f | Conception of Ma. | ||
9 | b | 9 | e | 9 | g | |||
10 | c | 10 | f | 10 | A | |||
11 | d | 11 | g | Saint Martin. | 11 | b | ||
12 | e | 12 | A | 12 | c | |||
13 | f | 13 | b | 13 | d | S. Luce virgin. | ||
14 | g | 14 | c | 14 | e | |||
15 | A | 15 | d | 15 | f | |||
16 | b | 16 | e | 16 | g | |||
17 | c | 17 | f | 17 | A | |||
18 | d | S. Luke euangelist. | 18 | g | 18 | b | ||
19 | e | 19 | A | 19 | c | |||
20 | f | 20 | b | 20 | d | |||
21 | g | The xi. M. virgins. | 21 | c | 21 | e | S. Thomas apost. | |
22 | A | 22 | d | 22 | f | |||
23 | b | 23 | e | Saint Clement. | 23 | g | ||
24 | c | 24 | f | 24 | A | |||
25 | d | 25 | g | Saint Katheren. | 25 | b | ||
26 | e | 26 | A | 26 | c | Christmas day. | ||
27 | f | 27 | b | 27 | d | S. Steuen martyre. | ||
28 | g | S. Simon & Jude. | 28 | c | 28 | e | S. John euangelist. | |
29 | A | 29 | d | 29 | f | Holy Innocentes. | ||
30 | b | 30 | e | S. Andrew apostle. | 30 | g | ||
31 | c | 31 | A |
¶A Rule to knowe the Dominicall letter euery yeere.
FOr to knowe in what day of the weeke is euery feast of the yeere. It is necessarie you know what letter it is that serueth for sunday. This is to be knowen by the rules of the letters vnder written, in the which, the first letter which is D. serueth for the Dominicall letter, this yere of 1545 and so successiuely in euery yeere one letter serueth, and the two rules being ended, returne againe to the begining, and this is for euer. And it is to be noted that in the leape yeeres are two Dominicall letters. The letter aboue being vppermost serueth from the first day of Januarie, vnto y e xxv of Februarie, and the other vnto the end of the yeere. 1545. D C B. A F E D. C A G F. E C B A. G B D G E D C B G F E. D B A G. F F A C E
The eleuenth Chapter, wherein is declared howeby the Calender before written, a man may know the moneth, and the day wherein he is.
THe Philosopher saith, that the art doth emitate nature as much as hee may, Likewise the saide art many times helpeth the defects of nature, this is prooued, wherein we see that a man which by nature doth want his sight, the art doth help and remedy his want, that is, by looking on a payre of spectacles, whereby in such sort, the sight is gathered together, and is cause that he seeth, the which he doth not without thē for that it is scattered abroad. The selfe same which is said of the sight, may be said of the memory, that many times it lacketh in mē, but it is certain that in some it commeth by nature, but in others by their owne vncarefulnes that they forget themselues so much, that in things which standeth them much vpon, they take no heede. And concerning this I doe remember as we came sayling in a shippe, nienteene men, which were seuen passengers, and twelue mariners, and hauing bin many dayes at the sea, because the weather was contrary, there happened a cause whereby it was conuenient that the purser shuld write it downe in his booke for to giue reason thereof when time should serue, [Page 56] and he with the other that were there, knewe not what day of the moneth it was, nor there was any y t had it in his remembrance, nor knew what day was the first day of the moneth, vntil I told him, nor any booke in the ship to looke in whereby it might be knowen. And this being brought for my purpose, I say that here before hath bene declared. that one of the thinges which ought to be seene and knowen, for to take the altitude of the sunne, is the declination or distance which it hath that day from the equinoctiall line, for not knowing the declination how much it is, the said altitude can not be knowen, whereby it is necessary that y e Pilote or any other person which shal take the said altitude should knowe in what moneth he is in, and howe many dayes of the moneth it is, without hauing any errour or want therein. And because of that as I haue spoken of before, which happened, it may happen the like in others, or likewise if hee that taketh the altitude be alone, or with little company, and do not remember the reckoning aforesayde, for this it seemeth to me to be a conuenient thing to helpe the memorie by putting here the calender before written, wherby may be kept a certaine remembrance & a reckoning of the moneth and day wherein he is, by looking what day euerye moneth beginneth, without any need to aske it of any. And because such as do goe by some wayes which hath not much used it, are accustomed to set marks to know it the better. So in this Calender, for the better knowledge thereof, I haue put marks which are y e saints daies. Therfore I saye to knowe what day in the weeke is euery holy day of them aforesayde. The letters must be seene which standeth before those daies of euery moneth, & see what letter of these serueth in this yere for sunday, and is called the the Dominicall letter, which shall bee knowen by the rule afore written, and being knowen, to stay in it which is sunday, & in another which is next mūday, & in the other tewsday. And so al the seuen dayes of the weeke named by the seuen letters ABCDEFG. And by reckoning in this maner, see what day is the letter that is next to the holy day, and in that yeere that is the proper day of such a feast, the leape yeeres as before hath beene declared, haue two dominicall letters, the one serueth vnto y e xxv day of Februarie, and the other vnto the ende of the yeere.
¶The fifth booke of the Altitude of the Poles.
The first Chapter, what thing a pole is, and how betweene the two poles the roundnesse of the worlde is deuided.
THis name pole sometimes is taken for all y e heauen, and at other times for y e ends of the heauens, & so the poles are vnderstood here, by the two ends of one Ex, which is imagined, wherevpon y e heauens doe moue. These poles are not seen but are imagined, and they are imagined to be in y e first moueable. In this manner, the roundnesse of the worlde is called Sphera, as before hath been declared: in y e middest of y e which, according to the definition of Theodosio, is a point which is called Center, this poynt is taken in two sortes, one according to the truth, and of this speaketh Euclides in the beginning of the Booke entituled De Elementis, It is a poynte which hath no parte, in another sorte, this poynt is taken respectiuely, and so
the earth to [...] of the heauen is a [...] which is [...] the [...] of the worlde, so saieth the Philosopher [...] fourth of the natural philosophie [...]ing that by the middest of this [...] the [...] partes whereof doe [...] or teach [...] [...] this [...] whiche some doe call Diameter, is called the Ex of the Sphe [...]a, & the endes of this line are called poles. There is a difference betweene the Ex, & the Diameter, although y t many times the one is takē for the other because a Diameter properly is called any manner of line, whiche deuideth any body into 2, equal parts, [Page] but the Ex is called a line, set in both p [...]les, in the whiche is imagined that some body turntth it selfe in circle manner, of the which doth followe, that in the heauen is no more then one Ex: and there are an infinite number of Dia [...]ers imagined. Therefore I say that those endes of the Ex are called poles, the one is called Articke, and the other Antarticke, and in the middest of these two poles all the roundnesse of y e world is deuided into fiue partes, and the Astronomers and Philosophers doe call them Zonas, & they are deuided in this manner. The first zone is from the pole articke, vnto the circle articke, and this hath in latitude twentie three degrees, and thirtie three minutes. The seconde from the circle articke to the Tropike of Cancer, hath in latitude fortie two degrees, & fiftie foure minutes. The third from the Tropike of Cancer, to the tropike of Capricorne, hath in latitude forty seuē degrees & sixe minutes. The fourth from the tropike of Capricorne, to y e circle Antarticke, hath in latitude fortie & two degrees, and fiftie foure minutes. The fifth from the circle Antarticke to the pole Antarticke, hath in latitude, twentie three degrees, and thirtie three minutes: so that from one pole to the other, are a hundreth and fourescore degrees.
These Zonas the first is called Septentrionall, the second solstitiall, the thirde Equinoctiall, the fourth [...]emall, the fifth Australl. And it is to bee noted, that these two poles▪ the one is superiour, and the other is inferiour. And according to Albertus the great in the second booke of the heauen, & the world, the first treatie, y e sixe chapter, they are to bee considered in this manner, in as much as toucheth the moouing of the circle of the fired starres.
The pole Antarticke is the superiour, and the pole Articke is the inferiour, and according to the circle of the Planets, the pole Articke is the Superiour, and the Antarticke the inferiour, and it is to be vnderstood that such as dwell in the Equinoctiall line, onely the place of the one pole they see, and so we doe onely see in the heauen, the place where wee imagine the one pole to be: & this is called Articks, likewise Septeritrional, or Boreal: It is called Articke, because it is neere to the image called Arture. It is called Septentrionall, by the seuen starres of the Vrsa minor, whiche doth mooue round about the sayde pole. It is called Boreall by the winde Boreas, which we cal North. The other pole is called Antartico, which is against, as though it were put contrarye or opposite to the Articke, and Australl, because from that part commeth the winde called Austro: it is also called Meridionall, because it is towardes the parte of the middest of the day, it is to bee vnderstood, that it standeth towards the parte of the middest of the day to suche as doe dwell towardes the North, out of the tropicke of Cancer, because in all times of the yeere at the middest of the daye, wee haue the Sunne towardes that parte▪
The seconde chapter, how the altitude of o [...] the pole Articke is to be taken, and of the effect wherefore he is taken.
THe P [...]ot or an [...] other person that will take the Altitude of the pole articke, which cōmonly we call the Altitude of the North, let him take his Ballestila or quadrāt, or the instrument that he hath most vsed, let him take the altitude of the sayde starre, as precisely as hee can, and for the better taking thereof, let him put himselfe neere to the maste of the [...], [...]there shall [...] feele lead [...] all the moouing a [...] the [...]. And it in to [...], that the altitude of y s [...]ole to token, to know y e distāce of the degrees, that are [...] hori [...]d vnto the p [...]le, [...] there degrees beeyng knowne, is knowne how many degrees [Page 58] are from him which taketh the altitude vnto the Equinoctiall line, and it is knowne in this manner. The pole articke, or the antarticke either of them, is distant from the Equinoctiall line, ninety degrees, therefore let him looke that taketh the altitude how many degrees he hath raysed the pole vpon the Horizon, & he shall vnderstand, that the selfesame degrees are frō the place where he is vnto y e Equinoctial line, so that if hee be vnder the Equinoctiall, hee shall not take altitude of any of the poles, because he shall haue them in the Horizon. But beeing come foorth of the Equinoctiall, how much he is distant from her, so much hee shall haue the one pole raised vp, and the other put downe, so that how many degrees hee is distant from the line, in so many he shall take the altitude of that pole, towardes [...]he parte where he is. For so many, hee hath raysed vpon him his Herizon, In such sort, that if he tooke the altitude of the pole in tenne degrees, the sayde tenne degrees hee is distant of the Equinoctiall, & if in twentie, twentie, and so the rest. In such sorte, that whensoeuer the altitude of the pole is taken, looking by her the degrees that are raysed vpon the Horizon, the selfe same he which taketh the altitude is distant from the Equinoctiall line.
The thirde Chapter, howe the reckoning whiche is taken of the height of the pole articke or North is, to bee vnderstood.
IT hath beene declared in y e chapter before this, that how many degrees are taken of the altitude of the pole, so many is he which taketh her distant of the Equinoctiall line, because for this effect to know the distance of the sayde line, the sayde altitude is taken, therefore in this present, I will speake how this altitude which is taken of the pole is to bee vnderstood. Of the which it is to bee vnderstood, that when a man is in the Equinoctiall line, he hath both poles in the Horizon, as before hath beene declared, and by how muche hee is going from the sayde line, and comming towardes the pole articke or North pole, which is this that wee speake of, by so much the sayde pole goeth rising vpon his Horizon, so that if the man bee distant of the line twentie degrees, the same twentie hee hath the pole, aboue his Horizon. Of this is to be noted, that the degrees which are taken of the altitude of the pole, are not to bee vnderstoode of those whiche are from him, that taketh the altitude vnto to the pole it selfe: But it is to be vnderstood, that those haue gone raysing vp the saide pole aboue his Horizon. For because like as in the altitude of the sunne, is not noted how much the sunne is raysed aboue him that taketh his altitude, but it is to be seene, howe muche he is raysed aboue the Horizon, whiche is seene by these degrees, which are taken in the Astrolabio, so that in the altitude of the North, it is not to be looked, howe muche the pole is risen vpon him, which taketh his altitude, but y t which hee is risen aboue his Horizon, in such sorte, that to knowe the height of the pole, there is no account or reckoning, to bee taken betweene him that taketh it and the pole, but the reckoning is betweene the pole and the Horizon. For if the man shoulde keepe reckoning with the pole, it woulde be said in this manner, from the Equinoctiall line, to the pole, are nienty degrees, therefore if he which taketh the altitude is twenty degrees, distant frō the Equinoctial line: then it shoulde bee threescore and tenne degrees from the pole, and woulde say, seeyng I am in seuentie degrees of altitude, I am so manye from the pole.
This ought not to bee vnderstood so, for it woulde bee a verye great errour, so muche that beeyng in twentie degrees of altitude, hee that should so make his reckoning, shoulde make that he were in seuentie. But let the [Page] reckoning be kept, as aforesayde, which is, that how many degrees I doe take of altitude with my Ballestisa, or other instrumēt: these haue I raised the pole, not aboue me, but aboue my Horizon, & the selfe same degrees am I distant of the Equinoctiall line.
The fourth Chapter, of the North starre, and of the guardes of his moouing.
THE North starre beeyng very well seene and knowne of al the saylers, is the first of y e 7. starres, which y t Vrsa minor doth set in order, and commō ly he is called Bozina. These 7. starres doe seeme cleere & bright, & three of thē are like to a halfe circle, & the other 4. like to a quadrangle in this manner.
The seuen starres doe alwayes mooue rounde about the pole, describing their circl [...]s from the East into the West, and alwayes in one selfe distance one with the other, and in euery foure and twentie houres they geue a turne about the pole. But as the North starre is more neere the pole, then any of the others, his turne is lesser and done with more [...]eysute, then any of the other starres: because howe muche more euery starre goeth farther of from the pole, so much the greater circumserence hee maketh, and so much the hastier hee mooueth. Therefore I say, that by this statre of the North is knowne, howe much the altitude is, which the pole hath vpon the Horizon: In suche sorte, that although the pole is seene, yet by this starre is knowne the place where the pole is, the whiche is knowen by an other starre of the same seuen, the most shyning. Of the two called guardes, which are in the moneth of the Bozina, [Page 59] which star is called the formest guarde, and also he is called the horologial star, because hee goeth alwayes like to a whele of a clocke, giuing to vnderstand in all times of the yeere, what houre of y e night it is, by that reckoning, that is called the middest of Aprill, midnight in the head. And note ye, that between the north starre, and the guardes, is alwayes the pole, in suche sorte, that when the guardes are aboue the pole, the north starre is vnder, and so contrary, seeing by y e course or place where the guards are, is knowen to what part of the pole, and in what distance of him, the sayde starre is.
The fifth Chapter, howe that according to the course wherein the guardes are, is knowen howe many degrees the north starre is vnder or aboue the pole.
IT hath beene declared in the chapter going before, that the north starre moueth him selfe rounde about the pole, and that likewise the two starres called the guards, doe make their mouing rounde about the saide starre, and of the pole. By the which it is necessarie to know, in what course the guards are in, with the saide starre, because with this, wil be knowne by the rules here vnder written, in what course the saide starre is in with the pole, as also howe many degrees he is vnder or aboue him: for the which knowledge, the rules following are so be looked on, in the which is to bee noted that besides the rules of the principall windes, you shal finde rules for the half [...] partes, because the saide altitude more easely at any houre of the night may bee taken.
The which rules goe set with their figures in such sort, that in euery course that the guards are in, may be knowne likewise in what course the saide north starre is in, it is ordayned in the maner following.
The guardes in the east, themost fore guarde is with the north starre, east and west, and the sayde starre a degree and a halfe vnder the pole.
The guardes in the east northeast, the north starre is three degrees vnder the pole.
The guardes in the northeast, the one guarde is with the other east and west, and the north starre is three degrees and a halfe vnder the pole.
[Page 60] The guardes in the north northeast, the north starre is three degrees and a halfe vnder the pole.
The guardes in the north, the formost guarde is with the north starre north and south, and the sayd starre [...] three degrees vnder the pole.
The guardes in the north north [...]est, the north starre is two degrees [...] [...]r the pole.
[Page] The guardes in the northwest, the one guarde is with the other north & south, the sayd starre is halfe a degree vnder the pole.
The guardes in the west northwest, the north starre is one degree aboue the pole.
The guardes in the west, and formost guarde is with the north starre east and west, and the sayde starre is a degree and a halfe aboue the pole.
[Page 61] The guardes in the West Southwest, the North starre is three degrees aboue the pole.
The guardes in the Southwest, the one guarde is by the other East and West, and the North starre is three degrees and a halfe aboue the pole.
The guards in the South Southwest, the North starre is three degrees aboue the pole.
[Page] The guardes in the South, the North starre is with y e foremost guard, North and South, and the sayde starre is three degrees aboue the pole.
The guards in the South, Southeast, the North starre is two degrees aboue the pole.
The guards in the Southeast, the one guarde is by the other North, and South, and the North starre is halfe a degree aboue the pole.
[Page 62] The guardes in the East Southeast, the north starre is halfe a degree vnder the pole.
The sixt Chapter, howe the rules of the altitude of the North starre ought to be applied, and howe they ought to be put to, or taken away, according to the place where the guardes are.
THerefore when you take the altitude of the pole, looke in what place the guardes are, & by them you shall vnderstande if the north star be vnder or aboue the pole, as it is sayde. And marke, if the starre be vnder, you shall ioyne with the altitude that you take, those degrees that are vnder and altogether so much is your altitude: and if the star be aboue the pole, you shall take away from the altitude that you tooke, y e degrees that the star is aboue, & that which remaineth, is the altitude wherin you are.
Example.
I say the guardes being in the northeast, you tooke xl. degrees of altitude; ioyne with these xl. three degrees and a half, that the starre is vnder the pole▪ which doth amount to fourtie three degrees and a half, this is your altitude▪ and if the guardes bee in the southwest, take a way of the fourtie degrees, three and a halfe that y e star is ouer the pole, there doth rest thirty sixe & a half and this is the altitude wherin you [...] to that when the star is vnder the poles you shall ioyne with the altitude those degrees that he is vnder, and when he is aboue, you shal take away y e degrees y t he is aboue, & so you shall make your account iust, and you shall knowe the place where you are.
The seuenth Chapter, wherein be declared certain doubts that in this mouing of the north starre may be had.
IN the third chapter of this fifth book hath bin said, that the starres which are nere to y e pole, do moue thē selues more slowly then they that are farre off, & it seemeth y t of this may be a doubt, because y t euery thing which mooueth their parts in rule, do moue so equally, that one moueth not more siow, nor the other more hasty. And as al the heauen doth moue equally, as y e sight both manifest it, and so is the beginning of Astronomy, that the mouing of euery day is in rule, whereby it ought to bee said, that the parts of heauē do moue equally, & not the one part more slowly then y e other Likwise this is proued because that one self intelligence, moueth al the circle and all his partes seeing that the parts nerest to the pole, are lesse then those which are far off, therfore the said intelligence hath a greater proportion vpon thē, and of the great proportion cōmeth greater swiftnes, whereby may be saide, that the parts which are most nere to the pole, do moue more speedely or with m [...] hast then the others.
Item, in the fifth chapter of the first [Page] booke hath been declared how the heauen is round, and seeing that it is so, it may be said, that in y e heauen is no part from aboue the pole, nor part vnder the pole, because that all round bodies, naturally haue no part high nor lowe: for if one parte were more high or lowe then the other, then the body should not be rounde, whereby it seemeth, that it cannot bee saide, that the starre of the North, nor the guardes are in no time vnder nor aboue the pole.
The third doubt is, that likewise we say, that the North starre doth geue an equall turne rounde about the pole, and seeing it is so, that it is equall: wherefore at sometimes is he distaunt of the pole vnder or aboue halfe a degree, and at other times three degrees and a halfe.
To that which is saide in the first doubt, all the Philosophers and Astronomers are agaynst, for that al of them holde that the pole mooueth not, but is fixed, and vpon him all the partes of heauen doe moue in circle manner and in such sort, y t that which is neere, mooueth slowlie, and that which is farre of, moueth with more haste, wherby that which mooueth it selfe by the Equinoctiall, because that there it is farthest of, there the moouing is more hastie, then in any other part, and this sheweth it selfe by experience. We see in the moouing of a wheele, that the Ex standeth still, and alwayes remayneth in one place, and all the partes of the wheele doe cōpasse it about, of the which, those partes that are neere to the Ex, goe more slowly, and those that are farther of they moue with more hastie mouing, so the vppermost part of the wheele his moouing is more hastie then any of the other partes: as Aristotle sheweth it in the Mechanica.
To that which is saide, that the heauen mooueth it selfe equally, it is to be vnderstood in equallitie of time, but not in equality of place, in such sort, that in equall time they make their partes in equall moouing, because these parts cannot of continuance [...] by thēselues. A continuance is that whose mouing is one, and is to be vnderstood wholly together: so that it cannot be, that at one time one parte is mooued, & at another time another, but at the mouing of one parte, all the other partes, and all together are mooued: so that when the Heauen mooueth, because his moouing is a pure mouing, of his place to his mouing all the partes doe moue place.
Item although that one selfe intelligence doe moue the partes of the poles & likewise the others, which are more distant, because all be continuall, they are mooued together. And it is so, because these partes are not put asunder, nor deuided y e one from the other. And if they were it is certayne that the lesser partes should mooue more hastily then the greater partes, the which is not because the sayd intelligence doth mooue them together, & the moouer hath his proportion to all, and not to part.
And this is manifest, because in the continuall moueable, there are partes of an infinite smalnesse, for that to any part that is marked maye bee geuen a lesser.
To the second doubt which is in the rounde bodie, that there is no part high nor lowe: truth it is, that naturally there is not, respectiuely there is. And to saye that the North starre is sometime aboue the pole, and at other times vnder, it is to be vnderstood, not naturally, but to our respect, and so hee that were in such a place, that had y • pole for Cenith: the North starre should not be from him more high nor more lowe, at one time then at another. But to him whose Cenith is not vnder the pole in the mouing which the starre maketh at some time, he wilbee vnder the pole, & at other t [...]es aboue and to know how the North starre is vnder or aboue the pole, doe you imagine the f [...]ure of a [...]an in the pole articke, which hauing his face towardes the middest of the day, and beyng so put, the left arme shalbee towardes the East, and the right towardes the West, therefore [Page 63] when the North starre doth goe from the left to the right, which is from the East towardes the West by the heade which maketh the halfe of his circle, wee saye that hee is aboue the pole, because then the pole is betweene the starre and the Horizon, so there are more degrees, from the Horizon to the starre, then to the pole: and when he goeth from the right arme to the lefte, which is from the West to the East, in the other halfe turne that he maketh by the foote, we say, that hee is vnder the pole, because then the starre wilbee betweene the pole and the Horizon, and then there are more degrees from the Horizon to the pole, then to the starre, as appeareth by this figure.
And so it is to bee vnderstood, that the North starre to bee vnder or aboue the pole.
To the third is to be noted, that the north starre doth goe rounde about the pole, but although the turne, which hee geueth, be in equall roundnes, he goeth distant from the pole, more in one place then in another, this is to be vnderstod not as much as toucheth y e roundnes, but as muche as toucheth the straightnesse of the pole, in this manner.
When the star is in any of the armes of the east or of the west, then hee is neither more high nor more low then the pole but in one equallitie with him.
And for as muche as toucheth his turne, hee goeth from the sayde armes, by the part of the head, or by the part of the foote, so much he goeth aside of, from the straightnesse of y e pole. In such sort, that when he is in y e head, is, whē he is farthest of the pole, by y e vppermost part: and when hee is in the foote, is, when hee is farthest of by the lower parte, the whiche is not to bee vnderstood, that the circumference is greater in the head or the foote, then in the other partes.
But vnto our respect is that whiche he goeth distant aboue or vnder y e pole as here it is shewed.
The eight Chapter, howe the altitude of the North, is to be taken, although the guards be not seene.
IT happeneth manye times to such as bee saylers, whē they goe neere the Equinoctiall by reason the pole is neere to their Horizon, they see not wholly the turne which the guards doe make, round about the pole, so that when the guards doe descend from the West; and goe towardes the East, in all those courses of the west Southwest, South West South Southwest, South, South Southeast, Southeast, East Southeast, they cannot take the altitude, because he is not seene whē y e [Page] guardes doe come to euery one of these sayd courses. And for this in this chapter shalbee declared, howe it shalbee knowen, when the guardes doe come to euery one of these courses aforesayde, & taking the altitude how much it is that iustly shalbe taken away from the altitude, according to the place where the starre is, is to be vnderstood, y t which is aboue the pole: for the which it is to bee noted, y t besides the two starres which we call guards, which before haue been spoken of, there are other three starres, whiche goe well neere in the same distance, that the guardes goe in, that goe rounde about the North starre: and although the guardes be not seene, yet by these three starres, or by any of them, the altitude of the pole is to bee knowne, as well as by the guardes, which is to be knowne in this manner. These three starres which before are spoken of, are called the third, the sixt, and the nienth, and although they haue other names, these names wee name them by, because it maketh for our purpose, and the reason is, because y e starre, which we call Tercera, or thirde starre, goeth three houres, which is one course or winde before the foremost guard: and the Sesta or sixe, two courses or winds which are sixe houres: and the Nouena or nienth, three courses or windes which are nine houres. And to know these starres, doe you note that y e third starre hath neere to him other two starres, and all three doe make well neere one triangle, in this manner.
This starre whensoeuer that the foremost guard is in the head, then is she in the Northeast, and if the guard be in the West, then is she in y e Northwest, and if the guarde bee the South, then is she in the Southwest, & so it is to bee vnderstood of the other courses, that alwayes he goeth one winde behinde the guarde.
The sixt is one starre alone, the which goeth wel neere as distant of the North starre as the guards.
This starre goeth two windes behinde the guarde, so that if the guarde be in the head, she is in the East, and if the guarde be in the West, shee is in the North, and so it is to bee vnderstood in the other courses.
The nienth is one starre alone which is neerer to the North starre, then the guards, this starre goeth three windes behinde the guarde, so that if the guard be in the West, shee is in the Northeast, and so contrary.
And these three starres being knowne, although the guardes bee not seene, by these or by any of thē is to bee knowen, in what course the guardes are in reckoning the courses in the manner, as it hath beene declared: the whiche rule I haue had experience of, and haue found it certayne.
The nienth Chapter, how the altitude of the North, is to be taken, although the Horizon be not seene.
IT happeneth manye times to suche as sayle, that they cannot take y e altitude of the North, because they cannot see the Horizon. This is because either the earth doth couer it, or [Page 64] some cloude or vapour which riseth of the water, or it maketh so much darknesse, that it cannot bee discerned, or for some other cause. And howe to know y e Horizon is a thing so necessary, that lacking it the altitude of the North cannot any manner of way bee taken with the Ballestilla of this cause the saylers receiue very great hurte, for that manye times it happeneth to them, to passe many dayes without taking the altitude and most of all in the winter.
Therefore to take away this hurte & inconuenience, I will declare in this present Chapter, in what manner the sayde altitude may bee taken although the Horizon be not seene, the which is this. The pilot or other person, that shoulde take this altitude, let him take a staffe or rodde of the greathes of a finger little more or lesse, and so high, that beeyng put vpright in the grounde, it come iustly to his sight, and beeyng made of this greatnesse, no more nor lese: let him make at the toppe of it a Crosse, and when hee will take the altitude, let him ioyne his feete together, and laye downe the rodde straight and equall from the poynt of his feete, as farre as the rodde will reache, and let him make two poyntes, the one where he hath his feete, and the other as farre as the rodde doth reache, and in that poynt where the rodde doth reach, there doe you take him vp, and let some bodye holde him vpright, and the Ballestilla beeyng taken his feete beeyng put in the poynt that he first had them put, let him take his altitude, making the Horizon in the highest parte of the rodde or staffe where hee marked the Crosse. And yee shall vnderstand that this is his Horizon, wheresoeuer hee findeth himselfe. And it is to be noted, that if the night were as darke, that y e highest parte of the rodde cannot bee seene. That which I haue saide is his Horizon, then put vpon the toppe of the rodde, a signe or shew of fire, by the sight of the which hee may hit to put his Ballestilla right with the sayd rod, and so he shall take his altitude precisely doing in the rest, to take away or put to the degrees, according to the place wherein the guardes are, as before hath beene declared.
The tenth chapter, of a clocke by the north starre whereby may bee knowne what houre of the night it is, in any [...] anner of time and place that a man is in.
IN the third Chapter of this fifth booke, I sayd, y t the foremost guard is called horologial, because he goeth alwaies round about the North starre, like to the wheele of a clocke geuing knowledge what houre of the night it is. And because this knowledge bringeth much profite, and it is conuenient that euery one should know it, therfore in this present Chapter, I will speake howe it should be knowne in any manner of place, whersoeuer a mā is, & in any time of the yeere, what houre of the night it is, and for to know it, is to bee noted that which followeth.
First of all, looke vpon the North starre and imagine vpon him a Crosse in this manner.
Of this crosse the vppermost part, we cal head, and the lower most part foote, and the other two the right arme, and the left, in this manner.
This being had, is to be vnderstood, that betweene these foure courses or strekes, wee put other foure which doe deuide or parte these in the middest which wee call lines, in this manner.
So that there is a line betweene the right arme and the head, and a line betweene the head and the left arme, and a line betweene the left arme and the foote, & a line betweene the foote and the right arme: this imagination beeing made, it is to be vnderstood, that y e greater starre of y e two guardes, which is the foremost, which before hath been named the starre of y e clocke, this starre in twenty foure houres doth passe these eight partes, tarrying three houres frō the one to the other. So that it at xii. of the clocke in the night, hee bee in the head at three, hee shalbe in the line betweene the head and the left arme, and at sixe in the sayd arme, & in that sorte, the rest is to be reckoned.
Of this doth remayne, that beeing knowne in what part this starre should be when it is midnight, foorthwith wil be seene, y t if he be there it is mydnight, and if he be not come thither it is not, & if he be past, it is more then mydnight. For this, it is necessary to knowe two thinges: the one is, to know in euerie moneth of the yeere, in what parte the guarde starre ought to bee in, to knowe when it is mydnight: & the other, howe it is to bee knowne, what houre it is, more or lesse thē mydnight. Of the first this is to be noted, y t the accoūt or reckoning, that is to bee vsed in this, is, that at the middest of the moneth of Aprill, when it is mydnight, then the sayde guarde starre will be in the head, with the North starre, and from thence forwarde euery fifteene dayes, the middle of the night, is one houre forwarde: for in euery day hee goeth forwarde foure poyntes or minutes, and geuing to euery houre threescore poyntes, so that it commeth to passe in euery fifteene daies one houre forwarde. But in this I say that I haue made experiēce sometimes with clockes of precise houres, and setting them punctually, at the poynt that the Sunne setteth, and I finde that vnto the twentie daye of Aprill, the guarde and the starre, doe come precisely at mydnight in opposite, but because the difference is little: I doe followe the order of the figure following. To the seconde is to bee noted, as before hath beene declared, that in euery three houres the starre called the guarde, doth passe from one course to another, by the whiche there is to bee deuided with the imaginatiue, that space in three partes, and euery parte of space will be one houre. In such sort, that the place of the guarde starre beeyng knowen where hee shoulde bee at mydnight, is to bee knowne, if hee be [Page 65] there, or if hee bee one houre, two, or three, behinde or before, and so it wilbe knowen what houre it is: and to know in what parte the guarde is in at midnight, euery halfe moneth of the yeere, it must bee seene in this figure of following.
The eleuenth Chapter, how the altitude of the pole, antarticke is to be taken.
SEeing there hath beene declared the altitude of y e pole articke, or North with his demonstratiōs, it is conuenient to speake of the altitude of the pole antarticke, how he should be knowne, because the saylers or any other person finding himselfe towardes the South parte▪ they may know how to take him, and to gouerne themselues thereby. Of [...] is to be knowen, that the tokens or knowledge, that we haue of y e pole antarticke, are foure starres, put Crosse wise in this manner.
These starres be not of any of y e signes of the Zodiacke, nor of the other thirtie sixe images of the heauen, therfore they are called Cruzero, and these foure [Page] starres we name, head, foote, & armes, and to know which starre is the head, and which are those of the other parts, is to be vnderstood, that the starre of the foote is greater then any of the others, & by this, the other are knowne.
Therefore it is to be noted, that whē these foure starres are a crosse, the head being right with the foote, that then y e greater starre which is the foote, is more neere the Horizon, and then he is distant of the pole antarticke thirtie degrees aboue the sayde pole, and the altitude of this starre is taken, and of no other: And hee is to be taken when he is in right of the head, for there is his owne place. Therefore when you will knowe the altitude of the saide pole, doe you stay vntill the starre of the foote, be in his place, because with the moouing of the heauen, hee mooueth with the others, and being in his place, then take his altitude, euen as you take that of the North, and looke that the altitude which you take of him, either they must be thirty degrees or more or lesse, if they be thirtie [...]ust, you are in the Equinoctiall: If they be more then thirtie, those whiche are more, you are distant of the line towardes the part of the South, & if they be lesse then thirtie, that which is lesse you are distant of the line towards the part of the North.
An Example.
I say that the saide starre beeing in his place, I tooke his altitude in fortie degrees, then I say that I am in tenne degrees, distant of the line towards the part of the south, the reason is, because this saide starre hath thirtie degrees of declination or distance of the pole, therfore if I had taken him in the saide thirtie degrees, then should I haue had the pole in the Horizon, and hauing the pole in the Horizon, I am in the Equinoctiall, and so the degrees, which are more then thirtie, in the which I tooke the altitude those am I distant of the line towardes the parte of the South: for thirtie from the starre to the pole, and tenne from the pole to the Horizon, are forty, in so many tooke I the altitude, so that these tenne degrees, is the pole raised aboue my horizon, so that by howe muche, I shalbe distant of the line, so muche the pole shall rise vp aboue my horizon, and in so many more degrees, I shal take y e altitude of the saide starre and the thirtie being taken out, whiche the starre is aboue the pole, those which are more, I am distant of the line towardes the sayde pole, and so many shall the saide pole be raised aboue my horizon, and if I should take the altitude in twentie, I am distant of the line tenne degrees towards the part of y e North, and if I shoulde take him in tenne, I am distant twenty, and if I should take him in fiue, I am distant twentie fiue, & if I had the saide starre in the horizon, I am distant thirtie degrees of the said line, towards the part of the North, so that when I shall take him in thirtie degrees, I am in the Equinoctiall, and when in lesse, towards the part of the North, and when in more, towards the part of the South.
❧The sixt booke, of the Compasses to sayle by.
The first Chapter, of the Compasses to sayle by, and of the defectes which they may haue, and how they may be amended.
THe instrument that moste precisely and with greatest perfection, the pylot ought alwayes to haue, is the Cōpasse to saile withall, for that no instrument so muche as this doth shewe the way, that hee shoulde make. And likewise because the other instrumentes, without this are to little effect, and this without the others doe profit much: and so the compasse among other instrumēts of y e nauigatiō, may be compared to the sight of a man, among the other senses. And seeing that this instrument is so delicate and subtile, it happeneth that for small occasion he cō meth to haue defect in such sort, that he cānot serue. Therfore in this Chapter,
I wil speake of the defectes that a compasse may haue, and how the pylot hauing necessitie, may amend it. For the which is to be noted, y t for one of these sixe causes, the Compasse cannot iudge the North.
The first is, by the stiles not beeing well touched with the Lodestone, that he lacketh the vertue. And this ceasing whiche is the cause, the effect ceasseth, [Page] which is to shew the North.
The seconde, because the capitall is wrested, and not vpright, that he doth not suffer the rose to goe right in his steppe.
The thirde, because the steppe is brode, so that the rose cannot moue with quickenesse.
The fourth, because the rose lieth downe, and hangeth more to one side then to another.
The fifth, because the chest of the rose is open, in such sort that the aire entreth into it.
The sixt, if the sphere or the hinges, whe [...]eby the said boxe or chest is sustained, are not so light that the chest and the rose may goe equall.
To the first, the pilot ought to carrie in his chest a Lodestone, & that he haue experience that it be good, and with the face thereof to rubbbe or touch y e points of the cōpasse subtlely vntil there cleaue to it, a little of the saide stone, & see that it be with the face of the said stone, the which hee ought to haue marked, to which parte it is, for if it bee with another part it maketh not the true effect.
To the second, which is the capital to be layde downe, for to know when it is so, take a cōpasse & put the one point in y e head of the capitall, and the other in one of the circles of y e rose, & therby you shal know to which part he is wrested, & how much it is needful to dresse him, & it is to be vnderstood, that if the capital be not very vpright, the rose wil put him cleane out of his place, although he be very well touched.
To the third, if the steppe bee broade or flat, he ought to be finely filed, so that it be seene, y t the rose run not hastie nor to slowly, and if by [...]yling of him, it bee seene that the rose doth run ouer much, touch him subtilly with some yrō in the poynt, y t he may be somewhat brode, so that the rose may run ordinately.
To the fourth, if the rose goe somewhat laide downe, & doe not goe very equall, you may put to him some waxe, or pitche▪ or a thing that may cleaue fast to him in the vnder part, vntill that hee goe vpright, without leaning to one part more then to the other.
To the fifth, he ought to look that the boxe or chest where the rose goeth be so neere, that there goe not in any ayre as well by the parte of the glasse, as by the parte whiche is shutte, and if it bee open in anye parte, with the sayd waxe or pitch, it ought to be shutte.
To the sixt, I saye that hee ought so looke to the Sphera or hinges, wherein the said chest or boxe goeth put, vpon the which it is sustayned or helde vp that it bee so good and light that the sayde boxe or chest goe alwayes equall, in suche sorte, that although the shippe doe hilde or doe lye downe to one side or to the other, the sayde boxe and rose bee alwayes right, for if the yrons, wherein they mooue, be hurt they cause that when the shippe doth hilde to one side or other, the boxe and the rose cannot iudge the North in his proper place.
So that it is conuenient that the sayde Compasse or needle bee precisely made without hauing defecte or lacke, or if there bee any inconuenience, although it bee verie little, it causeth muche errour.
The seconde Chapter, how the windes of the Compasse ought to bee vnderstood, and how the sunne passeth euery day by them.
IT is necessary, that the pilot vnderstande two thinges in his compasse, the one is, how the East & West, which are marked in the Compasse ought to be vnderstood.
The seconde, howe that in euery foure and twentie houres, the Sunne doth passe all the courses of the Compasse.
To the first is to bee noted, that this name East and West is taken two wayes, (that is to say) natural and respectiue: the East and West is naturall, and is vnderstood by the Equinoctiall [Page 67] line, & not by any other part, because it is y e middest betweene the two extreame partes, (that is to say) the two poles, as his definition declareth.
The respectiue is by any other manner of parte where a man is, now neare the line, now farre off, so that if a man be fiue degrees from the line, or tenne, or more or lesse, all that he is in the same degrees, hee shall be towardes the east and respectiue towardes the west, in such sorte, that all that hee is from the place, where the Sunne riseth to the Meridian where the man is, hee shal be towardes the east, and that which hee is from the man vnto the place where the sunne setteth, hee shal be towardes the west, and this likewise, is to be vnderstoode being in the equinoctial, as also foorth of the equinoctiall.
An example.
Of this may be asked, if the citie Seuill be towardes the east or west, that is, towardes Leuante or Poniente, it is answered, that it is not in the east & west naturall, and as much as toucheth the respectiue, it is towardes the east, and it is towardes the west, I will say, that likewise it is towardes the Leuante, & it is towards the Poniente, in this manner. Of that which it is most occidental is towardes Leuante, and of that which is most orientall, is towardes the Poniente, so that if Seuill bee in thirtie seuē degrees of the equinoctial, towards the part of the north, all that it is in the right course of the thirtie seuen degrees it is with Seuill east and west, in such sorte that all that it is from the Meridian of Seuill vnto the parte of Poniente, Seuill hath towardes the Leuante, and that which is from Seuill towardes the parte of the Leuante, Seuill hath it towards Poniente. We haue an authour of this, who is Saint Luke in the first chapter, where he sayth, that the three kinges came from the orientall partes to Hierusalem, it is to bee vnderstoode, that as Hierusalem was more occidentall, then from whence they came, so they came from the orient, to occident, which is from the east to the west.
Therfore I say to our purpose it is not to be vnderstoode that the course which is marked in the compasse, is the east & west, respectiue, or accidentall, but the natural which is by that straight course which the Sunne doth describe in that moouing which he maketh the eleuēth of march, and thirteenth of September, for that is east & west, that is marked in the compasse, (that is to say) by the equinoctiall, so that from the east vnto the north are nientie degrees, and seuen courses, besides the east and the north, and the like vnto the south, And if the east of the compasse were respectiue the nientie degrees, nor the seuen windes or courses, shoulde not bee reckoned the which woulde bee a verye great errour.
To the seconde, I saye that how muche a man is farthest of the equinoctiall, so much the dayes will bee greater to him when the Sunne goeth of this parte where he is, and by reason that the dayes are greater to him, the rising of the Sunne maye bee different to him, in this manner, those whiche inhabite vnder the equinoctiall, or in any other parte, when the Sunne doth describe the sayde lyne, alwayes hee commeth foorth to them in the east, and setteth to them in the west, and they haue twelue houres of day, and twelue of night, so that in the foure and twentie houres wherin the Sunne maketh his daylie woouing hee passeth all the eyght windes or principall courses of the nauigation, In suche sorte, that from three to three houres, hee goeth from one winde to another, and so hee riseth and commeth foorth to vs at si [...]e of the clocke, at the east, and at niene at the southeast, and at twelue at the south, and at three at the southwest, and at sixe at the west, and there he setteth. So that in xii. houres he goeth foure courses, but out of the equinoctial, how much y e day is greater [Page] so many more courses the sunne goeth in the day, and lesse in the night, so that if the day be of fifteene houres, the sun goeth in the day fiue courses and by night three: and if the day be of eighteen houres the sunne goeth in the day sixe courses and by night two: and if the day be of one and twentie houres, the sunne goeth in the day seuen courses, and by night one: and if the day be of foure and twentie houres the sunne goeth twenty foure houres in the day, whiche are eyght courses, and that day there is no night: as it happeneth to those whiche inhabite in the circles, when the sunne commeth to the tropikes. And that which is vnderstood of the dayes when they goe increasing, and the nightes deminishing, the same is to bee vnderstoode by the courses which the sunne goeth by night when the day goeth deminishing, and the night increasing: as shall be declared in the sixt chapter of the eyght booke, so that the quantitie of houres being knowne which the daye hath, y e pilot may knowe to what course of the compasse the sunne riseth and setteth from him euery daye, this reckoning will serue for many thinges of the nauigation.
The thirde chapter, wherein is declared, the opinion that is had in the northeasting, and northwesting of the compasses.
THere is an opinion among such as sayle that the compasses doe north stear, and northwestear, and it is sayd that in the Meridian of the Ilādes of the Acores, that there the Compasse doth shewe the pole in his place. And from thence passing towards the west, it doth Northwestear, this is that hee sheweth not the pole in the place where hee was first, but that hee goeth aside towardes the Northwest. And if they come from the saide Meridian, towardes the East, that the Compasse doth Northeastear, that is, to make the sayde difference towardes the parte of the Northeast, so that they saye, that onely in that Meridian the Compasse doth shew the pole, and not in any other place: but to one part or other: and howe muche more they departe from him, so muche the Compasses haue more the sayde defect, but those whiche vnderstande this, giue no cause nor any reason, nor howe much this difference is, which the Cō passe maketh, nor howe farre it goeth, so that they knowe not what to saye more, but marking their Compasses, it seemeth that whiche is sayde to bee so.
Hereupon I haue procured to seeke some Authour or reason, or some thing wherin this should haue a foundation, and I say that of this variacion which is spoken of the compasse. I finde not any thing written, nor reason, nor experience, that is certaine: therefore here I will speake my opinion, touching this, perswading my selfe to that which is most naturall and true of the nauigation.
Therefore comming to the cause, I say putting an example, if I make two compasses of one selfe stile, and of one temperance, and touched with one selfe stone, and two shippes goe sayling with them, departing from the sayde Meridian one towardes the east, and the other towardes the west, that these compasses shall make, different effectes in such sort, that in the one, the stone and the stile, shoulde haue vertue to cause northeasting, and in the other to cause northwesting which are contrary effectes, it seemeth not to mee, that there is any foundation, or reason to haue the like. But let vs see if this bee in any thinge of the nauigation, lette vs seeke it in three partes, which is in the pole or the compasse, or in the waye where sayling now is vsed.
To the first, to saye that the pole doth make any variation or distaunce from his place or poynte, this ought not to bee thought, because it should [Page 68] bee to put out of order all the order of the Sphera, in such sort y t all y e [...]ixed circles; should be moueable▪ besides this, if y e pole should moue with him that saileth towards y e east, it would moue it selfe in the same tune with him whiche saileth towardes the west. This is vnpossible how much more, that the pole cannot mooue to one parte or to another because it is a point immagined alwaies fixed in one place.
To the seconde, I say that it ought not to be thought or vnderstoode, that the compasse by himselfe maketh the sayde difference, for it is certaine, that the sayde naturall vertue or propertie which the stone and steele haue in the place where the compasse was made, the selfe same they haue in the sayde Meridian, and in the new Spaine, and in Calicut, and in all partes. And there is no reason to say, that this propertie is of such qualitie, that in the saide Meridian it hath one vertue, and in all others, which are well neere infinite, it hath it in euery one, different, for if it were so, it woulde bee to geue a greate inconuenience, the which is that [...] no parte foorth of the sayde Meridian, there coulde bee made a true compasse, seeyng that in no parte the compasse doth shew the pole but there, and to say so it were a very greate errour, because an instrument, so important to the nauigation, should not bee sayde, that in no parte it coulde be made certayne, for if it were so, it were to geue to the nauigation an instrument with a knowne errour.
To the thirde, that is by the way where you sayle, this is knowne, that in any manner of place where a man is, there hee hath his Meridian, the whiche goeth precisely to remayne at the poynt, whiche is the pole, without making any distaunt or difference in any thing.
And if it shoulde bee sayde, that by reason of the waye which the Shippe sayleth, the compasse maketh the saide difference as well towardes the one parte, as to the other, this woulde be to make manye Meridians different, the one from the other, and so they shoulde goe to remayne at different poles in such sort that how many differences the compasse went making, by reason of the way: so many different Meridians, the waye shoulde haue: and too euerye Meridian of necessitie, there shoulde a pole [...] geuen, where hee shoulde make an ende, for otherwise it woulde bee an infinite processe, so that there shoulde bee geuen an infinite number of poles. And to thinke this shoulde bee a verye greate errour▪ so that it appeareth well, that neither by the parte of the pole, neither of the compasse, nor of the waye where you sayle, the sayde compasse doe make anye variation or difference from his proper place, but making more inquirie of this variation, which of the compasse is spoken: I say that commonly is vnderstood that the compasse doth shewe the pole, but of this there is no writing which doth say so: that which I finde written of the Lodestone, and of yron is, that Plinie in his thirtie sixe booke of the naturall historie saith, and also Saint Isidore in the sixteenth of the Etimologi [...]s, that the Lodestone by one hidden vertue or propertie, that it hath doth specifie that it draweth to it yron of this Auicen speaketh in the Booke of Viribus Cordis, the tenth Chapter, hee asketh what the cause is, wherefore the Lodestone doth draw vnto it yron, to the whiche hee aunsweareth, that there is no other thing can bee sayde, but because it hath a naturall vertue to drawe it to him, and hee saieth that some vnderstoode that hee draweth it to him by reason of heate or coldnesse, or because of similitude, that both of them haue in nature, or for other reasons, all the whiche hee saith is false, for that hee draweth it not, but onely with his propertie, and declaring what thing propertie is, he sayth, propertie is found in nature in the cōpounded bodies, proceeding in them, a most [Page] high and full influence, so that wee see the loade stone doth drawe to him the yron: likewise we see that the yron being rubbed with the sayde stone, I say in one onely parte of it the vertue renia [...]th with the yron to shewe alwayes one point, which is answerable to the place where we doe shewe in the horizon the winde at north: so that [...]eeing the pole is imagined in the heauen, and is not seene, & the compasse doth shewe him in the horizon without any rising, one only degree aboue the horizon: it is cleare that neither the compasse doth shewe the pole nor by the said compasse the pole can be seene when it is equall with him, nor when it is at one parte nor at another, euen as I shoulde not know, when I am right with y t which I see not, nor when to one part nor to another. This being vnderstood, I mind to declare here whervpon they ground them selues, which are of opinion that the compasse hath a Northeasting & a Northwesting, and the manner whereby they say, that they know it, which is this. The pilots which doe ma [...]e their compasses doe behold the North starre to marke them by her, but because this starre doth alwayes mooue, as before it hath beene declared, therfore they tarrie vntill the guardes be in the Northeast, or in the Southeast, for then they thinke, that the saide starre is in opposite of the pole, vnder or aboue him, and then they imagine a streke which descendeth from the saide starre vnto the Horizon, & they imagine another streke which goeth frō the poynt of the flower of the compasse, vnto that poynt of the Horizō, so that in these two strekes, which they put in that poynt, they looke if that poynt be straight vnder y e North starre, and so they speake what their opinion is without hauing in this anye other account or reason.
To this is to be noted two thinges. The first that the guardes being in any of these sayde courses are not in opposite of the North starre, and the pole rather is a poynt different, for because to stand in opposite, y e guards ought to be in the Northeast, and by North, or in the Southwest and by South.
The seconde, that this making iust of the compasse is alwayes done by night, because by day there is no starre seene. And from the starre vnto the Horizon the distance is very great, by which the true poynt that is corespondent to the sayde starre, cannot be knowen in the Horizon: But that at one time is [...]dged one, and at another time another. Likewise for the greate distance, that is from the sayde compasse vnto the poynt which is imagined in the horizō: And as that poynt is imagined, and inuisible, alwayes the sight goeth wauering without establishing it selfe, whiche hath happened sometimes to me, making experience in this. And therefore I saie, that according to the perspectiue rule, the precise poynt of the Horizon cannot be taken with the only sight which is imagined vnder the said starre, nor it can make iustly equall, the poynt of the flower of the compasse, by reasō there is no certayne poynt, and the distance very great, which is to that as is imagined. For the sight fayleth when the obiect is very distāt. Wherby I conclude, that it cannot bee precisely knowen in the compasse, by the manner as it is said, if he make the said distance of the pole, nor howe muche it is, nor I by this waye coulde euer attayne to it.
The fourth Chapter, of the inconueniences, which may followe by the Northeasting, and Norwesting of the Compasses.
AMong other inconueniences, that will follow in the nauigation, if the Compasses should make the sayde variation or difference, I finde foure verye principals, which are these following.
The first if it be true, that the compasses haue a Northeasting, & a Norwesting, likewise it may bee sayde, that [Page 69] they haue a southeasting and southwesting, and the reason is this, it is certain that the variation or difference which the compasse doth make to the parte of the north, the same ought to bee made, towardes the parte of the south, I will say that how much the north pointe of the compasse departeth from his owne pointe, so much the south pointe of the sayde compasse goeth distant to the other parte, and so the north poynt of the compasse doth northeast a quarter or more, and the south pointe doth southwest the like, for the north point cannot goe aside, but the south pointe doth the like. And so when you shall sayle towardes the parte of the south, seeing that there the north star is not seen to marke by her, either it must be sayde, that of that part the compasse doth not make variation, or if it doe, that in the south, it is to be known: and so when you shall sayle to the riuer of plate, otherwise called Rio de Plata, or to the straight of Magalanes, or by the south sea, or to the cape of Buena Esperanca which is in englishe, good hope, and from thence to Calicut or the Maluco, then wil be said, that the south point of the compasse doth southeast or southwest, and to say so shoulde be a great errour.
The second if the north point of the compasse doe make the sayde distance of his proper place and point, it is certaine that the selfe same difference and distance all the other windes of the nauigation shoulde make from their proper places, because howe muche any winde doth departe from his proper place, the selfe same all the others shoulde doe by the agreeable order, and equall distance, that they haue in the compasse, the one with the other, and so none woulde answere to the certaine pointe, that is shewed in the Horizon, so that likewise, there woulde mooue from theire place, the east, and the west, and all the other windes, this woulde bee a great inconuenience, for the compasses, woulde neuer agree with the cardes, this is because alwayes the windes of the cardes are fixed in one pointe, without moouing from thence, therefore if the windes of the compasse doe make many differences, it is certaine, that they cannot be agreeable, and not agreeing: The place whiche you goe to seeke cannot in any manner of wise, bee precisely hitte, but with greate compasse, this will cause it by reason the carde sayth one thing and the compasse another, and so there cannot bee had a certaine accounte, in the degrees and leagues whiche are sayled, rather all the accountes or reckoninges of the leagues whiche is geuen for a degree in euery course, shoulde bee false seeing the pilot doth not sayle by the course, whiche he thinketh he doth, and so the reckoning whiche is made by such a course, should not be certaine, and if hee woulde geue allowaunce it woulde bee nothing woorth, for hee knoweth not of what parte nor howe much, and so it woulde bee to adde one errour to another.
The thirde, if the variation or difference whiche is spoken of the compasse, were certaine it woulde followe, that the compasses which were verie distant of the sayde Meridian at the east or at the west, they shoulde haue great difference, if it be true, that howe much more they are distant, so muche more they haue the sayde defect, and so all the earth, that shoulde be discouered, with these compasses, and should bee sette downe in the carde, shoulde not be in his true pointe, the reason is, because the principall windes of the carde (that is to saye) the north and the south, the east and the west, are marked in foure fixed pointes equally distant, which are the two poles and the equinoctiall line: and according to these all the other windes of the carde are marked and parted, for if there were put into the cardes any other thing it woulde bee to make an errour at the beginning, whiche is not conuenient in a thing so certaine, as the nauigation is, so that all these windes are alwaies stedfast and fixed, in their [Page] owne poyntes, without making variation or any difference, so that all which is placed with the compasse by reason of his difference, will not be aunswearable with the certayne point; according to the windes which are in the carde.
The fourth, if the variation of the Compasse bee true, immediatly would follow greate difference betweene the course and the altitude, because if I, by my way or course doe seeke a lande, whiche I knowe is in thirtie degrees, or more or l [...]sse, and I sayle by one point the whiche I haue chosen agreeable to the Altitude. It is certayne, that by reason of the variation of the sayde Compasse. I shall not goe by this course to that Lande whiche I goe to seeke, but rather when I haue gone, the sayde way, I shall finde my selfe foorth of that place, whether I goe very different, of the whiche, the errour of the Compasse was cause thereof.
And so in long wayes will alwayes happen great hurtes & inconueniences. Therefore I say, seeing that the said opinion hath no more reason nor foundation, then that which is before saide, that such as doe followe it, let them looke to the hurtes and daungers whiche may followe them.
The fifth Chapter, of the allowance, which the Compasses haue, and howe it ought not to be geuen them.
SOme which make compasses haue a custome, that at such time as they doe set the stiles in the rose of the windes, they doe not precisely put the flower of the rose vpon the pointes of the stiles, whiche are touched with the Lodestone, but they put them aside of the flower halfe a poynt for̄ the Northeast, and this they say they doe to geue allowance to that whiche the Compasses doe Northeast, so that the Compasse doth remayne, made in suche manner that the stiles, and the slower are not vniforme in shewyng the North point, because the flower doth shewe him to one part, and the stiles doe shewe him to another: this is a knowne errour, and it ought not to bee done in no manner of wise, for the reasons following.
The first, if it be true, that the Compasses doe northeast and northwest: it is also said that they doe as well northeast as northwest, so that the difference which is giuen to the one part, the selfesame is giuen to the other, and if it bee so, by what reason shoulde bee giuen to it the allowance, alwayes to the one parte, and not to the other, therefore it is certayne, that it to the nauigation that is made towardes the West, the allowance doth profite that whiche is made towards the East, it would hurt, seeing they are different the one with the other, so that what it doth benefite the one, it will hurt the other. Likewise, with the selfe same cōpasses, which they goe one any voyage, with the selfesame they returne, without taking away, or putting to any thing in them, thereby it is cleere, that the saide errour is to bee perceiued, seeing that the allowance cannot serue to both partes.
The seconde, if it bee true that in the Meridian of the Acores the Compasse doth not make anie difference from the pole, I say that this cannot be knowne, by the sayde compasses. (The reason is) because the vertue of the Compasse is in the stiles, and not in the flower, and the pilot looketh not vnto the stiles, but to the flower, because hee cannot see the stiles, and the flower sheweth one, and the stiles another, whereby as hee ruleth himselfe by the flower he cannot knowe the truth.
Likewise what reason is there, that there is geuen there to the Compasse, as much allowance, as in other partes which are farre of. Of this doth follow, y t for the allowance or difference [Page 70] put in y e said cōpasse cannot be knowne, when the pilot is in the saide Meridian. Therefore it is so as it hath beene said, whē the stiles doe shew, the flower doth not shew. And so y e said Meridian cānot be knowen, if it be not in seeing the saide Ilandes, by reason of the difference that is betweene the stiles & the flower.
The third I say, that there is no reason, wherfore so much allowance should be geuen to the Compasse in the sayling of a hundreth leagues, as in the sailing of two thousand by the which reasons, it is not conuenient, that to any cōpasse the saide allowance or difference be geuen betweene the flower and the stiles, but y t they be made euen very precisely, so that they may bee vniforme in their shewing.
The sixt Chapter, of an instrument, with the which the Compasses may bee marked, and knowne if they bee certayne and true.
IT hath beene saide, that by the poynt of the Horizon, which is corespondent to the North starre the compasses cannot be marked, because it is an vncertayne point, so that because the cō passe is an instrument so litle & so subtil, it is necessary to bring him in order with another instrument, suche a one as the sight and the reason may rectifie.
Therefore when the pylot wil marke his compasse, and know if he be true or not, let him make y e instrument following: with y e which I haue many times marked compasses, and haue founde it certayne, set downe your compasse vpright, and put vpon him a little thinne table & plaine, a little longer thē the cō passe, and narrower thē the rose, so that the North and the South bee seene of the rose: And in this table make a circle with the compasse, wel neere of y e greatnesse of the rose, & make in the saide circle a streke very equall & straight, that may goe from the North to the South of the rose, so that the rose standing stil, the streke of the circle of the table, bee such, y t he come precisely with y e North & south of the rose, this being done, put in the poynt with the compasse made in the middest of the circle of the table, a little small maste vpright, and that he be so great that the shadowe whiche he maketh goe foorth of the circle, & being put so, then set your compasse in the sun before y e middest of the day, & there make equall the streke of the circle with the rose, as before is declared, & the cōpasse standing quiet & the table fixed aboue, doe you stay vntill the shadowe whiche the little maste doth make, doe come shortning vntill he come to the said circle, and when he is come, make a point there. And after that stay vntil the said shadowe doe turne to goe foorth of the circle, & when hee commeth to it, make there another poynt, this being done, take your compasse, and part iustly that which is from one point to the other.
And to this point of the partition, the Meridian of that place is corespondent, it is to be seene if the streke which was made in the circle of y e North & South, of the compasse doe come by the sayde poynt of the partition, then the cōpasse is good, and if not, there it is to bee seene, to which parte hee maketh difference, and howe much it is.
¶The seuenth booke of the Moone, and how her ebbings and flowinges doe serue in the Nauigation.
The first Chapter, what thinge the moone is, and wherefore her light is not equall, but alwayes increaseth or diminisheth.
THE Moone is one of the seuen Planettes, constituted in the first Heauē more neere vnto vs then anye of the others, of this some had opinion, that shee had light of her selfe, and when shee was in one signe with the Sunne, by meanes of the greate light of the Sunne, shee gaue no light, and howe muche the more shee went from the Sunne, so muche her light began to appeare, and the neerer shee was, the lesse it did appeare. This is not so, because the Moone hath no cleerenesse
nor brightnesse of her owne, as in the first booke the seuenth Chapter, hath beene declared, the whiche is seene by experience, because the Moone doth suffer Eclipses, when shee is depriued of the light of the Sunne, as there is a lette, that shee cannot receiue it, she remayneth darke. This light is let by meanes of the Earth, as the Philosophers and Astronomers doe shewe, because in the moouing which the Sūne and the Moone make, as they come [Page 71] into the point, that the earth is directly betweene the Sunne and the Moone, the light of the Sunne geueth in the earth, and so the Moone remayneth in her owne likenesse, whiche is darke, so that of her selfe, shee hath no light nor cleerenes, but the sunne which is ouer her, doth light her, although not euery day alike towards vs, because as the Moone is a body darke, when shee is right vnder the sun, she is lightened of the vppermost part, & remayneth darke towards the earth, & therfore in her cō iunction with the sunne, we see her not. And it is to be noted, y t in the coniunction of y e moone, she & the Sun rise not in one selfe place, but they rise at one selfe time, & so by meanes of the light of the sun, y e moone doth not appeare, because comming foorth at one selfe time and in one place the sunne woulde be eclipsed, and so the eclipse of the sunne happeneth in the coniunction of the moone, when shee is in the heade or tayle of the Dragon. And as by her moouing, shee goeth away from the sunne, shee beginneth to appeare vnto vs, and appeareth in the manner of a thinne horne, and the farther she goeth from the sunne, the more she shineth to vs. And at the eyght day she shineth parted in the middest, and at the fifteenth day she is full, for then she is farthest of the sunne, the which is prooued because it happeneth, when the sunne doth set to vs in the west, shee beginneth to come foorth in the east, and then all the brightnes, which the moone receiueth of the sunne descendeth towards vs, and after she beginneth to goe neerer to the Sunne, by the same manner that shee went departing, and when the light goeth vpwarde the shadow descendeth, and so she turneth decreasing, in the like sort as she went increasing. And it is to bee noted, that the moone doth passe the circle of y e zodiack, in tweentie seuen dayes & eight houres, and although that in this time, she maketh an end of her circle, there is geuen to euery moone twenty niene daies & a halfe. The reasō is, because in those said twentie seuen dayes & eight houres, she doth not ouertake the sunne, and therefore passeth forward other two dayes, and foure houres, a little thing more or lesse, and so twentie nine dayes decying past, aud twelue houres, and a few minutes, in some more, and in others lesse, the coniunction of the Moone and the Sun is made. This is according to the halfe mouing of the Moone, wherwith is made equall, the mouing of all the dayes, because according to the true mouing which she maketh, at sometime it is sayd to be slow, and at other times swift, the which moouing is also made equall by the middle moouing, this is largely declared by the king Don Alonso in his tables.
The seconde Chapter, of the Golden number, & how it is to be reckoned from one to nienteene, and wherefore no more nor lesse.
IT is a necessary thing to take out the reckoning of the Moone by the Golden number, for that the Golden number is a thing whereby many reckonings are made, and therefore it is called the number of Golde, wherof I minde to declare in this Chapter, that of the Golden number whiche maketh to our purpose, where I saye that this reckoning of the Golden number is, from one to nieneteene, so that the Golden number is accomplished in the time of nieneteene yeeres, and the nineteene yeeres beeing past, returneth agayne to one and so for euer. The reason why it hath this number, & no more nor lesse is because the nineteene yeeres beyng past, the Moone turneth to one only day, of the yeere, of the Sunne, and in this time shee finisheth and endeth all those diuersities of coniunctions and fulnesse, and other aspectes, which shee hath with the Sunne in one only day, degree, and minute, in this manner following.
I put the case that the Moone made coniunction the first daye to Ianuarie of this yeere. The yeere followyng [Page] shee will not make the same coniunction in the same poynt, but before or after, and so we will speake the like of the fulnesse, and other aspectes. And as these bee not in an infinite number, it is certaine that they are comprehended vnder some number, or space of time.
These are those sayde nieneteene yeeres, in the which are to be noted, as it is saide, all the diuersities of aspectes, aswell of coniunctions, and fulnesse, as of any other cause, which the moone maketh with the Sunne, in such sorte, that the nieneteene yeeres beeyng ended. The Moone doth not turne to make a new coniunctiō or opposition in any degree or poynt of the Zodiacke, that in the sayde time, shee hath not already done, and by this reason this reckoning of the golden number is ended and finished in the time of nieneteene yeeres, and not in more nor lesse.
❧A Rule to knowe the Golden number of euerie yeere.
TO knowe euery yeere howe many are of the Golden number, looke on the numbers following and counting in the first house, the yeere of our Lorde 1545. which are seuen of the Golden number, and one house is to bee reckoned euerye yeere, and the last house beeyng ended, returne to the first and so for euer.
1545. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
16. 17. 18. 19. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
VVHen you will knowe in any yeere that you are in, howe many are of the Golden number, without looking on the booke, see in what yeere you runne, and leauing out the thousand fiue hundreth, of the rest take out the nieneteenes, and that which remayneth, so much is of the Golden number that yeere, and if the number of the yeeres come iust in nieneteenes, that yeere is nieneteene of the Golden number.
The thirde Chapter, wherein is declared the day and houre, wherein the Moone maketh coniunction in euerye Moneth of the yeere for euer.
THere hath been declared in the Chapter before, how it should be known euery yeere howe manye are of y e golden nūber, according as the account in it is declared, and because it is necessary for the nauigation to knowe in euery moneth the day and houre of the coniunction, therfore in this Chapter, shalbee declared, how a man may know euery day what day and houre the coniunction of the Moone was, or shalbe. And for this are to be noted, two things, the first, y t this account goeth taken out by the Golden number, and by him you must rule [Page 72] your selfe, euen according as the number is, which that yeere, wherein you are, doe runne of the Golden number. In that sayde yeere, looke the Moneth where you are, or the Moneth that you woulde knowe, and in him you shall find the day, and houre that the Moone was or shalbee in coniunction. The seconde is, that in this account a day is vnderstood from this day the middest of the day, vntill to morrowe, the middest of the day, so that if wee saye, this day is the fifteenth day of the Moneth it is vnderstood, frō this day the middest of the day, vntill to morrowe the middest of the day, and from the middest of the day to morrowe, doth sixeteene beginne, because this is the manner, that the Astronomers doe reckon the dayes, so that those houres which are ouer and aboue, the dayes are from the halfe day forwarde.
If they be one of the Golden number. | If they be two of the Golden number. | If they bee three of the Golden number. | ||||||
Monethes | Daies | Houres | Monethes | Daies | Houres | Monethes | Daies | Houres |
Ianuarie. | 19 | 16 | Ianuarie. | 8 | 20 | Ianuarie. | 27 | 14 |
Februarie. | 18 | 6 | Februarie. | 7 | 13 | Februarie. | 25 | 9 |
marche. | 19 | 7 | marche. | 8 | 4 | marche. | 27 | 1 |
Aprill. | 18 | 1 | Aprill. | 6 | 16 | Aprill. | 25 | 4 |
may. | 17 | 9 | may. | 6 | 2 | may. | 25 | 0 |
Iune. | 15 | 15 | Iune. | 4 | 9 | Iune. | 23 | 8 |
Iuly. | 14 | 23 | Iuly. | 3 | 15 | Iuly. | 22 | 16 |
August. | 13 | 8 | August. | 1 | 7 | August. | 21 | 0 |
September. | 11 | 21 | September. | 29 | 19 | September. | 19 | 8 |
October. | 11 | 12 | October. | 29 | 9 | October. | 18 | 19 |
Nouember | 10 | 6 | Nouember. | 28 | 1 | Nouember. | 17 | 7 |
December. | 10 | 1 | December. | 27 | 20 | December. | 16 | 22 |
If they bee foure of the Golden number. | If they bee sixe of the Golden number. | If they be eight of the Golden number. | ||||||
Monethes | Daies | Houres | monethes | Daies | Houres | monethes | Daies | Houres |
Ianuarie. | 15 | 0 | Ianuarie. | 23 | 20 | Ianuarie. | 2 | 3 |
Februarie | 14 | 19 | Februarie. | 22 | 9 | Februarie. | 31 | 22 |
Marche. | 16 | 3 | marche. | 22 | 22 | marche. | 31 | 22 |
Aprill. | 14 | 19 | Aprill. | 21 | 8 | Aprill. | 29 | 17 |
May. | 14 | 9 | may. | 21 | 4 | may. | 29 | 3 |
Iune. | 12 | 11 | Iune. | 19 | 19 | Iune. | 27 | 14 |
Iuly. | 12 | 7 | Iuly. | 19 | 9 | Iuly. | 27 | 3 |
August. | 10 | 16 | August. | 18 | 0 | August. | 25 | 29 |
September. | 9 | 1 | September. | 16 | 13 | September. | 24 | 12 |
October. | 8 | 10 | October. | 16 | 2 | October. | 23 | 6 |
Nouember. | 6 | 20 | Nouember. | 14 | 14 | Nouember. | 22 | 23 |
December. | 6 | 7 | December. | 14 | 1 | December. | 22 | 15 |
If they bee fiue of the Golden number. | If they bee seuen of the Golden number. | If they bee niene of the Golden number. | ||||||
Monethes | Daies | Houres | Monethes | Daies | Houres | Monethes | Daies | Houres |
Ianuarie. | 4 | 20 | Ianuarie. | 12 | 11 | Ianuarie. | 21 | 4 |
Februarie. | 3 | 11 | Februarie. | 10 | 21 | Februarie. | 19 | 15 |
Marche. | 5 | 3 | March | 12 | 8 | Marche. | 21 | 0 |
Aprill. | 3 | 20 | Aprill. | 10 | 19 | Aprill. | 19 | 8 |
May. | 3 | 13 | May. | 10 | 7 | May. | 18 | 16 |
Iune. | 2 | 2 | Iune. | 8 | 20 | Iune. | 17 | 0 |
Iuly. | 1 | 4 | Iuly. | 8 | 10 | Iulie. | 16 | 9 |
August. | 29 | 16 | August. | 7 | 2 | August. | 14 | 21 |
September. | 28 | 2 | September. | 5 | 17 | September. | 13 | 12 |
October. | 27 | 12 | October. | 5 | 10 | October. | 13 | |
Nouember. | 25 | 22 | Nouember. | 4 | 1 | Nouember. | 12 | 1 |
December. | 25 | 8 | December. | 3 | 15 | December. | 11 | 19 |
If they bee tenne of the Golden number. | If they be twelue of the Golden number. | If they bee foureteene of the Golden number. | ||||||
monethes | Daies | Houres | monethes | Daies | Houres | Monethes | Daies | Houres |
Ianuarie. | 10 | 12 | Ianuarie. | 17 | 9 | Ianuarie. | 25 | 7 |
Februarie. | 9 | 3 | Februarie. | 18 | 15 | Februarie | 23 | 23 |
marche. | 9 | 16 | marche. | 17 | 21 | Marche. | 24 | 15 |
Aprill. | 8 | [...] | Aprill. | 16 | 11 | Aprill. | 23 | 7 |
may. | 7 | 9 | may. | 15 | 23 | May. | 22 | 22 |
Iune. | 5 | 16 | Iune. | 14 | 8 | Iune. | 21 | 13 |
Iuly. | 4 | 23 | Iuly. | 13 | 16 | Iuly. | 21 | 1 |
August. | 3 | 7 | August. | 12 | 00 | August. | 19 | 13 |
September. | 1 | 18 | September. | 10 | 8 | September. | 18 | 1 |
October. | 31 | 8 | October. | 9 | 17 | October. | 17 | 11 |
Nouember. | 29 | 19 | Nouember. | 8 | 5 | Nouember. | 15 | 22 |
December. | 29 | 14 | December. | 7 | 18 | December. | 15 | 8 |
If they be eleuen of the Golden number. | If they be thirteene of the Golden number. | If they be fifteene of the Golden number. | ||||||
Monethes | Daies | Houres | Monethes | Daies | Houres | Monethes | Daies | Houres |
Ianuarie. | 28 | 8 | Ianuarie. | 6 | 10 | Ianuarie. | 13 | 18 |
Februarie. | 27 | 1 | Februarie. | 5 | 3 | Februarie. | 12 | 6 |
March | 28 | 15 | Marche. | 6 | 21 | Marche. | 13 | 19 |
Aprill. | 27 | 1 | Aprill. | 5 | 15 | Aprill. | 12 | 9 |
May. | 26 | 9 | May. | 5 | 6 | May. | 12 | 0 |
Iune. | 24 | 16 | Iune. | 3 | 19 | Iune. | 10 | 20 |
Iuly. | 23 | 23 | Iulie. | 3 | 6 | Iuly. | 10 | 5 |
August. | 22 | 7 | August. | 1 | 15 | August. | 8 | 20 |
September. | 20 | 17 | September. | 29 | 10 | September. | 7 | 10 |
October. | 20 | 5 | October. | 28 | 19 | October. | 7 | 0 |
Nouember. | 18 | 21 | Nouember. | 27 | 6 | Nouember. | 5 | 13 |
December. | 18 | 14 | December. | 26 | 18 | December. | 5 | 0 |
If they be sixteene of the Golden number. | If they be eighteene of the Golden number. | ||||
monethes | Daies | Houres | monethes | Daies | Houres |
Ianuarie. | 3 | 10 | Ianuarie. | 12 | 2 |
Februarie. | 2 | 20 | Februarie. | 10 | 14 |
marche. | 3 | 6 | marche. | 11 | 0 |
Aprill. | 1 | 17 | Aprill. | 0 | 7 |
may. | 1 | 4 | may. | 8 | 8 |
Iune. | 29 | 15 | Iune. | 6 | 23 |
Iuly. | 28 | 21 | Iuly. | 6 | 8 |
August. | 27 | 13 | August. | 5 | 19 |
September. | 26 | 6 | September. | 3 | 8 |
October. | 25 | 22 | October. | 3 | 1 |
Nouember. | 23 | 13 | Nouember. | 1 | 19 |
December. | 24 | 1 | December. | 1 | 14 |
If they bee seuenteene of the Golden number. | If they be nineteene of the Golden number. | ||||
Monethes | Daies | Houres | Monethes | Daies | Houres |
Ianuarie. | 22 | 12 | Ianuarie. | 30 | 5 |
Februarie. | 20 | 22 | Februarie. | 28 | 14 |
March | 22 | 7 | Marche. | 30 | 1 |
Aprill. | 20 | 16 | Aprill. | 28 | 9 |
May. | 20 | 1 | May. | 27 | 16 |
Iune. | 18 | 11 | Iune. | 25 | 13 |
Iuly. | 17 | 23 | Iulie. | 25 | 6 |
August. | 16 | 14 | August. | 23 | 16 |
September. | 15 | 7 | September. | 22 | 4 |
October. | 15 | 1 | October. | 21 | 20 |
Nouember. | 13 | 19 | Nouember. | 20 | 14 |
December. | 13 | 11 | December. | 20 | 19 |
It is to be noted, that for the coniunctions of the moone before written, shalbe taken out, the opposition or the fulnesse of the moone that is, by reckoning fourteene dayes, and sixeteene houres, after the coniunction, a little thing more or lesse.
The fourth Chapter, of a shorte account or reckoning to knowe without the booke briefly the dayes whiche the moone hath in any mooneth of the yeere.
OF the accounte of y e Moone which before hath beene declared, you may at all times when you will, know how many dayes olde y e moone is, & what day & houre the coniunction was, but because [Page 74] without the booke it cannot be known. I thought good to put heere a short account; that by memorie it may bee knowne, howe many dayes olde the Moone is, at all times when you will know it: the which is to be reckoned i [...] this manner.
In what day soeuer you are in, looke howe many bee of concurrent in that yeere which you runne, according as you shall finde in the account before [...] and ioyne with them the number of the Monethes whiche are past from March vnto that moneth, & likewise ioyne the dayes of the moneth which you haue vnto the day wherein you are: these three numbers together if they passe of thirtie, those whiche are more, the Moone is olde, and if they bee thirtie iust, the Moone is in couiunction, and if they come not to thirty, those which are, so many dayes old the Moone is.
An Example.
In the yeere of 1545. we haue seuē teene of concurrent, therefore the twentie of August, I will knowe how many dayes old the Moone is: I say that of cōcurrent is seuenteene, ioyne sixe of y e monethes which are frō March to August, it amounteth to twentie three, and twentie of the Moneth are forty three, take away thirty, there remaineth thirteene, so many daies the Moone is old, the twentie day of August. And by this manner you shall take out the dayes y t the Moone is old, euery time that you will.
1545 17 [...]8 9 20 1 12 23 4 15 26 7 18 29 11 22 314 25 6
In the yeere of 1545. we haue seuenteene of concurrent, the next yeere following, we haue tweentie eight, and so reckoning in euery yeere one house of these and it serueth for euer.
OF this account of the concurrent, knowe yee, that it increaseth euerie yeere eleuen, and it cannot passe aboue thirtie, and if they doe passe thirtie, you must leaue the thirtie, and take that which remayneth. And so know this reckoning of the concurrent quickly by the head, doe you in this manner set downe in the roote of the thumbe, ten, and in the ioynt of the middest twenty, and the vppermost thirtie, and this being done put the Goldē number in the three ioynts, reckoning one in the roote of the thumbe, and in the middle ioynt, two, and aboue three, & turning againe beneath foure, and in the middest fiue, and so discoursing vntill you come to the Golden number of that yeere, and if it staye in the roote of the thumbe you shall ioyne that whiche it is of Golden number, with the tenne that was put there, & ioyning one number with as many more: you shal haue of concurrent as much as both nūbers doth amount too, and if the Golden number d [...]e rest in the middle ioynt you shall ioyne with the Golden number, the twentie that was put there, and all beeyng ioyned together, it wilbe so many of concurrēt, and if the Goldē number, doe rest in the vppermost parte of the thumbe, ioyne with the Golden number, the thirtie which was put there, hauing alwayes remembraunce, when all the number doth passe thirtie, you shall leaue the thirtie, and that whiche remayneth, is the concurrent.
The fifth Chapter, how by the dayes of the Moone, and the course where the Sunne will bee, shalbee knowen at what houre the tyde will come euery day.
ALL persons which doe doe sayle, it is necessary that they knowe howe the tides doe fall euerye day, & at what houre it is full Sea, or lowe water, for this is conuenient, aswell for to enter in by any bard hauen, as for other things, which may serue in the nauigation.
Therefore in this Chapter, I wil declare, howe the reckoning of the sayde tides ought to be kept, & at what houre they come, for to profite thereby, of the whiche is to bee vnderstood, that the [Page] Moone goeth the thirtie two windes of the nauigatiō in 24. houres, in the which she maketh her dayly moouing, with more y t she hath gone of her owne mouing, & in this time she bringeth two tydes, that is to say, two floods & two ebbes, so y t the sea floweth sixe houres, & ebbeth other sixe, which are twelue, and the like is done in other twelue, but it is to be noted, y t these flowinges and ebbinges are not equall, nor alike in all times & places, as muche as toucheth the time they bee not equall, because seuen dayes the waters goe rising, and wee call them spring rides, & other seuen they goe decreasing or [...]ayling, & we call them nepe tides: so that from the first day of the Moone vnto the eight day, which is the quarter, the waters goe decreasing, and from the quarter vnto y e fifteenth which is y e ful Moone, they goe increasing, and from the full Moone to the thirde quarter, they goe decreasing, and from that to the coniunction they goe increasing: & declaring this more at large, I saye that the first daye of the Moone, is the head of the water, and the second day, the increasing is as greate, and the thirde day well neere the like, and the fourth day it decreaseth, and so it goeth euerye daye decreasing, vntill the Moone bee eight dayes olde, and then it is altogether nepe tydes: and the nienth is the like, and the tenth well neere alike. The eleuenth it beginneth to increase something, and so it goeth increasing euery day vnto the fifteenth which is full Moone, whiche doth turne to bee the head of the water. And the sixeteenth it increaseth the like, and the seuenteene well neere the like. The eighteenth it decreaseth , and so it goeth decreasing euerye daye vnto the two and twentie, whiche is altogether nepe tides, and the three and twentie it is the point of the water, and goeth increasing euerye day vnto the thirtye day which is the coniunction. And the first day it turneth to bee the head of the water, and so successuiely, it goeth increasing and decreasing as it hath becue [...] [...]eclare [...]. Likewise it is to be vnderstood, that these increasinges, are not at all tunes equall or alike, but in some [...] they are greater and in other [...] as by experience wee see.
Likewise it is to bee noted that these increasinges and decreasinge [...] in all plates are not alike, for th [...]rauses that I will speake of.
And for to knowe the howe, when the tides doe come, it is to bee vnderstood, that alwayes the Moone being in the Northeast it is full Sea, and in the Southeast lowe water, and in the Southwest full Sea, and in the Northwest lowe water.
And to knowe when the Moone is in euery one of these courses, it must bee taken out by the course where the Sunne is in this manner.
The first day, of the Moone, the Sunne beeyng in the Northeast and by East, the Moone is in the Northeast, and that houre full Sea.
The seconde day, of the Moone, the Sunne beeyng in the Northeast is full Sea.
The thirde day, when the Sunne is in the East and by north it wilbe ful Sea.
The fourth day, the Sunne in the East full Sea.
The fifth day, the Sunne in the East, and by South, the Moone in the Northeast.
The sixte day, the Sunne in the Southeast, the Moone in the Northeast.
The seuenth day, the Sunne in the Southeast, and by east, the Moone in the Northeast.
The eight day, the Sunne in the Southeast, the Moone in the Northeast.
The nienth day, the Sunne in the Southeast and by south, the Moone in the Northeast.
The tenth day, the Sunne in the South Southeast, the Moone in the Northeast.
The eleuenth day, the Sunne in the [Page 75] South, and by east, the Moone in the Northeast.
The twelfth day, the sunne in the South, the Moone in the Northeast.
The thirteenth day, the sunne in the South, and by west, the Moone in the Northwest.
The foureteenth day, the sun in the South, Southwest, the Moone in the Northeast.
The fifteenth day, this day we reckō two quarters together, by reason that the poyntes are thirtie two, and the daies thirty, we giue in the middest one quarter, and in the end another, so that at the fifteenth day the Sunne beeyng in the Southwest, the Moone wilbee in the Northeast, & this houre it wilbe full Sea.
The sixeteenth day, the sun being in the Southwest & by west, the Moone wilbe, in the Southwest, & that houre wilbe full Sea.
The seuenteenth day, the sun in the West, Southwest, the Moone in the southwest is full Sea.
The eighteenth day, the sunne in the West, and by south, the Moone in the southwest full Sea.
The nineteenth day, the sunne in the West, the Moone in the South West, full Sea.
The twentieth day, the sunne in the West, and by north, the Moone in the Southwest.
The twenty one day, the sunne in the West, Northwest, the Moone in the Southwest.
The twenty two day, the sunne in the Northwest, and by west the moone in the Southwest.
The twentie three day, the sunne in the Northwest, the moone in the southwest.
The twentie soure day, the sunne in the Northwest, and by north, the moone in the Southwest.
The twenty fiue day, the sunne in the nor northwest, the moone in the southwest.
The twenty sixe day, the sunne in the North and by west, the moone in the Southwest.
The twenty seuen day, the sunne in the North, the moone in the southwest.
The twenty eight day, the sunne in the North, and by east, the moone in the southwest.
The twenty niene day, the sunne at North Northeast, the moone at southwest, and at that houre full Sea.
The thirtie day, which is the cōiunctiō is to be reckoned two points, which are the Northeast and by north, and the Northeast.
The sixte Chapter, wherein is declared more at large, the aforesaide Chapter, with a demonstration.
OF the account which before hath beene declared, you shall take out euery day at what houre the tyde commeth, the sunne beeing in the poynt or course as before is mentioned. But for y e better vnderstanding therof, it is to be noted, that alwayes at 12. of the clocke in the day you haue the sunne at south, if you be more towards the North thē the sunne, so that at sixe of the clocke in the morning you had it at East, and at nine at Southeast, and at three after the middest of the day, you shall haue it at southwest, and at sixe, at West, and at nine, at Northwest, and at twelue of the night, at North.
And at three after midnight at northeast, and if the sunne be more towardes the North, then at the middest of the day, you shall haue him at North, and at twelue of the night at South. And by these courses you shall take out the rest, according to the place and time, wherein you shal finde your selfe. Likewise it is to bee noted, as before hath beene declared.
The Moone beyng in the Northeast or Southwest, it is full Sea, and in the Southeast and Northwest, it is low water. And to knowe when hee is in these courses, the course must bee sought where the Sunne should stand according as the dayes of the moone are,
[Page] And of this is vnderstood that although here goeth written, the courses where the Sunne ought to bee, because the Moone should be in the Northeast, and that houre full Sea. Likewise it is to bee vnderstood, that the Sunne being in the contrary course of that, the Moone [...] in the Southwest, and it wilbe likewise full Sea, and the [...] wilbe at the lowe water. And in this sort the account serueth, as well [...] the first tide, as for the secōd, the which may bee, taken out by the figure [...] lowing.
Of this figure is to bee noted, that beeyng knowne howe many dayes the moone is olde, and seeking it in this account, and the Sunne beeing come to that course, where the like number is, or to his contrary, that houre will bee full Sea, keeping reckoning that at twelue of the clocke of the day the Sunne is at South, and at twelue of the night at North: And that in three quarters of an houre the Sunne passeth from one poynt to another.
The seuenth Chapter, howe by the houre wherein the coniunction was, the tyde may be knowen, and the allowance that ought to be giuen to the riuers.
IT hath beene declared, howe it shalbe knowne, at what houre the tides come euery day, by counting the number of daies of the moone, & by that meanes looking in the course where y e sunne shoulde bee, as in the Chapters before written hath beene declared. And besides this, it seemed good to mee, to put here a rule, and account, because not only by the dayes of the moone, & courses of the sunne, but by the houres, the houre beeyng knowen wherin the coniunction was, shalbee knowen euerye day, at what houre of the day or the night, the tide will come: and for this you must knowe the account following.
Looke in what day and what houre the moone was in coniunction, and beyng knowne, you shall finde that euerie day the tyde doth come foure quintos or foure fiue partes of an houre forwarde, so that if the tyde come this day at one of the clocke, to morrowe hee will come at one and foure fiue partes of an houre, and the nexte day at two, and three fiue partes, and so the rest of the dayes as by this account appeareth.
Dayes. | Houres. | Fifthes. |
1 | 4 | |
2 | 1 | 3 |
3 | 2 | 2 |
4 | 3 | 1 |
5 | 4 | |
6 | 4 | 4 |
7 | 5 | 3 |
8 | 6 | 2 |
6 | 7 | 1 |
10 | 8 | |
12 | 8 | 4 |
12 | 9 | 3 |
13 | 10 | 2 |
14 | 11 | 1 |
15 | 12 | 2 [...] |
16 | 12 | 4 |
17 | 13 | 3 |
18 | 14 | 2 |
19 | 15 | 1 |
20 | 16 | |
21 | 16 | 4 |
22 | 17 | 3 |
23 | 18 | 2 |
24 | 19 | 1 |
25 | 20 | |
26 | 20 | 4 |
27 | 21 | 3 |
28 | 22 | 2 |
29 | 23 | 1 |
30 | 24 |
[Page] IT is to bee noted that the houres here [...], being ioyned with the houres of the moone which she hath in the coniunction, besides those dayes that bee more then foure and twentie, there shalbe taken out once twelue, or twise if it he needefull, and t [...]ose whiche remayne shall bee the houre in the which the tide [...] come. Item it is to be noted that the accountes which before hath beene declared, whereby may be knowne, at what houre the tide will come, is as much as to the naturall course of the moone, more it is so that accidentally, it is not in all partes, or in all coastes that the tides are equall, although they bee in one Meridiā, they come not so at one time, by reason of the great currents, or the straightes of the Sea, great gulfes, or entraunce of Lande into the Sea, or windes, or for other cause, by the which alwaies the practise of the Land ought to be looked vnto.
Likewise, it is to be vnderstood, that there ought to bee giuen allowance to the riuers, because they make not the tides according to the barre, and there should be giuē them allowance, a quarter later because in the coastes, the tides beginneth to ebbe more speedily, and in the riuers it cannot bee done, by reason of the holding backe or stay of y e waters that commeth from aboue, and the like is to bee giuen at the flowing, this is common, but the allowance is not alwayes equall to all riuers, because some doe flowe and ebbe more then other some.
This is by reason that some riuers haue more current then other some, and likewise when the flowing is holpen with winde, therefore the disposition of the place is to bee looked on.
❧The eight booke of the dayes of the yeere.
The first Chapter, what thing a day is, and howe it is reckoned, and in howe manye partes it is deuided.
THis name day, is takē in 2. sortes, that is to saye, a natural day, and an artificial day. The naturall day is a time of foure & twentye houres, and is called a naturall day, because hee is equall in all partes of the earth, habitable, the which day diuers nations doe reckon by different wayes. The Athenienses, and Egyptians doe reckon it from the setting of the sunne, vntill the next day, at y e same houre. The Greeks, Persians, and Babilonians from the time that it riseth. The Romaines doe
reckon it from mydnight. The Astronomers doe reckon it from the middest of one day to the middest of the next day: the reason wherefore the Astronomers doe reckon them so, is that which Ptholome writeth in the seconde and thirde of the Almagesto, and Alstragano in the eleuenth difference where they say, that the cause wherefore the Astronomers doe begin the naturall day, the [Page] sunne being in the Meridian, & not whē he riseth, nor when he setteth, is because the dayes in the rising of the sunne, and setting of him, are different according as euery habitation is neere, or distant of the Equinoctiall line, & the Meridians in all the habitations are vniforme, because all them doe passe by the poles: so that the day is greater or lesser in one habitation then the another, because as it is not equall, which the Sunne doth light in the Horizontes, Obliques, so it is not equall in all partes, when hee riseth, and when he setteth.
In such sort, that how much the variation of the Horizon is, so much is the variation of the daies in length or shortnesse, and if this shoulde hee made euen for all Horizontes, it were conuenient, to haue for euery one a Table of equallitie of the dayes, where shoulde bee well neere an infinite number, so that the Astronomers to flie so great adiuersitie, began the day, in the middest of the day, because one is sufficient for al parts, and seeing that wee haue spoken of the natural day, let vs speake also of the artificiall day.
The artificial day is the time which the sunne doth shewe light vnto vs, going aboue our Hemispherio, and is called the artificial day, because he is different in diuerse parts, & because y e Artificers doe make their woorks in him, the which is deuided into foure parts accoring to 4 differēces, which the Sun maketh. In y e first he shineth, in the secōd he heateth, in the third hee burneth, in the fourth hee warneth, the night consequently hath foure partes. The first is the first sleepe, the second is mydnight, when all thinges holde their peace, because it is no apt time to woorke anye thing, the thirde when the Cocke croweth, y e fourth whē the day doth begin to appeare. There is another time called Cropusculo, and is, when it is neyther day nor night: so betweene day and night, as betweene night and day.
This Cropusculo is that bright time, whiche wee haue in the Morning, before the Sunne riseth, as likewise that whiche wee haue in the Euening, after that the Sunne is set: vntill the darknesse of the night doe come.
This Cropusculo is greater or lesser, according as the day is greate or little, and so in the Sommer wee haue a greater Cropusculo then in the Winter, and in that parte it shoulde bee greater, where the dayes are greater, and so we see, that in Flaunders in the Sommer, at tē of the clocke in y e night, although it be two houres after Sunne let, there is so muche light, that any letter may be read.
The second Chapter, howe in the artificiall day the Sunne riseth and setteth, differently to suche as inhabite in the worlde.
IT hath beene declared, what thing a daye is, and howe the naturall day, and artificiall day, are vnderstood. In this I will speake howe the sunne comming foorth in the Horizon, & rising vp by our Hemispherio, commeth to the Meridian, and from thence descē ding, and cōmeth to the orrident, where he setteth to vs, and as this is done indifferently to suche as inhabite in the worlde, of the which it is to be vnderstoode, that the going foorth which the sunne maketh, euery day by our horizon, is not equall one day with another, and that this is true, experience doth shewe it. And to be likwise so, the quantitie or greatnes is not equall one day with another, but of this is to be noted, that in y e degrees or distance of the equinoctial, wherein the sunne cōmeth foorth euery day, in the same he setteth, likewise it is to bee noted, that although the day bee great or litle, alwayes a man being in one place, the sun commeth euery day at the middest of the day, into one self Meridian, without any manner of variation.
[Page 78] Likewise it is to be vnderstood, that because the sunne commeth not foorth equally at one time to all such as inhabite in the world, nor all of them doe see him at one time, so the middest of the day is not made at one time to all. In such sort, that how much the more anie place is more easterly, then other, by so muche, such is inhabite there, doe see the sun rather, & doth begin to appeare rather to thē then to suche as are more westerly. And in this māner successiuely, euen as y e sun goeth rising aboue the Horizon of some, so hee goeth shewing & appearing indifferent partes to others: so that when to vs it is the middest of the day, suche as are more westerly, to some it wilbe xi. a clocke, to other x, & to others it. And so how much more distant he is of vs towardes the west, so much the later the sunne cōmeth foorth to them, and so by the saide reason, hee commeth later to their Meridian, I say more late to our respect, and such which are from vs more easterly, because the sunne came foorth to them first, then to vs, they had the day first. And in this manner, is to be vnderstood that at the xxiiii. houres, that the sunne goeth about the world, when to some it is day, to othersome it is night, & whē to some it is y e morning, to others it is the Euening, and when he riseth to some, he setteth to othersome, and when to some it is midday, to others it is midnight. This is because as the sunne mooueth himselfe rounde about the world, & alwayes goeth lightning the halfe of the roundnes, doth cause the said differēces. And it is to be noted, y t in the moouing which the sunne maketh, he mooueth euery house by the roundnesse of water and earth, 262 leagues, because the vi. thousand three hundred leagues being parted, which y e roundnesse hath in the xxiiii. houres of the natural day, it commeth to euery houre 262 leagues. And so by this reckoning, looking what houre it is of the day in the place where a man as, he shall knowe what houre it is in any other parte, knowing the distance of the leagues which are to that said place.
The third Chapter, howe that vnder the Equinoctiall, the dayes and nightes are alwayes equall.
IT was an opinion of some auncient writers, that vnder the Equinoctiall, and likewise all the Torrida Zona was inhabitable, the whiche they beleeued, because y t there the sunne doth send his perpendiculer beames, there should bee such excessiue heate, that it was not habitable: of this opinion was Virgil, and Ouid, & other singular men. Others there were, whiche healde that some parte was habitable, following Ptholome, which in the booke that was compared to the arte of the Sphera, saith, it is not conuenient, y t we should thinke the Torrida Zona to be altogether inhabitable. Other there were, which heald that there it was not only temperate, & without too much beate, but also most temperate. And this is affirmed by S. Isidore, in the first of the Etimologias, where hee saith that the earthly Paradise is in the East part vnder the Equinoctiall, a most temperate place, and Ptholome likewise saith in the thirde of the Quadri partiti, that all the temperate complections doe proceede of the Equinoctiall. The experience doth nowe shew vs, that not only vnder the Equinoctiall, but al the Tortida which is from one Tropike to the other, is habitable, riche, and plentifull, because well neere all the yeere, the dayes and nights are almost equall: so that the freshnesse of the night, doth temper the heate of the day, and so continually the earth hath season to bring foorth and increase her fruites.
But it is to bee noted, that touching the equalitie of the dayes & the nights, there may be had a doubt, and say that the sunne in no time doth make equalitie of the day with the night, but alwayes the artificiall daye is greater then the night by these reasons following.
[Page] It is certaine y t a shining body being greater, lighteth the darknesse more thē halfe, and as the sunne is greater then all the earth, so that as it hath beene saide, that it is the opinion of Alfragano in the difference twentie two, that y e Sunne is 166. times greater then the earth, so that the Sunne doth light the earth more then the halfe.
The lesser parte remayning darke, in suche sorte, that the Sunne is seene in a greater parte of the earth, then in that part where he is hidde, and as the presence of the Sunne is cause of the day, and his absence causeth the night, it followeth, that the sunne neuer maketh equalitie of the day, and of the night. Likewise the aforesaid is proued, wherin a case is giuen, that the halfe of the Equinoctial, is aboue the Horizon, and the other halfe beneath, for the greatenesse of the Sunne is the greater parte where hee lighteth, then in that whiche he hideth himselfe: it seemeth euident, that the parte is greater that the sunne lighteth, then that whiche hee leaueth darke. By the which reason is proued that the Sunne maketh not equality of the day with the night.
A declaration.
Contrary to that which is said are many reasōs, I will speake of three in short time. The first is, that our sight doth manifest, how all dayes are not equall, but some daies greater, and some lesser, by the which whersoeuer is giuen greater and lesser, is like wise necessary that there be giuen an equalitie, so that as there is a day greater then the night, & a night greater then the day, of necessitie must be giuen day and night equall, because it cānot passe from one extremitie to another, but by the meane: To the seconde, the Philosopher saith in the sirt of the naturall philosophie, that the sunne being come to the Equinoctiall, the moouing which hee maketh aboue the earth, is equall with that which he maketh vnder. And in like sort, the time of the day is equall with the time of the night.
The thirde, aunswearing to the reasons aforesayde, I say that it is true, that the Sunite lighteth more then halfe the eart, as the perspectiue reason sheweth it, but it is to bee denied, that the day in the Equinoctial is greater then the night, not because when soeuer any part of the light of the Sunne is seene, the day beginneth, but it beginneth when the Ce [...]er of the sunne commeth foorth, and not the partes circumferentials. And so likewise when he setteth, the night beginneth. The reason is because the Planets, and the starres doe occupie a great quantitie, and their place, and moouing is not to bee taken, by any manner of parte, but it ought to bee taken by the Center, and so it is said that the Sunne is in the Equinoctiall, when his Center is there.
The fourth Chapter, howe the dayes and the nightes goe alwayes increasing or diminishing vnto such as inhabite foorth of the Equinoctiall.
IN the first Chapter of y e fourth booke hath beene declared, that from the Eqniuoctiall, to the pole articke is called y e North part, & frō the Equinoctiall to the pole antarticke, is called the South part. Therefore it is to bee vnderstood, that such as inhabite from the Equinoctiall, towards the North part, or the pole articke, as the sunne cōmeth to the tropike of Capricorne, the thirteenth of Decēber, & so beginneth to returne to the line, howe much hee commeth from the said tropike, so much the dayes goe increasing, and to such as inhabite towardes the South parte, they goe decreasing. And the sunne beeyng come to Aries the eleuenth of Matche, he describeth the Equinoctiall line, and maketh in all partes the dayes and nightes equall, and beeing past the first poynt of Aries, the daies begin to waxe greater then the nights & to those of the other part, the daies lesser, & the nights greater, & the sun being come to Cancer the eleuēth of June, the day is greater, and the night lesser, & to the other parte [Page 79] the contrary: for then the sunne is more neere to some and more distant to other some, & frō thēce y e sun turneth to descēd, & as he goeth away frō that parte, the daies goe decreasing, & y e nights increasing, & being come to Libra, y e 13. of September, he returneth to describe the Equinoctiall, and the dayes & the nights are to al equal, & frō thence he goeth descending to Capricorne, & the nights begin to be greater then the daies, & towards y e South part, the dayes greater, and the nightes lesser, & as he commeth to the saide tropike, it maketh a greater night, and a lesser day, & to those of the other parte, the day greater, and the night lesser, for there the Sunne goeth more distant from some, and commeth neerer to other some.
Wherby it is to be noted, that if there be taken two dayes of the yeere, equally distant of y e Equinoctiall line, of cōtrary partes, that howe greate the artificiall day is of the one, so greate the artificiall night is of y e other. Likewise it is to bee vnderstood, that howe much in euerye habitation, the pole is more raysed aboue the Horizon, so muche the daies & the nightes are greater, so that those whose Cenith is in the circle articke. To whom the pole riseth aboue the Horizō, sixtie sixe degrees and a halfe, when the sunne cōmeth to the first point of Cācer, the eleuenth of June is to them one day 24. houres, and the night very short, because in one moment the sunne toucheth that day his Horizon and immediatly cōmeth foorth, and that touching they haue for night. And y e thirteenth of December, whē the sunne commeth to the first degree of Capricorne, then he is to then a night of 24. houres, and a little moment for the day, for in one instāt, the sunne toucheth his horizō, & foorthwith he hideth himselfe, and that touching they haue for a day, by the cōtrary, such as inhabite vnder the circle antartike, haue the like. And those whose Cenith is betweene the circle and the pole of the worlde, whiles the Sunne goeth towardes the North parte, it wilbee to him one day, that whiche his Horizon doth discouer of the Equinoctiall, continually without night, and if that were of the quantitie of one signe that day woulde bee of one Moneth. And if of two signe, it would bee of two Monethes, and so the rest: and hee that were vnder anye of the poles, all the yeere would be to him one day and one night: In such sort, that if he were vnder the pole articke, the sixe monethes whiche the Sunne goeth to the part of the North, woulde bee to him one day without any night, and the other sixe which he goeth towards the part of the South, woulde bee one night, without day, and so contrary it woulde bee, if he were vnder the pole antarticke, so that halfe the yeere, it would bee to him one day, and the other halfe, one night. The cause is, by reason the roundnesse of the worlde, how much it goeth towardes the poles, so muche it goeth to be lesser, and so the Horizon of such as are neerest to the poles, doe discouer more parte of the turne whiche the Sunne giueth in the heauen, when hee goeth from that parte: In suche sorte, that the earth, nor the water, doth not occupy the sight of the Sunne, all the time that hee goeth, rising vp, and turneth descending, vntill hee commeth where his Horizon doth not discouer any thing of the circle or turne, that the Sunne maketh to the worlde, and so how much more, the part is which is seene of this turne, so muche the day wilbe greater.
The fifth Chapter, how the increasing and diminishing of the day is not in all parts alike.
MAny thinges are put in the common opinion of the people that reason, & truth doth shewe it to be in another manner. And amōg others, one is that many doe thinke y t the increasing, & decreasing of y e dayes through all y e yeere are made equall, I will say y t the time, whiche those dayes goeth increasing, so muche increaseth one day as another, and so when they decrease euen by the like sort.
[Page] And according to the quātitie of houres which the day increaseth, from the lesser day to the greater, those being parted by y e time of the 6. monethes, which the day doth increase, they cōsider how muche it is that it increaseth euery day, giuing equall number or quantitie of time to one day, & so much to another. And likewise when the day goeth decreasing how much it is that it decreaseth: in such sort, that the lesser day, hauing nine houres, and the greater 15. these 6. houres which he increaseth, deuided into 6. Monethes, the dayes shoulde increase one houre euery Moneth. And so by the contrary in the other 6. Monethes, it woulde decrease an houre euery Moneth: (This is not so) for in truth only in the Moneth of March, the dayes doe increase as much as they did increase in the 2. Monethes of Januarie and Februarie, and by the contrary, they doe decrease so muche in the onely Moneth of September, as they doe decrease in July and August: also in the Kalenders, in the head of all the Monethes is writtē, that the dayes haue in euery Moneth, so many hours, and the night so many. Of this is to be vnderstood, that neyther the dayes are equall in all the Moneth, nor the number of the houres are one in all places. For in the citie of Ceuill, the dayes are of one quantitie, and in Toledo, of another, & in Burgus another, and so proceeding to the place where the daye is of 24. houres: so that the dayes of euerye Moneth be not equall in houres, nor y e dayes bee not equall in all partes, the cause is, as the sunne maketh differēce from one Moneth to another in cōming neere, or going from the Equinoctiall line, so the daies goe increasing or diminishing this comming neere, or going away of the sun, he doth it not alwaies alike, but he doth it in this manner.
From the 12. of Marche, that hee goeth foorth of the Equinoctiall, he beginneth to rise vp, by the part of the north, from thence vntill the 12. of Aprill, hee hath gone frō the saide line, 12. degrees, and from the 12. of Aprill, to the 12. of May, he hath gone distant other 8. degrees, & from the 12. of May, to y e 11. of June, which hee commeth to the Tropike, hee goeth distant other three degrees and a halfe, whiche are in all 23. degrees and a halfe, whiche the sunne hath of declination or distance, from the saide line, in such sort, that the first Moneth hee goeth distant, the halfe of the said declination, and the seconde Moneth the thirde parte, and the thirde, the sixt part, and so in the increasing of the dayes. The 11. of Marche, the daies & nightes are equall, and from thence to the 11. of Aprill, the day increaseth halfe of all the time that hee will increase, & from the 12. of Aprill, to the 12. of May, he increaseth the thirde parte, and from the 12 of May to the 11. of June, hee increaseth the sixt part, whereby that in the straight course, where the greatest day hath 15: houres, the 12. of March, it hath 12. and the 12. of Aprill, 13. & a halfe, and the 12. of May 14. and a halfe, and to the 11. of June 15. And by this reasō in y e straight course, where the greatest day hath 16. houres, and in him where hee hath 14. or more, or lesse: the 12. of May, or in any other day, except in the Equinoctials, the dayes will not bee equall, but one wilbe greater then another, in suche sorte, that the day hath more increased to them which haue 16. houres then to them which haue foureteene, so that such as haue sixeteene, the twelfth of May, the day hath increased two houres, and to such as haue foureteene, it hath not increased more then one, And as the day went increasing at the rising vp of the sunne, so hee returneth diminishing or decreasing, when hee descendeth. And so the reckoning ought to bee kepte in all partes, according to the quantitie of the time and houres, whiche the greatest day hath.
And it is to bee noted, that howe much the day increaseth of twelue houres vpwarde: so much hee decreaseth of twelue houres downward, therfore to knowe the quantitie of houres, and points, that the greatest day of the yeere hath in euery degree of distance of the Equinoctiall line: In the table hereafter written, shalbee declared, the [Page 80] which is likewise to bee vnderstood for the part of the South, as for the part of the North.
And it is to be knowen what day it is called in this reckoning frō y e time that halfe the body of the sun riseth, vntill the other half be set, & all the other is night, also the houres or parts of the day are not vnderstood by y e twelfth part of the day, or of the night, but by these vulgar things of the clocke, for by another name they are called Equinoctials: for in euery one of them riseth fifteene degrees of y e Equinoctiall, & other fifteene setteth. And likewise it is to bee vnderstood, y t in this account threescore points or minutes doe make an houre, & thirtie, half an houre. And so of the rest.
A Table of the houres, and minutes which the greatest day of the yeere hath, to such as inhabite in any manner of distance of the Equinoctiall.
Deg. | Hour. | Minut. | Deg. | Hour. | Minut. | Degrees | Houres | Minuts. |
1 | 12 | 1 | 23 | 13 | 27 | 45 | 15 | 27 |
2 | 12 | 3 | 24 | 13 | 30 | 46 | 15 | 33 |
3 | 12 | 5 | 25 | 13 | 34 | 47 | 15 | 40 |
4 | 12 | 8 | 26 | 13 | 39 | 48 | 15 | 50 |
5 | 12 | 12 | 27 | 13 | 43 | 49 | 16 | 2 |
6 | 12 | 17 | 28 | 13 | 48 | 50 | 16 | 11 |
7 | 12 | 21 | 29 | 13 | 52 | 51 | 16 | 22 |
8 | 12 | 25 | 30 | 13 | 57 | 52 | 16 | 34 |
9 | 12 | 29 | 31 | 14 | 2 | 53 | 16 | 45 |
10 | 12 | 34 | 32 | 14 | 7 | 54 | 17 | 0 |
11 | 12 | 40 | 33 | 14 | 12 | 55 | 17 | 15 |
12 | 12 | 45 | 34 | 14 | 17 | 56 | 17 | 30 |
13 | 12 | 49 | 35 | 14 | 22 | 57 | 17 | 45 |
14 | 12 | 54 | 36 | 14 | 27 | 58 | 18 | 0 |
15 | 12 | 57 | 37 | 14 | 32 | 59 | 18 | 20 |
16 | 13 | 0 | 38 | 14 | 38 | 60 | 18 | 40 |
17 | 13 | 4 | 39 | 14 | 45 | 61 | 19 | 0 |
18 | 13 | 7 | 40 | 14 | 52 | 62 | 19 | 30 |
19 | 13 | 11 | 41 | 14 | 59 | 63 | 20 | 0 |
20 | 13 | 15 | 42 | 15 | 6 | 64 | 21 | 0 |
21 | 13 | 19 | 43 | 15 | 12 | 65 | 22 | 0 |
22 | 13 | 23 | 44 | 15 | 19 | 66 | 23 | 0 |
66m | 24 | 0 |
The sixt Chapter, of the houres, pointes or minutes, that euery day of the yeere hath in the altitude of fortie degrees.
IN the table before written, hath beene declared the number of the houres and minutes, or points that the greatest day of the yeere hath in any māner of distance, of the Equinoctiall line, and because it is likewise profitable, to knowe the houres & points, that successiuely, euery day in the yeere, hath in euery parte. But for to make this apparant, to al persons, it were needfull to haue many tables. Therefore this is only taken out for the altitude of fortie degrees, where the greatest day hath foureteene houres &, and fiftie two minutes, which are well neere fifteene houres. For in this altitude, is the middest of Spayne, so that with little difference or more or lesse, it may serue in all Spayne.
In the other partes may bee taken out the reckoning, according to the greatnesse of the greatest day, agreeable to the Table before written.
Ianuarie. | Februarie. | March. | ||||||
Daies | Houres | Points | Daies | Houres | Points | Daies | Houres | Points |
1 | 9 | 22 | 1 | 10 | 22 | 1 | 11 | 34 |
2 | 9 | 23 | 2 | 10 | 24 | 2 | 11 | 36 |
3 | 9 | 24 | 3 | 10 | 26 | 3 | 11 | 39 |
4 | 9 | 25 | 4 | 10 | 29 | 4 | 11 | 43 |
5 | 9 | 26 | 5 | 10 | 3 | 5 | 11 | 44 |
6 | 9 | 28 | 6 | 10 | 34 | 6 | 11 | 47 |
7 | 9 | 30 | 7 | 10 | 37 | 7 | 11 | 50 |
8 | 9 | 32 | 8 | 10 | 40 | 8 | 11 | 53 |
9 | 9 | 34 | 9 | 10 | 42 | 9 | 11 | 56 |
10 | 9 | 36 | 10 | 10 | 44 | 10 | 11 | 59 |
11 | 9 | 38 | 11 | 10 | 46 | 11 | 12 | 2 |
12 | 9 | 40 | 12 | 10 | 48 | 12 | 12 | 4 |
13 | 9 | 42 | 13 | 10 | 50 | 13 | 12 | 8 |
14 | 9 | 44 | 14 | 10 | 53 | 14 | 12 | 11 |
15 | 9 | 46 | 15 | 10 | 56 | 15 | 12 | 14 |
16 | 9 | 48 | 16 | 10 | 59 | 16 | 12 | 16 |
17 | 9 | 50 | 17 | 11 | 4 | 17 | 12 | 18 |
18 | 9 | 52 | 18 | 11 | 7 | 18 | 12 | 21 |
19 | 9 | 54 | 19 | 11 | 10 | 19 | 12 | 24 |
20 | 9 | 57 | 20 | 11 | 12 | 20 | 12 | 26 |
21 | 9 | 0 | 21 | 11 | 15 | 21 | 12 | 29 |
22 | 10 | 2 | 22 | 11 | 18 | 22 | 12 | 32 |
23 | 10 | 4 | 23 | 11 | 20 | 23 | 12 | 35 |
24 | 10 | 6 | 24 | 11 | 23 | 24 | 12 | 37 |
25 | 10 | 8 | 25 | 11 | 26 | 25 | 12 | 39 |
26 | 10 | 10 | 26 | 11 | 28 | 26 | 12 | 41 |
27 | 10 | 12 | 27 | 11 | 30 | 27 | 12 | 43 |
28 | 10 | 15 | 28 | 11 | 32 | 28 | 12 | 45 |
29 | 10 | 46 | 29 | 12 | 48 | |||
30 | 10 | 18 | 30 | 12 | 50 | |||
31 | 10 | 20 | 31 | 12 | 53 |
Aprill. | May. | Iune. | ||||||
Daies | Houres | Points | Daies | Houres | Points | Daies | Houres | Points |
1 | 12 | 56 | 1 | 14 | 4 | 1 | 14 | 47 |
2 | 12 | 59 | 2 | 14 | 6 | 2 | 14 | 47 |
3 | 13 | 2 | 3 | 14 | 8 | 3 | 14 | 48 |
4 | 13 | 4 | 4 | 14 | 10 | 4 | 14 | 48 |
5 | 13 | 6 | 5 | 14 | 12 | 5 | 14 | 49 |
6 | 13 | 9 | 6 | 14 | 14 | 6 | 14 | 49 |
7 | 13 | 12 | 7 | 14 | 16 | 7 | 14 | 49 |
8 | 13 | 14 | 8 | 14 | 18 | 8 | 14 | 50 |
9 | 13 | 16 | 9 | 14 | 20 | 9 | 14 | 50 |
10 | 13 | 18 | 10 | 14 | 22 | 10 | 14 | 51 |
11 | 13 | 20 | 11 | 14 | 24 | 11 | 14 | 52 |
12 | 13 | 22 | 12 | 24 | 26 | 12 | 14 | 52 |
13 | 13 | 24 | 13 | 14 | 27 | 13 | 14 | 52 |
14 | 13 | 26 | 14 | 14 | 28 | 14 | 14 | 51 |
15 | 13 | 28 | 15 | 14 | 29 | 15 | 14 | 50 |
16 | 13 | 31 | 16 | 14 | 30 | 16 | 14 | 50 |
17 | 13 | 34 | 17 | 14 | 32 | 17 | 14 | 49 |
18 | 13 | 36 | 18 | 14 | 33 | 18 | 14 | 49 |
19 | 13 | 39 | 19 | 14 | 34 | 19 | 14 | 48 |
20 | 13 | 42 | 20 | 14 | 36 | 20 | 14 | 48 |
21 | 13 | 44 | 21 | 14 | 38 | 21 | 14 | 47 |
22 | 13 | 46 | 22 | 14 | 39 | 22 | 14 | 47 |
23 | 13 | 48 | 23 | 14 | 40 | 23 | 14 | 46 |
24 | 13 | 50 | 24 | 14 | 41 | 24 | 14 | 46 |
25 | 13 | 52 | 25 | 14 | 42 | 25 | 14 | 45 |
26 | 13 | 54 | 26 | 14 | 43 | 26 | 14 | 45 |
27 | 13 | 56 | 27 | 14 | 44 | 27 | 14 | 44 |
28 | 13 | 58 | 28 | 14 | 45 | 28 | 14 | 43 |
29 | 14 | 29 | 14 | 45 | 29 | 14 | 42 | |
30 | 14 | 2 | 30 | 14 | 46 | 30 | 14 | 41 |
31 | 14 | 46 |
Iulie. | August. | September. | ||||||
Daies | Houres | Points | Daies | Houres | Points | Daies | Houres | Points |
1 | 14 | 40 | 1 | 13 | 50 | 1 | 12 | 38 |
2 | 14 | 39 | 2 | 13 | 48 | 2 | 12 | 33 |
3 | 14 | 38 | 3 | 13 | 46 | 3 | 12 | 29 |
4 | 14 | 37 | 4 | 13 | 44 | 4 | 12 | 26 |
5 | 14 | 36 | 5 | 13 | 42 | 5 | 12 | 23 |
6 | 14 | 35 | 6 | 13 | 39 | 6 | 12 | 19 |
7 | 14 | 34 | 7 | 13 | 36 | 7 | 12 | 17 |
8 | 14 | 33 | 8 | 13 | 34 | 8 | 12 | 15 |
9 | 14 | 31 | 9 | 13 | 32 | 9 | 12 | 11 |
10 | 14 | 30 | 10 | 13 | 30 | 10 | 12 | 7 |
11 | 14 | 28 | 11 | 13 | 28 | 11 | 12 | 4 |
12 | 14 | 26 | 12 | 23 | 26 | 12 | 12 | 2 |
13 | 14 | 25 | 13 | 13 | 24 | 13 | 12 | 0 |
14 | 14 | 24 | 14 | 13 | 22 | 14 | 11 | 59 |
15 | 14 | 22 | 15 | 13 | 20 | 15 | 11 | 57 |
16 | 14 | 20 | 16 | 13 | 18 | 16 | 11 | 55 |
17 | 14 | 18 | 17 | 13 | 16 | 17 | 11 | 52 |
18 | 14 | 16 | 18 | 13 | 14 | 18 | 11 | 49 |
19 | 14 | 14 | 19 | 13 | 12 | 19 | 11 | 46 |
20 | 14 | 12 | 20 | 13 | 9 | 20 | 11 | 44 |
21 | 14 | 10 | 21 | 13 | 6 | 21 | 11 | 41 |
22 | 14 | 8 | 22 | 13 | 4 | 22 | 11 | 38 |
23 | 14 | 6 | 23 | 13 | 1 | 23 | 11 | 36 |
24 | 14 | 4 | 24 | 12 | 59 | 24 | 11 | 33 |
25 | 14 | 2 | 25 | 12 | 56 | 25 | 11 | 30 |
26 | 14 | 1 | 26 | 12 | 53 | 26 | 11 | 28 |
27 | 14 | 0 | 27 | 12 | 50 | 27 | 11 | 25 |
28 | 13 | 59 | 28 | 12 | 48 | 28 | 11 | 22 |
29 | 13 | 58 | 29 | 12 | 46 | 29 | 11 | 20 |
30 | 13 | 56 | 30 | 12 | 43 | 30 | 11 | 17 |
31 | 13 | 54 | 31 | 12 | 40 |
October. | Nouember. | December. | ||||||
Daies | Houres | Points | Daies | Houres | Points | Daies | Houres | Points |
1 | 11 | 15 | 1 | 10 | 1 | 9 | 15 | |
2 | 11 | 12 | 2 | 9 | 58 | 2 | 9 | 15 |
3 | 11 | 9 | 3 | 9 | 56 | 3 | 9 | 14 |
4 | 11 | 6 | 4 | 9 | 54 | 4 | 9 | 14 |
5 | 11 | 4 | 5 | 9 | 52 | 5 | 9 | 13 |
6 | 11 | 1 | 6 | 9 | 50 | 6 | 9 | 12 |
7 | 10 | 58 | 7 | 9 | 34 | 7 | 9 | 11 |
8 | 10 | 56 | 8 | 9 | 46 | 8 | 9 | 11 |
9 | 10 | 53 | 9 | 9 | 44 | 9 | 9 | 10 |
10 | 10 | 50 | 10 | 9 | 4 [...] | 10 | 9 | 9 |
11 | 10 | 48 | 11 | 9 | 40 | 11 | 9 | 9 |
12 | 10 | 46 | 12 | 9 | 38 | 12 | 9 | 8 |
13 | 10 | 44 | 13 | 9 | 36 | 13 | 9 | 8 |
14 | 10 | 42 | 14 | 9 | 34 | 14 | 9 | 8 |
15 | 10 | 39 | 15 | 9 | 33 | 15 | 9 | 9 |
16 | 10 | 36 | 16 | 9 | 32 | 16 | 9 | 9 |
17 | 10 | 34 | 17 | 9 | 30 | 17 | 9 | 10 |
18 | 10 | 31 | 18 | 9 | 28 | 18 | 9 | 10 |
19 | 10 | 29 | 19 | 9 | 26 | 19 | 9 | 11 |
20 | 10 | 26 | 20 | 9 | 24 | 20 | 9 | 12 |
21 | 10 | 23 | 21 | 9 | 23 | 21 | 9 | 13 |
22 | 10 | 20 | 22 | 9 | 22 | 22 | 9 | 13 |
23 | 10 | 18 | 23 | 9 | 21 | 23 | 9 | 14 |
24 | 10 | 16 | 24 | 9 | 20 | 24 | 9 | 14 |
25 | 10 | 14 | 25 | 9 | 19 | 25 | 9 | 15 |
26 | 10 | 12 | 26 | 9 | 18 | 26 | 9 | 16 |
27 | 10 | 10 | 27 | 9 | 17 | 27 | 9 | 17 |
28 | 10 | 8 | 28 | 9 | 17 | 28 | 9 | 18 |
29 | 10 | 6 | 29 | 9 | 16 | 29 | 9 | 19 |
30 | 10 | 4 | 30 | 9 | 16 | 30 | 9 | 20 |
31 | 10 | 2 | 31 | 9 | 21 |
The seuenth Chapter, of the houre, and point which the sunne riseth, and setteth in euery one day of the yere.
ANd seeing there hath bin declared in the Chapter going before, the houres, and minutes which euery day hath, it is conuenient to speake in this at what houre and minute the sunne riseth and setteth, in euery day of the yeere: for the which first of all, it is to be noted, that for to take out the houre when the sun shall rise, is to be reckoned from xii. of y e clocke in the night. And the houre when it shall set, is to be reckoned from xii. of the clocke in the day. Therfore looke ouer the houres and pointes which the sunne hath, and deuide them in the middest, & that which one half doth amount to, take it out of twelue, and that which remaineth shalbe the houre, wherin the sunne riseth, and the same halfe shal bee the houre wherin the sunne setteth, so that for when hee riseth take out of xii. half of the number which the day hath: And to y t which remaineth, is y e point, where the sunne riseth and setteth him self after the middest of the day, at the point which is halfe of the number that the day hath.
An example.
The first day of Januarie, hee hath niene houres, and xxii. points, halfe this is iiii. houres, and fourtie one pointes, therefore these foure houres, and fourtie one pointes, taken out of xii. houres, remaineth vii. houres & nienteene points, and so the first day of Januarie, the sun commeth forth at vii. of the clocke, and nienteene pointes after midnight, and setteth at foure of the clocke, and fourtie one points, after the middest of the day, which was halfe the number that the day hath.
The eyght Chapter, howe the sunne giueth his light at equal time of the yeere to such as inhabite in the worlde.
IN the rules and accoūts beefore declared, there might bee a doubt saying, seeing that in some parts of the world, The dayes be great, and in other partes litle, let vs see if in any one part of the world the sunne shineth in al the yeere more time then in other. To this is to be noted, that although it bee true, y t in some part of y e world, & times of the yeere, y e dayes & nights be greater then in other some, it is to be taken, that the sunne by his owne mouing, that hee maketh in the yeere, at equal time of the yeere is seene and giueth light in all partes, so that as long time of the yeere he is seene in the part where the dayes be little, as in the part where they bee great, the which is knowen in this mā ner, consider that which euery part hath in it, of the day, and that which it hath of the night in this manner, such as inhabite vnder the equinoctiall, as they haue continually, the dayes equall with the nights, euery one of thē xii. houres, it is certaine that halfe the time of the yere they haue day, and they see the sun, and he sheweth light to them, and the other half they haue night, that they see him not, and such as dwell in fourtie and two degrees which haue the greatest day of xv houres, they haue also day of niene houres, and so as the day goeth increasing from xii. to xv. houres, so they come decreasing vnto niene, in such sorte that the said time, which they haue of day, the same they haue of night, so consequently those which inhabite in sixtie degrees which haue the greatest day of xx. houres, they haue likewise day of foure houres, and as the sunne goeth lighting of them, & the daies increasing vnto twentie houres, likewise they goe decreasing vntill the day be no more but iiii. houres, and the night goeth increasing and diminishing the like. And of those which inhabite in sixty sixe degrees and a half, haue y e greatest day of twentie foure houres, likewise they haue night of y e said xxiiii. houres, and such as haue day of one moneth without [Page] night, haue likewise a moneth of night without day, and such as shoulde haue sixe monethes of day without night, shoulde haue other sixe monethes of night without day, and so the time beeing considered which euery part hath of day, and being seene, that as much iustly it hath of night: So shalbe founde that not onely in the torrida zona, by the which the sunne continually moueth, but likewise in the other partes very distant and farre off, and also vnder the poles them selues, so long time of the yeere it is that the sunne is seene, as the time that he is not seen, in such sort, that the sunne giueth his light in equall time in all parts, and not in one more then in another. So the omanipotent God, maker of the heauens, of the earth, & of all that is in them, did dispose and ordeine, whose name be blessed, in the worlden worldes. Amen.
God saue the Queene.
❧Imprinted in London at the three Cranes in the vinetree, by Thomas Dawson, and are there to be solde. 1581.